Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit Set_FedEx Annex_Specifications_042522
PROJECT MANUAL (A & E SPECIFICATIONS) FED EX ANNEX – CAPE COD MA 225 WHITE’S PATH, UNITS 2 & 3 SOUTH YARMOUTH, MA April 25, 2022 REFERENCE DOCUMENT: FED EX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA (DATED 01/07/22) *Permit Set* ARCHITECTS: Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 203 Willow St., Suite A, Yarmouthport, MA 02675 Tel. (508) 362-8382 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Consulting Structural Engineers, Inc. 336 Baker Ave., Concord, MA 01742 Tel. (978)866-8354 MEP/FP ENGINEER: Consulting Engineering Services 128 Carnegie Row, Suite 204, Norwood, MA 02062 Tel. (617)261-7161 CIVIL ENGINEER: CHA 141 Longwater Dr., Ste. 104, Norwell, MA 02061 Tel. (781)982-7700 FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 0110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS A.00 0110 - Table of Contents B.00 0115 - List of Drawing Sheets C.00 5200 - Agreement Form 00 5200.01 - AIA A133-2019 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Construction Manager as Constructor D.00 6325 - Substitution Request Form - During Construction E.00 7200 - General Conditions 00 7200.01 - AIA A201-2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction SPECIFICATIONS 2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.01 1000 - Summary B.01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures 1.AIA G702-1992 Application for Payment 2.AIA G703-1992 Schedule of Values C.01 2500 - Substitution Procedures D.01 3000 - Administrative Requirements E.01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule F.01 4000 - Quality Requirements G.01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls H.01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control I.01 6000 - Product Requirements J.01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 7000.01 - AIA G704-2000 Certificate of Substantial Completion K.01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal 2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS A.02 4100 - Demolition 2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE A.03 0000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete (Structural) B.03 0000.10 - Cast-in-Place Concrete (Architectural) 2.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY (NOT USED) 2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS A.05 1200.01 - Structural Steel Framing (General Requirements) B.05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing C.05 5000 - Metal Fabrications D.05 5100 - Metal Stairs 2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES A.06 1000 - Rough Carpentry B.06 2000 - Finish Carpentry FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 0110 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A.07 8400 - Firestopping B.07 9200 - Joint Sealants 2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS A.08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B.08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels C.08 3323.13 - Overhead Rapid Coiling Doors D.08 3613 - Sectional Doors E.08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts F.08 7100 - Door Hardware G.08 8000 - Glazing H.08 9100 - Louvers 2.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A.09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies B.09 3000 - Tiling C.09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings D.09 6500 - Resilient Flooring E.09 9113 - Exterior Painting F.09 9123 - Interior Painting 2.10 DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES A.10 1400 - Signage B.10 2213 - Wire Mesh Partitions - Refer to FedEx Specifications C.10 2216 - Folding Gates - Refer to FedEx Specifications D.10 2219 - Demountable Partitions - Refer to FedEx Specifications E.10 2800 - Toilet Accessories - Refer to FedEx Specifications F.10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties G.10 5113 - Metal Lockers - Refer to FedEx Specifications H.10 5523 - Mail Boxes - Refer to FedEx Specifications I.10 7313 - Awnings 2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT A.11 1313 - Loading Dock Bumpers - Refer to FedEx Specifications B.11 1319 - Loading Dock Seals and Shelters - Refer to FedEx Specifications C.11 1319 - Stationary Loading Dock Equipment - Refer to FedEx Specifications D.11 1319.13 - Loading Dock Levelers E.11 4700 - Ice Machines - Refer to FedEx Specifications 2.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS A.12 2113 - Horizontal Louver Blinds - Refer to FedEx Specifications 2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION A.21 0400 - General Conditions for Fire Protection Trades FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 0110 - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS B.21 1313 - Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 2.16 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING A.22 0400 - General Conditions for Plumbing Trades B.22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing C.22 0517 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping D.22 0523 - General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping E.22 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment F.22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment G.22 0700 - Plumbing Insulation H.22 1005 - Plumbing Piping I.22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures and Specialites 2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) A.23 0400 - General Conditions for Mechanical Trades B.23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment C.23 0558 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment D.23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment E.23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC F.23 0700 - HVAC Insulation G.23 2113 - Hydronic Piping H.23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings I.23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories J.23 3400 - HVAC Fans K.23 3500 - Vehicle Exhaust Detection System L.23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets M.23 5400 - Furnaces N.23 7423 - Packaged Makeup - Air Units O.23 8123 - Computer Room Air Conditioners P.23 8126 - Spilt System Air Conditioners Q.23 8200 - Convection Heating and Cooling Units 2.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL A.26 0400 - General Conditions for Electrical Trades B.26 0519 - Electrical Power Conductors and Cables C.26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems D.26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems E.26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems F.26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems G.26 2200 - Low Voltage Dry Type Transformers H.26 2416 - Panelboards I.26 2726 - Wiring Devices J.26 2813 - Fuses K.26 2819 - Enclosed Switches FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 0110 - 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS L.26 5100 - Lighting 2.19 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK 2.20 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS A.32 1723.13 - Painted Pavement Markings END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 0115 - 1 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS SECTION 00 0115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 0115 - 2 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS A0.0 COVER SHEET A0.1 PROJECT INFO, DWG LIST, SYMBOLS & GENERAL NOTES LS.1 LIFE SAFETY PLAN & CODE SUMMARY TABLE EX1.1 EXISTING OVERALL FLOOR PLAN EX1.2 EXISTING OFFICE AREA FLOOR PLAN EX1.3 EXISTING REFLECTED CEILING PLAN EX1.4 EXISTING OFFICE AREA REFLECTED CEILING PLAN EX1.5 EXISTING ROOF PLAN EX2.1 EXISTING BUILDING ELEVATIONS EX3.1 EXISTING BUILDING SECTIONS D.1 DEMOLITION PLAN D.2 OFFICE AREA DEMOLTION PLAN D.3 OFFICE AREA CEILING DEMOLITION PLAN D.4 BUILDING ELEVATIONS - DEMOLITION PLANS A1.1 PROPOSED OVERALL FLOOR PLAN A1.2 PROPOSED OFFICE AREA FLOOR PLAN A1.3 PROPOSED OFFICE AREA REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A1.4 PROPOSED REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A1.5 PROPOSED ROOF PLAN A1.6 PROPOSED ROOF ACCESS HATCH AND ACCESS STAIR DETAILS A2.1 PROPOSED BUILDING EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A3.1 PROPOSED OFFICE AREA SECTIONS A4.1 INTERIOR WALL TYPES A4.2 COMPUTER ROOM DETAILS A5.1 EXTERIOR NEW RAMP DETAILS AT PARKING AREA A5.2 EXTERIOR NEW RAMP DETAILS AT DISTRIBUTION AREA A5.3 TYPICAL ROOF OPENING DETAILS A6.1 PROPOSED EXTERIOR DETAILS A9.1 SCHEDULES S0.1 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS S0.2 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS S0.3 STRUCTURAL DETAILS S0.4 STRUCTURAL DETAILS AND MEZZANINE PLAN S1.0A PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN S1.0B PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN S1.0C PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN S1.0D PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN S2.1A INTERSTITIAL FRAMING PLAN AREA - A S2.1B INTERSTITIAL FRAMING PLAN AREA - B S2.1C INTERSTITIAL FRAMING PLAN AREA - C FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 0115 - 3 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS S2.1D INTERSTITIAL FRAMING PLAN AREA - D S2.2A ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA - A S2.2B ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA - B S2.2C ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA - C S2.2D ROOF FRAMING PLAN AREA - D FP0.1 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN P0.1 PLUMBING ABBREVIATIONS, NOTES AND SYMBOLS P1.1 PLUMBING UNDERSLAB FLOOR PLAN P1.2 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN P5.0 PLUMBING DETAILS P6.0 PLUMBING SCHEDULES AND DIAGRAMS M0.1 MECHANICAL NOTES AND LEGENDS M1.1 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN M1.2 MECHANICAL PARTIAL PLAN M5.1 MECHANICAL DETAILS M6.1 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M6.2 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES AND DIAGRAMS E0.1 ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGENDS E1.1 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN E2.1 ELECTRICAL POWER FLOOR PLAN E4.1 ELECTRICAL PART PLAN E5.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E6.1 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E6.2 ELECTRCIAL SCHEDULES E6.3 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E7.1 ELECTRICAL POWER RISER DIAGRAM FA0.1 FIRE ALARM RISER, NOTES AND SYMBOLS FA1.1 FIRE ALARM FLOOR PLAN END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 5200 - 1 AGREEMENT FORM SECTION 00 5200 AGREEMENT FORM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 FORM OF AGREEMENT: AIA A133 - 2019 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AS CONSTRUCTOR. A DRAFT OF THE AGREEMENT TO BE EXECUTED IS ATTACHED FOLLOWING THIS PAGE. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 00 7200 - General Conditions. END OF SECTION AIA® Document A133™ – 2019 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Construction Manager as Constructor where the basis of payment is the Cost of the Work Plus a Fee with a Guaranteed Maximum Price AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 1 ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA® Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document. AGREEMENT made as of the « » day of « » in the year «2022 » (In words, indicate day, month, and year.) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, legal status, address, and other information) «Greg Bilezikian »« » «225 White’s Path Units 2 and 3 LLC » «231 Willow Street » «Yarmouth Port, MA 02675 » and the Construction Manager: (Name, legal status, address, and other information) « Dellbrook Construction LLC d/b/a Dellbrook | JKS (“Construction Manager”) »« » « One Adams Place 859 Willard St. Quincy, MA 02169 »« » « » « » « » for the following Project: (Name, location, and detailed description) «225 White’s Path » «225 White’s Path » «South Yarmouth, MA 02664 » The Architect: (Name, legal status, address, and other information) «Catalyst Architects »« » «203 Willow Street, Suite A » «Yarmouth Port, MA 02675 » « » The Owner and Construction Manager agree as follows. AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 2 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 INITIAL INFORMATION 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS 3 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 4 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 5 COMPENSATION AND PAYMENTS FOR PRECONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES 6 COMPENSATION FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES 7 COST OF THE WORK FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE 8 DISCOUNTS, REBATES, AND REFUNDS 9 SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER AGREEMENTS 10 ACCOUNTING RECORDS 11 PAYMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES 12 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 13 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 15 SCOPE OF THE AGREEMENT EXHIBIT A GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE AMENDMENT EXHIBIT B INSURANCE AND BONDS ARTICLE 1 INITIAL INFORMATION § 1.1 This Agreement is based on the Initial Information set forth in this Section 1.1. (For each item in this section, insert the information or a statement such as “not applicable” or “unknown at time of execution.”) § 1.1.1 The Owner’s program for the Project, as described in Section 4.1.1: (Insert the Owner’s program, identify documentation that establishes the Owner’s program, or state the manner in which the program will be developed.) « » § 1.1.2 The Project’s physical characteristics: (Identify or describe pertinent information about the Project’s physical characteristics, such as size; location; dimensions; geotechnical reports; site boundaries; topographic surveys; traffic and utility studies; availability of public and private utilities and services; legal description of the site, etc.) « » § 1.1.3 The Owner’s budget for the Guaranteed Maximum Price, as defined in Article 6: (Provide total and, if known, a line item breakdown.) « » AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 3 § 1.1.4 The Owner’s anticipated design and construction milestone dates: .1 Design phase milestone dates, if any: « » .2 Construction commencement date: « » .3 Substantial Completion date or dates: « » .4 Other milestone dates: « » § 1.1.5 The Owner’s requirements for accelerated or fast-track scheduling, or phased construction, are set forth below: (Identify any requirements for fast-track scheduling or phased construction.) « » § 1.1.6 The Owner’s anticipated Sustainable Objective for the Project: (Identify and describe the Owner’s Sustainable Objective for the Project, if any.) « » § 1.1.6.1 If the Owner identifies a Sustainable Objective, the Owner and Construction Manager shall complete and incorporate AIA Document E234™–2019, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, Construction Manager as Constructor Edition, into this Agreement to define the terms, conditions and services related to the Owner’s Sustainable Objective. If E234– 2019 is incorporated into this agreement, the Owner and Construction Manager shall incorporate the completed E234– 2019 into the agreements with the consultants and contractors performing services or Work in any way associated with the Sustainable Objective. § 1.1.7 Other Project information: (Identify special characteristics or needs of the Project not provided elsewhere.) « » § 1.1.8 The Owner identifies the following representative in accordance with Section 4.2: (List name, address, and other contact information.) « » « » « » « » « » « » § 1.1.9 The persons or entities, in addition to the Owner’s representative, who are required to review the Construction Manager’s submittals to the Owner are as follows: (List name, address and other contact information.) « » § 1.1.10 The Owner shall retain the following consultants and contractors: (List name, legal status, address, and other contact information.) AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 4 .1 Geotechnical Engineer: « »« » « » « » « » « » .2 Civil Engineer: « »« » « » « » « » « » .3 Other, if any: (List any other consultants retained by the Owner, such as a Project or Program Manager.) « » § 1.1.11 The Architect’s representative: (List name, address, and other contact information.) « » « » « » « » « » « » § 1.1.12 The Construction Manager identifies the following representative in accordance with Article 3: (List name, address, and other contact information.) « » « » « » « » « » « » § 1.1.13 The Owner’s requirements for the Construction Manager’s staffing plan for Preconstruction Services, as required under Section 3.1.9: (List any Owner-specific requirements to be included in the staffing plan.) « » § 1.1.14 The Owner’s requirements for subcontractor procurement for the performance of the Work: (List any Owner-specific requirements for subcontractor procurement.) « » § 1.1.15 Other Initial Information on which this Agreement is based: « » AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 5 § 1.2 The Owner and Construction Manager may rely on the Initial Information. Both parties, however, recognize that such information may materially change and, in that event, the Owner and the Construction Manager shall appropriately adjust the Project schedule, the Construction Manager’s services, and the Construction Manager’s compensation. The Owner shall adjust the Owner’s budget for the Guaranteed Maximum Price and the Owner’s anticipated design and construction milestones, as necessary, to accommodate material changes in the Initial Information. § 1.3 Neither the Owner’s nor the Construction Manager’s representative shall be changed without ten days’ prior notice to the other party. ARTICLE 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 2.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. Upon the Owner’s acceptance of the Construction Manager’s Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal, the Contract Documents will also include the documents described in Section 3.2.3 and identified in the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment and revisions prepared by the Architect and furnished by the Owner as described in Section 3.2.8. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. If anything in the other Contract Documents, other than a Modification, is inconsistent with this Agreement, this Agreement shall govern. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 15. § 2.2 Relationship of the Parties The Construction Manager accepts the relationship of trust and confidence established by this Agreement and covenants with the Owner to cooperate with the Architect and exercise the Construction Manager’s skill and judgment in furthering the interests of the Owner to furnish efficient construction administration, management services, and supervision; to furnish at all times an adequate supply of workers and materials; and to perform the Work in an expeditious and economical manner consistent with the Owner’s interests. The Owner agrees to furnish or approve, in a timely manner, information required by the Construction Manager and to make payments to the Construction Manager in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Notwithstanding the foregoing or any other provision of the Contract Documents, Construction Manager shall not be deemed a trustee or fiduciary of the Owner. § 2.3 General Conditions § 2.3.1 For the Preconstruction Phase, AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, shall apply as follows: Section 1.5, Ownership and Use of Documents; Section 1.7, Digital Data Use and Transmission; Section 1.8, Building Information Model Use and Reliance; Section 2.2.4, Confidential Information; Section 3.12.10, Professional Services; Section 10.3, Hazardous Materials; Section 13.1, Governing Law. The term “Contractor” as used in A201–2017 shall mean the Construction Manager. § 2.3.2 For the Construction Phase, the general conditions of the contract shall be as set forth in A201–2017, which document is incorporated herein by reference. The term “Contractor” as used in A201–2017 shall mean the Construction Manager. ARTICLE 3 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S RESPONSIBILITIES The Construction Manager’s Preconstruction Phase responsibilities are set forth in Sections 3.1 and 3.2, and in the applicable provisions of A201-2017 referenced in Section 2.3.1. The Construction Manager’s Construction Phase responsibilities are set forth in Section 3.3. The Owner and Construction Manager may agree, in consultation with the Architect, for the Construction Phase to commence prior to completion of the Preconstruction Phase, in which case, both phases will proceed concurrently. The Construction Manager shall identify a representative authorized to act on behalf of the Construction Manager with respect to the Project. § 3.1 Preconstruction Phase § 3.1.1 Extent of Responsibility The Construction Manager shall exercise reasonable care in performing its Preconstruction Services. The Owner and Architect shall be entitled to rely on, and shall not be responsible for, the accuracy, completeness, and timeliness of services and information furnished by the Construction Manager. The Construction Manager, however, does not warrant or guarantee estimates and schedules except as may be included as part of the Guaranteed Maximum Price. The Construction Manager is not required to ascertain that the Drawings and Specifications are in accordance with AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 6 applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Construction Manager shall promptly report to the Architect and Owner any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Construction Manager as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. The Contractor has rendered and will render opinions, advice and recommendations to the Owner and the Architect as value engineering in order to help reduce the overall cost. By doing so, the Contractor has not assumed any of the duties or obligations of the Owner or Architect. The final decision as to the use of any opinions, advice or recommendations supplied by the Contractor is, and remains, the responsibility of the Owner and Architect. § 3.1.2 The Construction Manager shall provide a preliminary evaluation of the Owner’s program, schedule and construction budget requirements, each in terms of the other. § 3.1.3 Consultation § 3.1.3.1 The Construction Manager shall schedule and conduct meetings with the Architect and Owner to discuss such matters as procedures, progress, coordination, and scheduling of the Work. § 3.1.3.2 The Construction Manager shall advise the Owner and Architect on proposed site use and improvements, selection of materials, building systems, and equipment. The Construction Manager shall also provide recommendations to the Owner and Architect, consistent with the Project requirements, on constructability; availability of materials and labor; time requirements for procurement, installation and construction; prefabrication; and factors related to construction cost including, but not limited to, costs of alternative designs or materials, preliminary budgets, life-cycle data, and possible cost reductions. The Construction Manager shall consult with the Architect regarding professional services to be provided by the Construction Manager during the Construction Phase. § 3.1.3.3 The Construction Manager shall assist the Owner and Architect in establishing building information modeling and digital data protocols for the Project, using AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data. § 3.1.4 Project Schedule When Project requirements in Section 4.1.1 have been sufficiently identified, the Construction Manager shall prepare and periodically update a Project schedule for the Architect’s review and the Owner’s acceptance. The Construction Manager shall obtain the Architect’s approval for the portion of the Project schedule relating to the performance of the Architect’s services. The Project schedule shall coordinate and integrate the Construction Manager’s services, the Architect’s services, other Owner consultants’ services, and the Owner’s responsibilities; and identify items that affect the Project’s timely completion. The updated Project schedule shall include the following: submission of the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal; components of the Work; times of commencement and completion required of each Subcontractor; ordering and delivery of products, including those that must be ordered in advance of construction; and the occupancy requirements of the Owner. § 3.1.5 Phased Construction The Construction Manager, in consultation with the Architect, shall provide recommendations with regard to accelerated or fast-track scheduling, procurement, and sequencing for phased construction. The Construction Manager shall take into consideration cost reductions, cost information, constructability, provisions for temporary facilities, and procurement and construction scheduling issues. § 3.1.6 Cost Estimates § 3.1.6.1 Based on the preliminary design and other design criteria prepared by the Architect, the Construction Manager shall prepare, for the Architect’s review and the Owner’s approval, preliminary estimates of the Cost of the Work or the cost of program requirements using area, volume, or similar conceptual estimating techniques. If the Architect or Construction Manager suggests alternative materials and systems, the Construction Manager shall provide cost evaluations of those alternative materials and systems. § 3.1.6.2 As the Architect progresses with the preparation of the Schematic Design, Design Development and Construction Documents, the Construction Manager shall prepare and update, at appropriate intervals agreed to by the Owner, Construction Manager and Architect, an estimate of the Cost of the Work with increasing detail and refinement. The Construction Manager shall include in the estimate those costs to allow for the further development of the design, price escalation, and market conditions, until such time as the Owner and Construction Manager agree on a Guaranteed Maximum Price for the Work. The estimate shall be provided for the Architect’s review and the Owner’s AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 7 approval. The Construction Manager shall inform the Owner and Architect in the event that the estimate of the Cost of the Work exceeds the latest approved Project budget, and make recommendations for corrective action. § 3.1.6.3 If the Architect is providing cost estimating services as a Supplemental Service, and a discrepancy exists between the Construction Manager’s cost estimates and the Architect’s cost estimates, the Construction Manager and the Architect shall work together to reconcile the cost estimates. § 3.1.7 As the Architect progresses with the preparation of the Schematic Design, Design Development and Construction Documents, the Construction Manager shall consult with the Owner and Architect and make recommendations regarding constructability and schedules, for the Architect’s review and the Owner’s approval. § 3.1.8 The Construction Manager shall provide recommendations and information to the Owner and Architect regarding equipment, materials, services, and temporary Project facilities. § 3.1.9 The Construction Manager shall provide a staffing plan for Preconstruction Phase services for the Owner’s review and approval. § 3.1.10 If the Owner identified a Sustainable Objective in Article 1, the Construction Manager shall fulfill its Preconstruction Phase responsibilities as required in AIA Document E234™–2019, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, Construction Manager as Constructor Edition, attached to this Agreement. § 3.1.11 Subcontractors and Suppliers § 3.1.11.1 If the Owner has provided requirements for subcontractor procurement in section 1.1.14, the Construction Manager shall provide a subcontracting plan, addressing the Owner’s requirements, for the Owner’s review and approval. § 3.1.11.2 The Construction Manager shall develop bidders’ interest in the Project. § 3.1.11.3 The processes described in Article 9 shall apply if bid packages will be issued during the Preconstruction Phase. § 3.1.12 Procurement The Construction Manager shall prepare, for the Architect’s review and the Owner’s acceptance, a procurement schedule for items that must be ordered in advance of construction. The Construction Manager shall expedite and coordinate the ordering and delivery of materials that must be ordered in advance of construction. If the Owner agrees to procure any items prior to the establishment of the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Owner shall procure the items on terms and conditions acceptable to the Construction Manager. Upon the establishment of the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Owner shall assign all contracts for these items to the Construction Manager and the Construction Manager shall thereafter accept responsibility for them. § 3.1.13 Compliance with Laws The Construction Manager shall comply with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to its performance under this Contract, and with equal employment opportunity programs, and other programs as may be required by governmental and quasi-governmental authorities. § 3.1.14 Other Preconstruction Services Insert a description of any other Preconstruction Phase services to be provided by the Construction Manager, or reference an exhibit attached to this document (Describe any other Preconstruction Phase services, such as providing cash flow projections, development of a project information management system, early selection or procurement of subcontractors, etc.) « » § 3.2 Guaranteed Maximum Price Proposal § 3.2.1 At a time to be mutually agreed upon by the Owner and the Construction Manager, the Construction Manager shall prepare a Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal for the Owner’s and Architect’s review, and the Owner’s acceptance. The Guaranteed Maximum Price in the proposal shall be the sum of the Construction Manager’s estimate of AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 8 the Cost of the Work, the Construction Manager’s contingency described in Section 3.2.4, and the Construction Manager’s Fee described in Section 6.1.2. § 3.2.2 To the extent that the Contract Documents are anticipated to require further development, the Guaranteed Maximum Price includes the costs attributable to such further development consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable therefrom. Such further development does not include changes in scope, systems, kinds and quality of materials, finishes, or equipment, all of which, if required, shall be incorporated by Change Order. § 3.2.3 The Construction Manager shall include with the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal a written statement of its basis, which shall include the following: .1 A list of the Drawings and Specifications, including all Addenda thereto, and the Conditions of the Contract; .2 A list of the clarifications and assumptions made by the Construction Manager in the preparation of the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal, including assumptions under Section 3.2.2; .3 A statement of the proposed Guaranteed Maximum Price, including a statement of the estimated Cost of the Work organized by trade categories or systems, including allowances; the Construction Manager’s contingency set forth in Section 3.2.4; and the Construction Manager’s Fee; .4 The anticipated date of Substantial Completion upon which the proposed Guaranteed Maximum Price is based; and .5 A date by which the Owner must accept the Guaranteed Maximum Price. § 3.2.4 In preparing the Construction Manager’s Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal, the Construction Manager shall include a contingency for the Construction Manager’s exclusive use to cover those costs that are included in the Guaranteed Maximum Price but not otherwise allocated to another line item or included in a Change Order. § 3.2.5 The Construction Manager shall meet with the Owner and Architect to review the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal. In the event that the Owner or Architect discover any inconsistencies or inaccuracies in the information presented, they shall promptly notify the Construction Manager, who shall make appropriate adjustments to the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal, its basis, or both. § 3.2.6 If the Owner notifies the Construction Manager that the Owner has accepted the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal in writing before the date specified in the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal, the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal shall be deemed effective without further acceptance from the Construction Manager. Following acceptance of a Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Owner and Construction Manager shall execute the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment amending this Agreement, a copy of which the Owner shall provide to the Architect. The Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment shall set forth the agreed upon Guaranteed Maximum Price with the information and assumptions upon which it is based. § 3.2.7 The Construction Manager shall not incur any cost to be reimbursed as part of the Cost of the Work prior to the execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment, unless the Owner provides prior written authorization for such costs. § 3.2.8 The Owner shall authorize preparation of revisions to the Contract Documents that incorporate the agreed-upon assumptions and clarifications contained in the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment. The Owner shall promptly furnish such revised Contract Documents to the Construction Manager. The Construction Manager shall notify the Owner and Architect of any inconsistencies between the agreed-upon assumptions and clarifications contained in the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment and the revised Contract Documents. § 3.2.9 The Construction Manager shall include in the Guaranteed Maximum Price all sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Construction Manager that are legally enacted, whether or not yet effective, at the time the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment is executed. § 3.3 Construction Phase § 3.3.1 General § 3.3.1.1 For purposes of Section 8.1.2 of A201–2017, the date of commencement of the Work shall mean the date of commencement of the Construction Phase. AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 9 § 3.3.1.2 The Construction Phase shall commence upon the Owner’s execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment or, prior to acceptance of the Guaranteed Maximum Price proposal, by written agreement of the parties. The written agreement shall set forth a description of the Work to be performed by the Construction Manager, and any insurance and bond requirements for Work performed prior to execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment. § 3.3.2 Administration § 3.3.2.1 The Construction Manager shall schedule and conduct meetings to discuss such matters as procedures, progress, coordination, scheduling, and status of the Work. The Construction Manager shall prepare and promptly distribute minutes of the meetings to the Owner and Architect. § 3.3.2.2 Upon the execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment, the Construction Manager shall prepare and submit to the Owner and Architect a construction schedule for the Work and a submittal schedule in accordance with Section 3.10 of A201–2017. § 3.3.2.3 Monthly Report The Construction Manager shall record the progress of the Project. On a monthly basis, or otherwise as agreed to by the Owner, the Construction Manager shall submit written progress reports to the Owner and Architect, showing percentages of completion and other information required by the Owner. § 3.3.2.4 Daily Logs The Construction Manager shall keep, and make available to the Owner and Architect, a daily log containing a record for each day of weather, portions of the Work in progress, number of workers on site, identification of equipment on site, problems that might affect progress of the work, accidents, injuries, and other information required by the Owner. § 3.3.2.5 Cost Control The Construction Manager shall develop a system of cost control for the Work, including regular monitoring of actual costs for activities in progress and estimates for uncompleted tasks and proposed changes. The Construction Manager shall identify variances between actual and estimated costs and report the variances to the Owner and Architect, and shall provide this information in its monthly reports to the Owner and Architect, in accordance with Section 3.3.2.3 above. ARTICLE 4 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES § 4.1 Information and Services Required of the Owner § 4.1.1 The Owner shall provide information with reasonable promptness, regarding requirements for and limitations on the Project, including a written program which shall set forth the Owner’s objectives, constraints, and criteria, including schedule, space requirements and relationships, flexibility and expandability, special equipment, systems, sustainability and site requirements. § 4.1.2 Prior to the execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment, the Construction Manager may request in writing that the Owner provide reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. After execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment, the Construction Manager may request such information as set forth in A201-2017 Section 2.2. § 4.1.3 The Owner shall establish and periodically update the Owner’s budget for the Project, including (1) the budget for the Cost of the Work as defined in Article 7, (2) the Owner’s other costs, and (3) reasonable contingencies related to all of these costs. If the Owner significantly increases or decreases the Owner’s budget for the Cost of the Work, the Owner shall notify the Construction Manager and Architect. The Owner and the Architect, in consultation with the Construction Manager, shall thereafter agree to a corresponding change in the Project’s scope and quality. § 4.1.4 Structural and Environmental Tests, Surveys and Reports. During the Preconstruction Phase, the Owner shall furnish the following information or services with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Construction Manager’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Construction Manager’s written request for such information or services. The Construction Manager shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information and services furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 10 § 4.1.4.1 The Owner shall furnish tests, inspections, and reports, required by law and as otherwise agreed to by the parties, such as structural, mechanical, and chemical tests, tests for air and water pollution, and tests for hazardous materials. § 4.1.4.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a written legal description of the site. The surveys and legal information shall include, as applicable, grades and lines of streets, alleys, pavements and adjoining property and structures; designated wetlands; adjacent drainage; rights-of-way, restrictions, easements, encroachments, zoning, deed restrictions, boundaries and contours of the site; locations, dimensions and other necessary data with respect to existing buildings, other improvements and trees; and information concerning available utility services and lines, both public and private, above and below grade, including inverts and depths. All the information on the survey shall be referenced to a Project benchmark. § 4.1.4.3 The Owner, when such services are requested, shall furnish services of geotechnical engineers, which may include test borings, test pits, determinations of soil bearing values, percolation tests, evaluations of hazardous materials, seismic evaluation, ground corrosion tests and resistivity tests, including necessary operations for anticipating subsoil conditions, with written reports and appropriate recommendations. § 4.1.5 During the Construction Phase, the Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Construction Manager’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Construction Manager’s written request for such information or services. § 4.1.6 If the Owner identified a Sustainable Objective in Article 1, the Owner shall fulfill its responsibilities as required in AIA Document E234™–2019, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, Construction Manager as Constructor Edition, attached to this Agreement. § 4.2 Owner’s Designated Representative The Owner shall identify a representative authorized to act on behalf of the Owner with respect to the Project. The Owner’s representative shall render decisions promptly and furnish information expeditiously, so as to avoid unreasonable delay in the services or Work of the Construction Manager. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1 of A201–2017, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. § 4.2.1 Legal Requirements. The Owner shall furnish all legal, insurance and accounting services, including auditing services, that may be reasonably necessary at any time for the Project to meet the Owner’s needs and interests. § 4.3 Architect The Owner shall retain an Architect to provide services, duties and responsibilities as described in AIA Document B133™–2019, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Architect, Construction Manager as Constructor Edition, including any additional services requested by the Construction Manager that are necessary for the Preconstruction and Construction Phase services under this Agreement. The Owner shall provide the Construction Manager with a copy of the scope of services in the executed agreement between the Owner and the Architect, and any further modifications to the Architect’s scope of services in the agreement. ARTICLE 5 COMPENSATION AND PAYMENTS FOR PRECONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES § 5.1 Compensation § 5.1.1 For the Construction Manager’s Preconstruction Phase services described in Sections 3.1 and 3.2, the Owner shall compensate the Construction Manager as follows: (Insert amount of, or basis for, compensation and include a list of reimbursable cost items, as applicable.) « » § 5.1.2 The hourly billing rates for Preconstruction Phase services of the Construction Manager and the Construction Manager’s Consultants and Subcontractors, if any, are set forth below. (If applicable, attach an exhibit of hourly billing rates or insert them below.) « » AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 11 Individual or Position Rate § 5.1.2.1 Hourly billing rates for Preconstruction Phase services include all costs to be paid or incurred by the Construction Manager, as required by law or collective bargaining agreements, for taxes, insurance, contributions, assessments and benefits and, for personnel not covered by collective bargaining agreements, customary benefits such as sick leave, medical and health benefits, holidays, vacations and pensions, and shall remain unchanged unless the parties execute a Modification. § 5.1.3 If the Preconstruction Phase services covered by this Agreement have not been completed within « » ( « » ) months of the date of this Agreement, through no fault of the Construction Manager, the Construction Manager’s compensation for Preconstruction Phase services shall be equitably adjusted. § 5.2 Payments § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise agreed, payments for services shall be made monthly in proportion to services performed. § 5.2.2 Payments are due and payable upon presentation of the Construction Manager’s invoice. Amounts unpaid « » ( « » ) days after the invoice date shall bear interest at the rate entered below, or in the absence thereof at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the principal place of business of the Construction Manager. (Insert rate of monthly or annual interest agreed upon.) « » % « » ARTICLE 6 COMPENSATION FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES § 6.1 Contract Sum § 6.1.1 The Owner shall pay the Construction Manager the Contract Sum in current funds for the Construction Manager’s performance of the Contract after execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment. The Contract Sum is the Cost of the Work as defined in Article 7 plus the Construction Manager’s Fee. § 6.1.2 The Construction Manager’s Fee: (State a lump sum, percentage of Cost of the Work or other provision for determining the Construction Manager’s Fee.) « XXX% » § 6.1.3 The method of adjustment of the Construction Manager’s Fee for changes in the Work: « XXX5% for Fee, YYY1.2% for insurance, ZZZ% for bond, and ABC1.35% for SDI » § 6.1.4 Limitations, if any, on a Subcontractor’s overhead and profit for increases in the cost of its portion of the Work: « » § 6.1.5 Rental rates for Construction Manager-owned equipment shall not exceed « One Hundred » percent ( « 100 » %) of the standard rental rate paid at the place of the Project. § 6.1.6 Liquidated damages, if any: (Insert terms and conditions for liquidated damages, if any.) « The Construction Manager shall achieve Substantial Completion of the Work no later than the date established in the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment (the "Contract Time"), subject to adjustments as provided in the Contract Documents. Substantial Completion shall be defined in accordance with Section 9.8 of the AIA Document A201 -2017 as modified by the Parties and attached hereto. In the event that the Construction Manager shall fail to achieve Substantial Completion within thirty (30) days of the agreed upon date(s), subject to extensions of time to which it is entitled, Construction Manager shall be liable to Owner for liquidated damages of $1,000 per day, beginning on the 31st day after the agreed upon date for Substantial Completion, provided that in no event shall the total amount of liquidated damages for which Construction Manager may be liable exceed an amount equal to one-half of Construction Manager’s AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 12 Fee as set forth in Amendment No. 1. Recovery of such liquidated damages shall be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy in the event of Construction Manager’s unexcused delay in achieving Substantial Completion. » § 6.1.7 Other: (Insert provisions for bonus, cost savings or other incentives, if any, that might result in a change to the Contract Sum.) « In the event that the actual Cost of the Work, plus Construction Manager’s Fee, is less than the GMP, the parties agree that such Cost Savings shall be shared as follows: 50% to Owner and 50% to Construction Manager. Such savings shall be recognized by Change Order at Substantial Completion of the Work, and approved for payment on the succeeding Application for Payment. » § 6.2 Guaranteed Maximum Price The Construction Manager guarantees that the Contract Sum shall not exceed the Guaranteed Maximum Price set forth in the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment, subject to additions and deductions by Change Order as provided in the Contract Documents. Costs which would cause the Guaranteed Maximum Price to be exceeded shall be paid by the Construction Manager without reimbursement by the Owner. § 6.3 Changes in the Work § 6.3.1 The Owner may, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions. The Owner shall issue such changes in writing. The Construction Manager may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of changes in the Work. § 6.3.1.1 The Architect may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Article 7 of AIA Document A201–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. § 6.3.2 Adjustments to the Guaranteed Maximum Price on account of changes in the Work subsequent to the execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment may be determined by any of the methods listed in Article 7 of AIA Document A201–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. § 6.3.3 Adjustments to subcontracts awarded on the basis of a stipulated sum shall be determined in accordance with Article 7 of A201–2017, as they refer to “cost” and “fee,” and not by Articles 6 and 7 of this Agreement. Adjustments to subcontracts awarded with the Owner’s prior written consent on the basis of cost plus a fee shall be calculated in accordance with the terms of those subcontracts. § 6.3.4 In calculating adjustments to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the terms “cost” and “costs” as used in Article 7 of AIA Document A201–2017 shall mean the Cost of the Work as defined in Article 7 of this Agreement and the term “fee” shall mean the Construction Manager’s Fee as defined in Section 6.1.2 of this Agreement. § 6.3.5 If no specific provision is made in Section 6.1.3 for adjustment of the Construction Manager’s Fee in the case of changes in the Work, or if the extent of such changes is such, in the aggregate, that application of the adjustment provisions of Section 6.1.3 will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Construction Manager, the Construction Manager’s Fee shall be equitably adjusted on the same basis that was used to establish the Fee for the original Work, and the Guaranteed Maximum Price shall be adjusted accordingly. ARTICLE 7 COST OF THE WORK FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE § 7.1 Costs to Be Reimbursed § 7.1.1 The term Cost of the Work shall mean costs necessarily incurred by the Construction Manager in the proper performance of the Work. The Cost of the Work shall include only the items set forth in Sections 7.1 through 7.7. § 7.1.2 Where, pursuant to the Contract Documents, any cost is subject to the Owner’s prior approval, the Construction Manager shall obtain such approval in writing prior to incurring the cost. § 7.1.3 Costs shall be at rates not higher than the standard rates paid at the place of the Project, except with prior approval of the Owner. AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 13 § 7.2 Labor Costs § 7.2.1 Wages or salaries of construction workers directly employed by the Construction Manager to perform the construction of the Work at the site or, with the Owner’s prior approval, at off-site workshops. Owner agrees that Construction Manager shall be compensated at the rates set forth in Exhibit XX—Construction Manager’s Stipulated Burdened Labor Rates. The Owner has reviewed the personnel and trade labor rates listed in Exhibit XX and hereby confirms it approval of the listed rates and agrees to use such rates for determining the Cost of the Work. With respect to listed personnel, Owner’s audit of these rates shall be limited to verifying the hours charged to the Project. § 7.2.2 Wages or salaries of the Construction Manager’s supervisory and administrative personnel when stationed at the site and performing Work, with the Owner’s prior approval. § 7.2.2.1 Wages or salaries of the Construction Manager’s supervisory and administrative personnel when performing Work and stationed at a location other than the site, but only for that portion of time required for the Work, and limited to the personnel and activities listed below: (Identify the personnel, type of activity and, if applicable, any agreed upon percentage of time to be devoted to the Work.) « » § 7.2.3 Wages and salaries of the Construction Manager’s supervisory or administrative personnel engaged at factories, workshops or while traveling, in expediting the production or transportation of materials or equipment required for the Work, but only for that portion of their time required for the Work. § 7.2.4 Costs paid or incurred by the Construction Manager, as required by law or collective bargaining agreements, for taxes, insurance, contributions, assessments and benefits and, for personnel not covered by collective bargaining agreements, customary benefits such as sick leave, medical and health benefits, holidays, vacations and pensions, provided such costs are based on wages and salaries included in the Cost of the Work under Sections 7.2.1 through 7.2.3. § 7.2.5 If agreed rates for labor costs, in lieu of actual costs, are provided in this Agreement, the rates shall remain unchanged throughout the duration of this Agreement, unless the parties execute a Modification. § 7.3 Subcontract Costs Payments made by the Construction Manager to Subcontractors in accordance with the requirements of the subcontracts and this Agreement. § 7.4 Costs of Materials and Equipment Incorporated in the Completed Construction § 7.4.1 Costs, including transportation and storage at the site, of materials and equipment incorporated, or to be incorporated, in the completed construction. § 7.4.2 Costs of materials described in the preceding Section 7.4.1 in excess of those actually installed to allow for reasonable waste and spoilage. Unused excess materials, if any, shall become the Owner’s property at the completion of the Work or, at the Owner’s option, shall be sold by the Construction Manager. Any amounts realized from such sales shall be credited to the Owner as a deduction from the Cost of the Work. § 7.5 Costs of Other Materials and Equipment, Temporary Facilities and Related Items § 7.5.1 Costs of transportation, storage, installation, dismantling, maintenance, and removal of materials, supplies, temporary facilities, machinery, equipment and hand tools not customarily owned by construction workers that are provided by the Construction Manager at the site and fully consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of materials, supplies, temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and tools, that are not fully consumed, shall be based on the cost or value of the item at the time it is first used on the Project site less the value of the item when it is no longer used at the Project site. Costs for items not fully consumed by the Construction Manager shall mean fair market value. § 7.5.2 Rental charges for temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools not customarily owned by construction workers that are provided by the Construction Manager at the site, and the costs of transportation, installation, dismantling, minor repairs, and removal of such temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools. Rates and quantities of equipment owned by the Construction Manager, or a related party as defined in Section 7.8, AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 14 shall be subject to the Owner’s prior approval. The total rental cost of any such equipment may not exceed the purchase price of any comparable item. § 7.5.3 Costs of removal of debris from the site of the Work and its proper and legal disposal. § 7.5.4 Costs of the Construction Manager’s site office, including general office equipment and supplies. § 7.5.5 Costs of materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a mutually acceptable location, subject to the Owner’s prior approval. § 7.6 Miscellaneous Costs § 7.6.1 Premiums for that portion of insurance and bonds required by the Contract Documents that can be directly attributed to this Contract. [INSERT % FOR INSURANCE AND SUBGUARD] § 7.6.1.1 Costs for self-insurance, for either full or partial amounts of the coverages required by the Contract Documents, with the Owner’s prior approval. § 7.6.1.2 Costs for insurance through a captive insurer owned or controlled by the Construction Manager, with the Owner’s prior approval. § 7.6.2 Sales, use, or similar taxes, imposed by a governmental authority, that are related to the Work and for which the Construction Manager is liable. § 7.6.3 Fees and assessments for the building permit, and for other permits, licenses, and inspections, for which the Construction Manager is required by the Contract Documents to pay. § 7.6.4 Fees of laboratories for tests required by the Contract Documents; except those related to defective or nonconforming Work for which reimbursement is excluded under Article 13 of AIA Document A201–2017 or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and which do not fall within the scope of Section 7.7.3. § 7.6.5 Royalties and license fees paid for the use of a particular design, process, or product, required by the Contract Documents. § 7.6.5.1 The cost of defending suits or claims for infringement of patent rights arising from requirements of the Contract Documents, payments made in accordance with legal judgments against the Construction Manager resulting from such suits or claims, and payments of settlements made with the Owner’s consent, unless the Construction Manager had reason to believe that the required design, process, or product was an infringement of a copyright or a patent, and the Construction Manager failed to promptly furnish such information to the Architect as required by Article 3 of AIA Document A201–2017. The costs of legal defenses, judgments, and settlements shall not be included in the Cost of the Work used to calculate the Construction Manager’s Fee or subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price. § 7.6.6 Costs for communications services, electronic equipment, and software, directly related to the Work and located at the site, with the Owner’s prior approval. § 7.6.7 Costs of document reproductions and delivery charges. § 7.6.8 Deposits lost for causes other than the Construction Manager’s negligence or failure to fulfill a specific responsibility in the Contract Documents. § 7.6.9 Legal, mediation and arbitration costs, including attorneys’ fees, other than those arising from disputes between the Owner and Construction Manager, reasonably incurred by the Construction Manager after the execution of this Agreement in the performance of the Work and with the Owner’s prior approval, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 7.6.10 Expenses incurred in accordance with the Construction Manager’s standard written personnel policy for relocation and temporary living allowances of the Construction Manager’s personnel required for the Work, with the Owner’s prior approval. AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 15 § 7.6.11 That portion of the reasonable expenses of the Construction Manager’s supervisory or administrative personnel incurred while traveling in discharge of duties connected with the Work. § 7.7 Other Costs and Emergencies § 7.7.1 Other costs incurred in the performance of the Work, with the Owner’s prior approval. § 7.7.2 Costs incurred in taking action to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss, in case of an emergency affecting the safety of persons and property, as provided in Article 10 of AIA Document A201–2017. § 7.7.3 Costs of repairing or correcting damaged or nonconforming Work executed by the Construction Manager, Subcontractors, or suppliers, provided that such damaged or nonconforming Work was not caused by the negligence of, or failure to fulfill a specific responsibility by, the Construction Manager, and only to the extent that the cost of repair or correction is not recovered by the Construction Manager from insurance, sureties, Subcontractors, suppliers, or others. § 7.7.4 The costs described in Sections 7.1 through 7.7 shall be included in the Cost of the Work, notwithstanding any provision of AIA Document A201–2017 or other Conditions of the Contract which may require the Construction Manager to pay such costs, unless such costs are excluded by the provisions of Section 7.9. § 7.8 Related Party Transactions § 7.8.1 For purposes of this Section 7.8, the term “related party” shall mean (1) a parent, subsidiary, affiliate, or other entity having common ownership of, or sharing common management with, the Construction Manager; (2) any entity in which any stockholder in, or management employee of, the Construction Manager holds an equity interest in excess of ten percent in the aggregate; (3) any entity which has the right to control the business or affairs of the Construction Manager; or (4) any person, or any member of the immediate family of any person, who has the right to control the business or affairs of the Construction Manager. § 7.8.2 If any of the costs to be reimbursed arise from a transaction between the Construction Manager and a related party, the Construction Manager shall notify the Owner of the specific nature of the contemplated transaction, including the identity of the related party and the anticipated cost to be incurred, before any such transaction is consummated or cost incurred. If the Owner, after such notification, authorizes the proposed transaction in writing, then the cost incurred shall be included as a cost to be reimbursed, and the Construction Manager shall procure the Work, equipment, goods, or service, from the related party, as a Subcontractor, according to the terms of Article 9. If the Owner fails to authorize the transaction in writing, the Construction Manager shall procure the Work, equipment, goods, or service from some person or entity other than a related party according to the terms of Article 9. § 7.9 Costs Not To Be Reimbursed § 7.9.1 The Cost of the Work shall not include the items listed below: .1 Salaries and other compensation of the Construction Manager’s personnel stationed at the Construction Manager’s principal office or offices other than the site office, except as specifically provided in Section 7.2, or as may be provided in Article 14; .2 Bonuses, profit sharing, incentive compensation, and any other discretionary payments, paid to anyone hired by the Construction Manager or paid to any Subcontractor or vendor, unless the Owner has provided prior approval; .3 Expenses of the Construction Manager’s principal office and offices other than the site office; .4 Overhead and general expenses, except as may be expressly included in Sections 7.1 to 7.7; .5 The Construction Manager’s capital expenses, including interest on the Construction Manager’s capital employed for the Work; .6 Except as provided in Section 7.7.3 of this Agreement, costs due to the negligence of, or failure to fulfill a specific responsibility of the Contract by, the Construction Manager, Subcontractors, and suppliers, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable; .7 Any cost not specifically and expressly described in Sections 7.1 to 7.7; .8 Costs, other than costs included in Change Orders approved by the Owner, that would cause the Guaranteed Maximum Price to be exceeded; and .9 Costs for services incurred during the Preconstruction Phase. ARTICLE 8 DISCOUNTS, REBATES, AND REFUNDS § 8.1 Cash discounts obtained on payments made by the Construction Manager shall accrue to the Owner if (1) before making the payment, the Construction Manager included the amount to be paid, less such discount, in an Application AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 16 for Payment and received payment from the Owner, or (2) the Owner has deposited funds with the Construction Manager with which to make payments; otherwise, cash discounts shall accrue to the Construction Manager. Trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and amounts received from sales of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to the Owner, and the Construction Manager shall make provisions so that they can be obtained. § 8.2 Amounts that accrue to the Owner in accordance with the provisions of Section 8.1 shall be credited to the Owner as a deduction from the Cost of the Work. ARTICLE 9 SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER AGREEMENTS § 9.1 Those portions of the Work that the Construction Manager does not customarily perform with the Construction Manager’s own personnel shall be performed under subcontracts or other appropriate agreements with the Construction Manager. The Owner may designate specific persons from whom, or entities from which, the Construction Manager shall obtain bids. The Construction Manager shall obtain bids from Subcontractors, and from suppliers of materials or equipment fabricated especially for the Work, who are qualified to perform that portion of the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Construction Manager shall deliver such bids to the Architect and Owner with an indication as to which bids the Construction Manager intends to accept. The Owner then has the right to review the Construction Manager’s list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers in consultation with the Architect and, subject to Section 9.1.1, to object to any subcontractor or supplier. Any advice of the Architect, or approval or objection by the Owner, shall not relieve the Construction Manager of its responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Construction Manager shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Construction Manager has reasonable objection. § 9.1.1 When a specific subcontractor or supplier (1) is recommended to the Owner by the Construction Manager; (2) is qualified to perform that portion of the Work; and (3) has submitted a bid that conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents without reservations or exceptions, but the Owner requires that another bid be accepted, then the Construction Manager may require that a Change Order be issued to adjust the Guaranteed Maximum Price by the difference between the bid of the person or entity recommended to the Owner by the Construction Manager and the amount of the subcontract or other agreement actually signed with the person or entity designated by the Owner. § 9.2 Subcontracts or other agreements shall conform to the applicable payment provisions of this Agreement, and shall not be awarded on the basis of cost plus a fee without the Owner’s prior written approval. If a subcontract is awarded on the basis of cost plus a fee, the Construction Manager shall provide in the subcontract for the Owner to receive the same audit rights with regard to the Subcontractor as the Owner receives with regard to the Construction Manager in Article 10. ARTICLE 10 ACCOUNTING RECORDS The Construction Manager shall keep full and detailed records and accounts related to the Cost of the Work, and exercise such controls, as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Contract and to substantiate all costs incurred. The accounting and control systems shall be satisfactory to the Owner. The Owner and the Owner’s auditors shall, during regular business hours and upon reasonable notice, be afforded access to, and shall be permitted to audit and copy, the Construction Manager’s records and accounts, including complete documentation supporting accounting entries, books, job cost reports, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, subcontracts, Subcontractor’s proposals, Subcontractor’s invoices, purchase orders, vouchers, memoranda, and other data relating to this Contract. The Construction Manager shall preserve these records for a period of three years after final payment, or for such longer period as may be required by law. ARTICLE 11 PAYMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE SERVICES § 11.1 Progress Payments § 11.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Construction Manager, and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum, to the Construction Manager, as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month. « » Formatted: AIA Agreement Body Text AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 17 § 11.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the « last » day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the amount certified to the Construction Manager not later than the « last » day of the « following » month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment of the amount certified shall be made by the Owner not later than « thirty » ( « 30 » ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.) § 11.1.4 With each Application for Payment, the Construction Manager shall submit payrolls, petty cash accounts, receipted invoices or invoices with check vouchers attached, and any other evidence required by the Owner or Architect to demonstrate that payments already made by the Construction Manager on account of the Cost of the Work equal or exceed progress payments already received by the Construction Manager, plus payrolls for the period covered by the present Application for Payment, less that portion of the progress payments attributable to the Construction Manager’s Fee. § 11.1.5 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Construction Manager in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Guaranteed Maximum Price among: (1) the various portions of the Work; (2) any contingency for costs that are included in the Guaranteed Maximum Price but not otherwise allocated to another line item or included in a Change Order; and (3) the Construction Manager’s Fee. § 11.1.5.1 The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. The schedule of values shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Construction Manager’s Applications for Payment. § 11.1.5.2 The allocation of the Guaranteed Maximum Price under this Section 11.1.5 shall not constitute a separate guaranteed maximum price for the Cost of the Work of each individual line item in the schedule of values. § 11.1.5.3 When the Construction Manager allocates costs from a contingency to another line item in the schedule of values, the Construction Manager shall submit supporting documentation to the Architect. § 11.1.6 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. The percentage of completion shall be the lesser of (1) the percentage of that portion of the Work which has actually been completed, or (2) the percentage obtained by dividing (a) the expense that has actually been incurred by the Construction Manager on account of that portion of the Work and for which the Construction Manager has made payment or intends to make payment prior to the next Application for Payment, by (b) the share of the Guaranteed Maximum Price allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values. § 11.1.7 In accordance with AIA Document A201–2017 and subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: § 11.1.7.1 The amount of each progress payment shall first include: .1 That portion of the Guaranteed Maximum Price properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Guaranteed Maximum Price allocated to that portion of the Work in the most recent schedule of values; .2 That portion of the Guaranteed Maximum Price properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction or, if approved in writing in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing; .3 That portion of Construction Change Directives that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified; and .4 The Construction Manager’s Fee, computed upon the Cost of the Work described in the preceding Sections 11.1.7.1.1 and 11.1.7.1.2 at the rate stated in Section 6.1.2 or, if the Construction Manager’s Fee is stated as a fixed sum in that Section, an amount that bears the same ratio to that fixed-sum fee as the Cost of the Work included in Sections 11.1.7.1.1 and 11.1.7.1.2 bears to a reasonable estimate of the probable Cost of the Work upon its completion. § 11.1.7.2 The amount of each progress payment shall then be reduced by: .1 The aggregate of any amounts previously paid by the Owner; AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 18 .2 The amount, if any, for Work that remains uncorrected and for which the Architect has previously withheld a Certificate for Payment as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017; .3 Any amount for which the Construction Manager does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless the Work has been performed by others the Construction Manager intends to pay; .4 For Work performed or defects discovered since the last payment application, any amount for which the Architect may withhold payment, or nullify a Certificate of Payment in whole or in part, as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017; .5 The shortfall, if any, indicated by the Construction Manager in the documentation required by Section 11.1.4 to substantiate prior Applications for Payment, or resulting from errors subsequently discovered by the Owner’s auditors in such documentation; and .6 Retainage withheld pursuant to Section 11.1.8. § 11.1.8 Retainage § 11.1.8.1 For each progress payment made prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner may withhold the following amount, as retainage, from the payment otherwise due: (Insert a percentage or amount to be withheld as retainage from each Application for Payment. The amount of retainage may be limited by governing law.) « 5% » § 11.1.8.1.1 The following items are not subject to retainage: (Insert any items not subject to the withholding of retainage, such as general conditions, insurance, etc.) « No retainage shall be withheld on General Conditions, General Requirements, Fee, Insurance, or material supplier purchase orders » § 11.1.8.2 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If the retainage established in Section 11.1.8.1 is to be modified prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, insert provisions for such modification.) « At Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay to Construction Manager all retainage withheld less One Hundred Fifty percent (150%) of the estimated cost for completion of the monetized punchlist items and any defective work » § 11.1.8.3 Except as set forth in this Section 11.1.8.3, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the Construction Manager may submit an Application for Payment that includes the retainage withheld from prior Applications for Payment pursuant to this Section 11.1.8. (Insert any other conditions for release of retainage, such as upon completion of the Owner’s audit and reconciliation, upon Substantial Completion.) « » § 11.1.9 If final completion of the Work is materially delayed through no fault of the Construction Manager, the Owner shall pay the Construction Manager any additional amounts in accordance with Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017. § 11.1.10 Except with the Owner’s prior written approval, the Construction Manager shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and suitably stored at the site. § 11.1.11 The Owner and the Construction Manager shall agree upon a mutually acceptable procedure for review and approval of payments to Subcontractors, and the percentage of retainage held on Subcontracts, and the Construction Manager shall execute subcontracts in accordance with those agreements. § 11.1.12 In taking action on the Construction Manager’s Applications for Payment the Architect shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by the Construction Manager, and such action shall not be deemed to be a representation that (1) the Architect has made a detailed examination, audit, or arithmetic verification, of the documentation submitted in accordance with Section 11.1.4 or other supporting data; (2) that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections; or (3) that the Architect has made examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes the Construction Manager has used amounts previously paid on account of the Formatted: AIA Agreement Body Text Formatted: AIA Agreement Body Text AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 19 Contract. Such examinations, audits, and verifications, if required by the Owner, will be performed by the Owner’s auditors acting in the sole interest of the Owner. § 11.2 Final Payment § 11.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Construction Manager when .1 the Construction Manager has fully performed the Contract, except for the Construction Manager’s responsibility to correct Work as provided in Article 12 of AIA Document A201–2017, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; .2 the Construction Manager has submitted a final accounting for the Cost of the Work and a final Application for Payment; and .3 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect in accordance with Section 11.2.2.2. § 11.2.2 Within 30 days of the Owner’s receipt of the Construction Manager’s final accounting for the Cost of the Work, the Owner shall conduct an audit of the Cost of the Work or notify the Architect that it will not conduct an audit. § 11.2.2.1 If the Owner conducts an audit of the Cost of the Work, the Owner shall, within 10 days after completion of the audit, submit a written report based upon the auditors’ findings to the Architect. § 11.2.2.2 Within seven days after receipt of the written report described in Section 11.2.2.1, or receipt of notice that the Owner will not conduct an audit, and provided that the other conditions of Section 11.2.1 have been met, the Architect will either issue to the Owner a final Certificate for Payment with a copy to the Construction Manager, or notify the Construction Manager and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding a certificate as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017. The time periods stated in this Section 11.2.2 supersede those stated in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017. The Architect is not responsible for verifying the accuracy of the Construction Manager’s final accounting. § 11.2.2.3 If the Owner’s auditors’ report concludes that the Cost of the Work, as substantiated by the Construction Manager’s final accounting, is less than claimed by the Construction Manager, the Construction Manager shall be entitled to request mediation of the disputed amount without seeking an initial decision pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017. A request for mediation shall be made by the Construction Manager within 30 days after the Construction Manager’s receipt of a copy of the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment. Failure to request mediation within this 30-day period shall result in the substantiated amount reported by the Owner’s auditors becoming binding on the Construction Manager. Pending a final resolution of the disputed amount, the Owner shall pay the Construction Manager the amount certified in the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment. § 11.2.3 The Owner’s final payment to the Construction Manager shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: « » § 11.2.4 If, subsequent to final payment, and at the Owner’s request, the Construction Manager incurs costs, described in Sections 7.1 through 7.7, and not excluded by Section 7.9, to correct defective or nonconforming Work, the Owner shall reimburse the Construction Manager for such costs, and the Construction Manager’s Fee applicable thereto, on the same basis as if such costs had been incurred prior to final payment, but not in excess of the Guaranteed Maximum Price. If adjustments to the Contract Sum are provided for in Section 6.1.7, the amount of those adjustments shall be recalculated, taking into account any reimbursements made pursuant to this Section 11.2.4 in determining the net amount to be paid by the Owner to the Construction Manager. § 11.3 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. « » % « » AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 20 ARTICLE 12 DISPUTE RESOLUTION § 12.1 Initial Decision Maker – Intentionally omitted. § 12.1.2 The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017 for Claims arising from or relating to the Construction Manager’s Construction Phase services, unless the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to the Agreement, to serve as the Initial Decision Maker. (If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker, if other than the Architect.) « » « » « » « » § 12.2 Binding Dispute Resolution $12.2.1 Nothing in this section shall be deemed to require Construction Manager to continue its performance if Construction Manager has made a Claim for payment of an approved Application for Payment and more than thirty (30) days have elapsed since the date payment was due unless there shall be (i) a dispute regarding the quality or quantity of the Work furnished by Contractor or other for whom it is responsible or (ii) a default by Contractor under the Contract Documents after approval of the Application for Payment that is the subject of the Claim and Contractor has received (a) prior written notice of such dispute or default certified as made in good faith and (b) payment of all sums due less any amounts attributable to the dispute or default. §12.2.2 With regard only to Claims by Construction Manager seeking an increase in the Contract Sum, the Owner and/or Architect shall provide a written response to such Claim not more than thirty (30) days after the later of (i) the commencement of the performance of the work on which the request is based or (ii) submission of such written Claim. In the event that Owner and/or Architect neither approves nor rejects such Claim within such thirty (30) day period, then such Claim shall be deemed approved and may be submitted for payment within the next Application for Payment (on a percentage completion basis), unless it is rejected by Owner and/or Architect before the date payment is due on such Application for Payment. A rejection of such Claim, whether in whole or in part, shall be made by the Owner and/or Architect in writing, shall include an explanation of the factual and contractual basis for the rejection and shall be certified as made in good faith. A rejection in whole or in part shall be subject to the Dispute Resolution process set forth in this Agreement on in the A201 General Conditions. §12.2.3 For any Claim subject to, but not resolved by mediation pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box.) [ « X » ] Arbitration pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017 [ « » ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction [ « » ] Other: (Specify) « » If the Owner and Construction Manager do not select a method of binding dispute resolution, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 13 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 13.1 Termination Prior to Execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment § 13.1.1 If the Owner and the Construction Manager do not reach an agreement on the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Owner may terminate this Agreement upon not less than seven days’ written notice to the Construction Manager, and the Construction Manager may terminate this Agreement, upon not less than seven days’ written notice to the Owner. AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 21 § 13.1.2 In the event of termination of this Agreement pursuant to Section 13.1.1, the Construction Manager shall be compensated for Preconstruction Phase services and Work performed prior to receipt of a notice of termination, in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. In no event shall the Construction Manager’s compensation under this Section exceed the compensation set forth in Section 5.1. § 13.1.3 Prior to the execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment, the Owner may terminate this Agreement upon not less than seven days’ written notice to the Construction Manager for the Owner’s convenience and without cause, and the Construction Manager may terminate this Agreement, upon not less than seven days’ written notice to the Owner, for the reasons set forth in Article 14 of A201–2017. § 13.1.4 In the event of termination of this Agreement pursuant to Section 13.1.3, the Construction Manager shall be equitably compensated for Preconstruction Phase services and Work performed prior to receipt of a notice of termination. In no event shall the Construction Manager’s compensation under this Section exceed the compensation set forth in Section 5.1. § 13.1.5 If the Owner terminates the Contract pursuant to Section 13.1.3 after the commencement of the Construction Phase but prior to the execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment, the Owner shall pay to the Construction Manager an amount calculated as follows, which amount shall be in addition to any compensation paid to the Construction Manager under Section 13.1.4: .1 Take the Cost of the Work incurred by the Construction Manager to the date of termination; .2 Add the Construction Manager’s Fee computed upon the Cost of the Work to the date of termination at the rate stated in Section 6.1 or, if the Construction Manager’s Fee is stated as a fixed sum in that Section, an amount that bears the same ratio to that fixed-sum Fee as the Cost of the Work at the time of termination bears to a reasonable estimate of the probable Cost of the Work upon its completion; and .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner for Construction Phase services. § 13.1.6 The Owner shall also pay the Construction Manager fair compensation, either by purchase or rental at the election of the Owner, for any equipment owned by the Construction Manager that the Owner elects to retain and that is not otherwise included in the Cost of the Work under Section 13.1.5.1. To the extent that the Owner elects to take legal assignment of subcontracts and purchase orders (including rental agreements), the Construction Manager shall, as a condition of receiving the payments referred to in this Article 13, execute and deliver all such papers and take all such steps, including the legal assignment of such subcontracts and other contractual rights of the Construction Manager, as the Owner may require for the purpose of fully vesting in the Owner the rights and benefits of the Construction Manager under such subcontracts or purchase orders. All Subcontracts, purchase orders and rental agreements entered into by the Construction Manager will contain provisions allowing for assignment to the Owner as described above. § 13.1.6.1 If the Owner accepts assignment of subcontracts, purchase orders or rental agreements as described above, the Owner will reimburse or indemnify the Construction Manager for all costs arising under the subcontract, purchase order or rental agreement, if those costs would have been reimbursable as Cost of the Work if the contract had not been terminated. If the Owner chooses not to accept assignment of any subcontract, purchase order or rental agreement that would have constituted a Cost of the Work had this agreement not been terminated, the Construction Manager will terminate the subcontract, purchase order or rental agreement and the Owner will pay the Construction Manager the costs necessarily incurred by the Construction Manager because of such termination. § 13.2 Termination or Suspension Following Execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment § 13.2.1 Termination The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Construction Manager as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017. § 13.2.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 13.2.2.1 If the Owner terminates the Contract for cause as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017, the amount, if any, to be paid to the Construction Manager under Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017 shall not cause the Guaranteed Maximum Price to be exceeded, nor shall it exceed an amount calculated as follows: .1 Take the Cost of the Work incurred by the Construction Manager to the date of termination; .2 Add the Construction Manager’s Fee, computed upon the Cost of the Work to the date of termination at the rate stated in Section 6.1 or, if the Construction Manager’ Fee is stated as a fixed sum in that Section, an amount that bears the same ratio to that fixed-sum Fee as the Cost of the Work at the time of termination bears to a reasonable estimate of the probable Cost of the Work upon its completion; AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 22 .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and .4 Subtract the costs and damages incurred, or to be incurred, by the Owner under Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017. § 13.2.2.2 The Owner shall also pay the Construction Manager fair compensation, either by purchase or rental at the election of the Owner, for any equipment owned by the Construction Manager that the Owner elects to retain and that is not otherwise included in the Cost of the Work under Section 13.2.2.1.1. To the extent that the Owner elects to take legal assignment of subcontracts and purchase orders (including rental agreements), the Construction Manager shall, as a condition of receiving the payments referred to in this Article 13, execute and deliver all such papers and take all such steps, including the legal assignment of such subcontracts and other contractual rights of the Construction Manager, as the Owner may require for the purpose of fully vesting in the Owner the rights and benefits of the Construction Manager under such subcontracts or purchase orders. If the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience in accordance with Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017, then the Owner shall pay the Construction Manager a termination fee as follows: (Insert the amount of or method for determining the fee, if any, payable to the Construction Manager following a termination for the Owner’s convenience.) « » § 13.3 Suspension The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017; in such case, the Guaranteed Maximum Price and Contract Time shall be increased as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017, except that the term “profit” shall be understood to mean the Construction Manager’s Fee as described in Sections 6.1 and 6.3.5 of this Agreement. ARTICLE 14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 14.1 Terms in this Agreement shall have the same meaning as those in A201–2017. Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201–2017 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. § 14.2 Successors and Assigns § 14.2.1 The Owner and Construction Manager, respectively, bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 14.2.2 of this Agreement, and in Section 13.2.2 of A201–2017, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 14.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Construction Manager, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Construction Manager shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment. § 14.3 Insurance and Bonds § 14.3.1 Preconstruction Phase The Construction Manager shall maintain the following insurance for the duration of the Preconstruction Services performed under this Agreement. If any of the requirements set forth below exceed the types and limits the Construction Manager normally maintains, the Owner shall reimburse the Construction Manager for any additional cost. § 14.3.1.1 Commercial General Liability with policy limits of not less than « » ($ « » ) for each occurrence and « » ($ « » ) in the aggregate for bodily injury and property damage. § 14.3.1.2 Automobile Liability covering vehicles owned, and non-owned vehicles used, by the Construction Manager with policy limits of not less than « » ($ « » ) per accident for bodily injury, death of any person, and property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance and use of those motor vehicles, along with any other statutorily required automobile coverage. AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 23 § 14.3.1.3 The Construction Manager may achieve the required limits and coverage for Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability through a combination of primary and excess or umbrella liability insurance, provided that such primary and excess or umbrella liability insurance policies result in the same or greater coverage as the coverages required under Sections 14.3.1.1 and 14.3.1.2, and in no event shall any excess or umbrella liability insurance provide narrower coverage than the primary policy. The excess policy shall not require the exhaustion of the underlying limits only through the actual payment by the underlying insurers. § 14.3.1.4 Workers’ Compensation at statutory limits and Employers Liability with policy limits not less than « » ($ « » ) each accident, « » ($ « » ) each employee, and « » ($ « » ) policy limit. § 14.3.1.5 Professional Liability covering negligent acts, errors and omissions in the performance of professional services, with policy limits of not less than « » ($ « » ) per claim and « » ($ « » ) in the aggregate. § 14.3.1.6 Other Insurance (List below any other insurance coverage to be provided by the Construction Manager and any applicable limits.) Coverage Limits § 14.3.1.7 Additional Insured Obligations. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Construction Manager shall cause the primary and excess or umbrella polices for Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability to include the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Construction Manager’s negligent acts or omissions. The additional insured coverage shall be primary and non-contributory to any of the Owner’s insurance policies and shall apply to both ongoing and completed operations. § 14.3.1.8 The Construction Manager shall provide certificates of insurance to the Owner that evidence compliance with the requirements in this Section 14.3.1. § 14.3.2 Construction Phase After execution of the Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment, the Owner and the Construction Manager shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in AIA Document A133™–2019, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Construction Manager as Constructor where the basis of payment is the Cost of the Work Plus a Fee with a Guaranteed Maximum Price, Exhibit B, Insurance and Bonds, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 14.3.2.1 The Construction Manager shall provide bonds as set forth in AIA Document A133™–2019 Exhibit B, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 14.4 Notice in electronic format, pursuant to Article 1 of AIA Document A201–2017, may be given in accordance with AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, if completed, or as otherwise set forth below: (If other than in accordance with AIA Document E203–2013, insert requirements for delivering notice in electronic format such as name, title, and email address of the recipient and whether and how the system will be required to generate a read receipt for the transmission.) « » § 14.5 Other provisions: « » ARTICLE 15 SCOPE OF THE AGREEMENT § 15.1 This Agreement represents the entire and integrated agreement between the Owner and the Construction Manager and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. This Agreement may be amended only by written instrument signed by both Owner and Construction Manager. § 15.2 The following documents comprise the Agreement: AIA Document A133™ – 2019. Copyright © 1991, 2003, 2009, and 2019 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This draft was produced by AIA software at 10:34:40 ET on 09/13/2021 under Order No.9046014834 which expires on 03/24/2022, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (1732327018) 24 .1 AIA Document A133™–2019, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Construction Manager as Constructor where the basis of payment is the Cost of the Work Plus a Fee with a Guaranteed Maximum Price .2 AIA Document A133™-2019, Exhibit A, Guaranteed Maximum Price Amendment, if executed .3 AIA Document A133™–2019, Exhibit B, Insurance and Bonds .4 AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction .5 AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E203-2013 incorporated into this Agreement.) « » .6 Other Exhibits: (Check all boxes that apply.) [ « » ] AIA Document E234™–2019, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, Construction Manager as Constructor Edition, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E234-2019 incorporated into this Agreement.) « » [ « » ] Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract: Document Title Date Pages .7 Other documents, if any, listed below: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201–2017 provides that the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Construction Manager’s bid or proposal, portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements, and other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. Any such documents should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) « » This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above. OWNER (Signature) CONSTRUCTION MANAGER (Signature) « »« » « »« » (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 6325 - 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM SECTION 00 6325 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM DATE SUBMITTED:________________________ PROJECT: FED EX - 225 WHITES PATH SOUTH YARMOUTH TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER: Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 203 Willow Street, Suite A Yarmouthport, MA 02675 FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 6325 - 2 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM SUBMITTED BY:COMPANY NAME: THE CONTRACTOR PROPOSES THE FOLLOWING SUBSTITUTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: REFERENCES:SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER: ARTICLE / PARAGRAPH / SUBPARAGRAPH: DRAWING NUMBER: DETAIL NUMBER: SCOPE OF SUBSTITUTION: REASON FOR SUBSTITUTION: IMPACT ON PROJECT COST: SAVINGS TO OWNER FOR ACCEPTING SUBSTITUTION: $ IMPACT ON PROJECT SCHEDULE _____NONE _____YES [ADD] [DEDUCT] # OF CALENDAR DAYS IMPACT ON RELATED WORK: NONE YES - EXPLAIN: LIST ALL DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS: ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NECESSARY TO DESCRIBE DEVIATIONS ATTACHMENTS: ATTACH SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION SUFFICIENT FOR ARCHITECT TO EVALUATE SUBSTITUTION. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORMS SUBMITTED WITHOUT ADEQUATE DOCUMENTATION WILL BE RETURNED WITHOUT REVIEW. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 6325 - 3 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM ATTACHMENTS: DRAWINGS PRODUCT DATA SAMPLES WARRANTIES REPORTS TESTS FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 6325 - 4 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM IN ADDITION TO SPECIFIC PRODUCT INFORMATION, ATTACHMENTS SHALL ADDRESS THE FOLLOWING ISSUES: MANUFACTURER’S NAME, ADDRESS AND PHONE NUMBER. AGE OF PRODUCT AVAILABILITY IN US MARKETPLACE POINT BY POINT COMPARATIVE WITH SPECIFIED PRODUCT. LIST OF 3 SIMILAR INSTALLATIONS, INCLUDE: PROJECT NAME, A/E AND A/E PHONE NUMBER RESPONSE DATE: LIST DATE BY WHICH RESPONSE BY ARCHITECT IS REQUESTED TO MAINTAIN PROJECT SCHEDULE AND ALLOW SUFFICIENT TIME FOR INCLUSION OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION. RESPONSE DATE: CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION: THE CONTRACTOR CERTIFIES SUBSTITUTION COMPLIES WITH THE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS AND WITH THE GENERAL CONDITIONS BY INITIATING EACH LINE BELOW: INVESTIGATION: WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES: COST DATA: COORDINATION OF SUBSTITUTE: SUBMITTED BY: (COMPANY NAME & ADDRESS) AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: NOTATIONS LISTED BELOW SHALL HAVE THE SAME MEANING AS ON ARCHITECT’S REVIEW STAMP. CLARIFICATIONS TO OR CHANGES IN PROJECT SCHEDULE OR TIME SHALL BE PROCESSED USING STANDARD PROJECT FORMS. ARCHITECT’S RESPONSE: APPROVED APPROVED AS CORRECTED REVISE AND RESUBMIT REJECTED RETURNED WITHOUT REVIEW REMARKS: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 6325 - 5 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM DATE: SIGNED: END OF DOCUMENT FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 00 7200 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 00 7200 GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.01 FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS: AIA A201 - 2017 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. END OF SECTION AIA® Document A201TM – 2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 1 ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. For guidance in modifying this document to include supplementary conditions, see AIA Document A503™, Guide for Supplementary Conditions. ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA® Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document. for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) «225 White’s Path » «225 White’s Path Yarmouth Port, MA 02675 » THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) «Greg Bilezikian »« » «225 White’s Path Units 2 and 3 LLC 231 Willow Street Yarmouth Port, MA 02675 » THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) «Catalyst Architects »« » «203 Willow Street, Suite A Yarmouth Port, MA 02675 » THE CONTRACTOR: Dellbrook Construction LLC d/b/a Dellbrook | JK Scanlan (“Contractor”) One Adams Place 859 Willard St. Quincy, MA 02169 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 2 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 3 INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1 Arbitration 8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.5, 3.12.7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4 Architect’s Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect’s Approvals 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 Architect’s Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect’s Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect’s Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 15.2 Architect’s Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Architect’s Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2 Architect’s Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect’s Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect’s Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3 Architect’s Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect’s Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys’ Fees 3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, 6.1.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1 Binding Dispute Resolution 8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 Bonds, Lien 7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 Building Information Models Use and Reliance 1.8 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4 AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.4.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2 Change Orders 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.2, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.5 Claims, Definition of 15.1.1 Claims, Notice of 1.6.2, 15.1.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.4.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Compliance with Laws 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2 Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor’s 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.4 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Contract Sum 2.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contractor’s Employees 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance 11.1 AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 5 Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3, 12.2.4 Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Contractor’s Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work 2.2.2, 9.7 Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1 Contractor’s Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Contractor’s Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.4 Costs 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Damages for Delay 6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.1.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Digital Data Use and Transmission 1.7 Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2 Emergencies 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5 Employees, Contractor’s 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, or Materials 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4 Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 6 Financial Arrangements, Owner’s 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials and Substances 10.2.4, 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.1.7 Insurance 6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11 Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Insurance, Contractor’s Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Insurance, Owner’s Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1 Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of 11.5 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13 Interest 13.5 Interpretation 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Limitations of Liability 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic’s Lien 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 7 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2 Notice 1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4, 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Notice of Claims 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.4.1, 13.4.2 Observations, Contractor’s 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1.1 Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Owner’s Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Owner’s Insurance 11.2 Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work 2.5, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work 2.4 Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2, 14.4 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 Project, Definition of 1.1.4 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.2 Proposal Requirements 1.1.1 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 8 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection of Work 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.3.1, 9.10.2 Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 15.4.1 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2 Separate Contractors, Definition of 6.1.1 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Site Visits, Architect’s 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 Specifications, Definition of 1.1.6 Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work 2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3 Substances, Hazardous 10.3 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 2.3.3 Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 9 Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.10.5, 14.2.1 Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 1.1.7, 2.3.4 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect 2.3.3 Termination of the Contractor Employment 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices 7.3.3.2, 9.1.2 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.3.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Liens 9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3 Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2 Weather Delays 8.3, 15.1.6.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 10 ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements. §1.1.1.1 In the event of any conflict between and among the Contract Documents, the Documents shall be construed according to the following priorities: Highest Priority: Change Orders with later date having greater priority. Second Priority: Contractor’s Qualifications and Assumptions, attached to the GMP Amendment. Third Priority: Agreement. Fourth Priority: Addenda with later date having greater priority. Fifth Priority: Drawings with detailed drawings taking precedence over large scale drawings. Sixth Priority: Specifications. Seventh Priority: General Conditions. § 1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties. § 1.1.3 The Work The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors. § 1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. § 1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 11 § 1.1.8 Intentionally omitted. Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. § 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties’ intentions and purposes in executing the Contract. § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub- subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect’s consultants. § 1.6 Notice § 1.6.1 Where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission (e.g. email). . § 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 12 be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission (e.g. email).by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery. § 1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties may use the AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, or equivalent, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data. § 1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AIA Document G202™–2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party’s sole risk and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building information model, and each of their agents and employees. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 General § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein. § 2.2 Evidence of the Owner’s Financial Arrangements § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately. § 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract only if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due; or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as required, within fourteen days of the Contractor’s request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents. § 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. § 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as “confidential,” the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may disclose “confidential” information, after seven (7) days’ notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose “confidential” information to its AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 13 employees, consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information. § 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner § 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. § 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. § 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services. § 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.5 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 General § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 14 § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and Contractor’s approved submittals. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. § 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 15 § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 Labor and Materials § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. In the case of a “Cost Plus” or “Guaranteed Maximum Price Contract,” the phrases “Contractor shall provide and pay for,” “at Contractor’s expense,” or “Contractor shall bear” as used herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall mean “as a Cost of the Work.” § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 3.5 Warranty § 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4. § 3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. If the Owner qualifies for exemption from sales or use taxes, Owner shall provide to Contractor a copy of its Certificate of Exemption. Contractor will notify all subcontractors of the tax exempt status of the Work, and will use best efforts to ensure that sales and use taxes are not paid on exempt materials and equipment. In the event any taxing authority challenges the tax exempt status of the Owner, the Work, or any aspect of the Work, Owner shall defend, indemnify and hold Contractor harmless. § 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 16 § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15. § 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. § 3.8 Allowances § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2. § 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 Superintendent § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. § 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 17 § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. § 3.10 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules § 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised by the Contractor in its discretion and without prior notice at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project. § 3.10.2 If requested by the Owner, the Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals, which shall mean no more than 10 business days. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. § 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. § 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 18 § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect’s approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. § 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. § 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor’s design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect. § 3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 Cutting and Patching § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 19 § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 Cleaning Up § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents after three (3) business days written notice, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. § 3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect. § 3.18 Indemnification § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, and its agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 General § 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement. § 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 20 § 4.2 Administration of the Contract § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly, meaning within 48 hours, report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. Contractor will not be responsible for Architect’s failure to perform in accordance with the requirements of the Owner-Architect Contract and with the Contract Documents. Contractor will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of Architect, its employees, subcontractors or consultants. § 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to include the Architect in all communications that reasonably relate to or affect the Architect’s services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review in accordance with the Project Schedule, which shall generally mean no more than ten (10) business days. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 21 techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 Definitions § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor” does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. § 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 22 § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub- subcontractors. § 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract. § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. § 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts § 6.1.1 The term “Separate Contractor(s)” shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 23 § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12. § 6.1.5 Owner shall require its separate contractors to provide liability insurance in an amount not less than $1,000,000.00 naming Contractor as additional insured, provided that Contractor provides reciprocal insurance for the separate contractor. § 6.2 Mutual Responsibility § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall reasonably coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify the Architect of patent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not patent. § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction. § 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 Owner’s Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may, upon three (3) business days written notice, clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 General § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 24 § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect with the Owner’s written consent. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work. §7.1.4 For additive Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, Subcontractors shall be entitled to a markup of 10% for overhead and 5% for profit. For deductive Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, Subcontractors shall not be required to credit overhead or profit. Contractor shall be entitled to overhead and profit on the total cost of the changed work, including any insurance, bond premium, and labor burden percentages as stated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. In the event Contractor self-performs trade work, the Cost of the Work of a Change shall include an additional mark-up of 10% for overhead on such trade work. §7.1.4 If the Parties disagree whether work is within the scope of the Work or whether the Contractor is required to perform certain work, the Contractor to proceed with the disputed Work if the Owner directs the Contractor to perform the work pursuant to a Construction Change Directive, or if agreed upon, a Change Order, and Contractor shall furnish the Owner with an estimate of the costs to perform the disputed work in accordance with Section 7.3. The Owner shall pay Contractor the cost to perform the Work as provided in Section 7.3. § 7.2 Change Orders § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and .3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. § 7.3 Construction Change Directives § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 As provided in Section 7.3.4. § 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following: .1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers’ compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect; AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 25 .2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change; and .5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. § 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. § 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment of the reasonable value for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment plus overhead and profit. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may not order minor changes in the Work without the written consent of the Owner. ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 Definitions § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date established in Section 9.8.1. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 26 § 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 Progress and Completion § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions (1) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; (2) by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (3) by other causes that the Contractor asserts then the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time. . . § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 Contract Sum § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. § 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s subsequent Applications for Payment. § 9.3 Applications for Payment § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment I as required in the Contract Documents. § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 27 § 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 Certificates for Payment § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either (1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. § 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. In the event the Architect determines to make such revised Certificate of Payment, Architect shall also issue a written, itemized list of specific items for which it is withholding certification, the bases therefore and the specific dollar amounts withheld for each such item in accordance with the Massachusetts Prompt Pay Act and Retainage Law, M.G.L. c. 149 §§29 E and 29F. All undisputed amounts shall be certified for payment by the Architect. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of .1 defective Work not remedied; AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 28 .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect’s decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. § 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment. § 9.6 Progress Payments § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 The Contractor’s payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 29 § 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney’s fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted. § 9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start- up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 Substantial Completion § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use as defined by the Massachusetts Retainage Law, M.G.L. c. 149, §29F. § 9.8.2 No later than fourteen (14) days after the date upon which the Contractor believes the Work is Substantially Complete, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a Notice of Substantial Completion (the “Notice of Substantial Completion”). The Owner shall accept or reject such Notice of Substantial Completion within fourteen (14) days of receipt. Owner shall indicate its acceptance by signing the Notice of Substantial Completion where indicated and delivering same to the Contractor. If the Owner rejects the Notice of Substantial Completion, the Owner shall, within the fourteen (14) day period, notify the Contractor in writing of the rejection and include the factual and contractual basis for the rejection and a certification that the rejection is made in good faith. A rejection of the Notice of Substantial Completion shall be subject to the dispute resolution process set forth in Article 15 of the A201 General Conditions. If the Owner fails to deliver the Notice of Substantial Completion to the Contractor or reject same within the fourteen (14) day period, the Notice of Substantial Completion shall be deemed accepted. Upon an express or deemed acceptance of the Notice of Substantial Completion, the date of Substantial Completion shall be the date stated in such Notice of Substantial Completion for all purposes. § 9.8.3 Not later than fourteen (14) days after the express or deemed acceptance of the Notice of Substantial Completion, Owner and/or Architect shall prepare a punch list, submit it to the Contractor in writing, and certify that it has been made in good faith. Not later than twenty-one (21) days after the express or deemed acceptance of the Notice of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall supplement the punch list if appropriate, submit such punch list to Subcontractors in writing, and certify that it has been made in good faith. The Contractor shall coordinate the correction and completion of punch list items of Work, evaluate the final completion of the Work by the Subcontractors, make recommendations as to when Work is ready for final inspection, and assist Owner and Architect in conducting final inspections. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is accepted or is deemed substantially complete pursuant to Sections 9.8.3 and 9.8.4 above, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish confirm the date of Substantial Completion as established by the Notice of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 30 Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.8.5.1 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the Contractor will paid 100% of the Contract Sum, subject to the following hold-backs, if applicable: (i) for incomplete or missing deliverables, the reasonable value of the deliverables, which shall not exceed two and one-half percent (2.5%) of the Contract Sum; (ii) one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the amount necessary to complete or correct Punch List items and defective Work; and (iii) the reasonable value of claims. The Contractor may include retainage payments on monthly Application for Payment as provided for by the Contract Documents, but in any event upon Substantial Completion of the Work or a portion of the Work as punch list items are completed. Following Substantial Completion of the Work, no amount shall be withheld from the payment of retainage unless a written description of the incomplete or defective work items and incomplete, incorrect or missing deliverables, the factual and contractual basis for the claims and the value attributable to each incomplete or defective work item, deliverable and claim is issued and certified as made in good faith by Owner. § 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied or will be promptly made upon receipt of final payment from the Owner, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 31 any, to final payment, (5) Subcontractor warranties as required in the Contract Documents, and documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers’ warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner as may be required by law. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money reasonable payments that the Owner has mademay be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or .4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. § 10.2.2 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss. § 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 32 § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. § 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition. § 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 33 Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 Contractor’s Insurance and Bonds § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Owner, Architect, and Architect’s consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor’s commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. § 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor’s Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage. § 11.2 Owner’s Insurance § 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 34 Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto. § 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner’s Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance. § 11.2.4 Condo Conversions – To the extent the project to be built is apartments, if within six (6) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the last element of the Work, Owner converts any portion or all of the Project to a “residential” use, including, but not limited to, a condominium, cooperative or similar common interest development and sells individual apartment units to members of the public, Owner agrees to provide Contractor with evidence of insurance coverage, in which Contractor is a named insured, in amounts identical to those applicable to Contractor under this Agreement to insure against the difference in liability to Contractor that may reasonably be caused by such sales. In the event the proper insurance coverage is provided then the Contractor shall have no greater liability for any construction defect claims arising from the Work than Contractor would have in the absence of such sales and the Owner shall indemnify, defend (including payment of Contractor’s reasonable attorney’s fees) and hold Contractor harmless from any construction defect claims arising after such sales to the extent the liability of the Contractor is found by a court of competent jurisdiction to be in excess of Contractor’s original Contract obligation. In the event that Owner does not provide Contractor with evidence of insurance coverage and such sales commence, the Contractor shall have no obligation for any claims arising from the Work and the Owner shall indemnify, defend (including payment of Contractor’s reasonable attorney’s fees) and hold Contractor harmless from any and all claims. If such sales commence, owner shall upon any sale of all or a portion of the Project, Owner may assign its obligations under this paragraph to the subsequent Owner (or an affiliate thereof) and shall be released from liability hereunder if the subsequent Owner (or such affiliate) either has the requisite net worth or provides the insurance set forth above. All obligations under this paragraph shall cease and be of no further force or effect six (6) years after Substantial Completion, except with respect to any claims in which an action has been filed within the six (6) year period. § 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation § 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect’s consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect’s consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property. § 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, to the extent permissible by such policies, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 35 § 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes of loss. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner’s property, due to fire or other hazards however caused. §11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss § 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 Uncovering of Work § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2 Correction of Work § 12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 36 a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5. § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. § 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located, excluding that jurisdiction’s choice of law rules. If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. § 13.2 Successors and Assigns § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment. § 13.3 Rights and Remedies § 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. § 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing. § 13.4 Tests and Inspections § 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 37 authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require. § 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense. § 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. § 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. § 13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 Termination by the Contractor § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons: .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped; .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2. § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 38 § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. § 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. § 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 39 .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. § 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts; and the termination fee of 2% of the Contract Sum or GMP amount, as the case may be. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, a change in the Contract Time, liquidated damages, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. § 15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2. § 15.1.3 Notice of Claims § 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. § 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. § 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance § 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. § 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time § 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 40 § 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.2 Intentionally omitted. Initial Decision § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 41 § 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. § 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 Mediation § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation. § 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. § 15.3.3 Mediation shall not be a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution; however, the parties will endeavor to Mediation shall not be a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution; however, the parties will endeavor to Mediation shall not be a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution; however, the parties will endeavor to Mediation shall not be a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution; however, the parties will endeavor to resolve any Claims by mediation. § 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4 Arbitration § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, , unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. § 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made at any time , but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be a reasoned award and shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. The arbitrator(s) shall grant to the prevailing party, as part of any award, the reasonable costs of arbitration, including but AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:44:24 on 01/17/2018 under Order No.5533675102 which expires on 01/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (827668293) 42 not limited to the costs and expenses of the AAA and the arbitrator(s), reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, expert witness costs, and interest at the rate required by state law. § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement, shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 1 SUMMARY SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A.Project Name: FedEx Annex, Cape Cod MA B.Architect's Name: Catalyst Architecture/Interiors, Inc. C.The Project consists of the construction of Renovations to existing warehouse metal frame building for use as a shipping distribution center, and associated site work.. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A.Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 00 5000 - Contracting Forms and Supplements. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Work to be done under this Contract shall include the renovation of the Existing metal frame building as a shipping distribution center. Parking, Office Areas, and Loading/Distribution areas are to be construction according to the drawings. The building renovations and site improvements will be consistent with current design standards, and modern methods and protocols will be adhered to. All areas disturbed will be returned to preconstruction conditions or better upon project completion. Scope of work includes but is not limited to furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, appliances, transportation and other necessary facilities for the performance and completion of all work as indicated on the drawings and specifications, and as summarized below: Selective Demolition: 1.Saw cutting and removal of existing concrete floor. 2.Saw cutting and removal of existing precast exterior walls. 3.Removal of wall partitions and finishes in existing office area. 4.Disconnect and remove unwanted electrical feeds and circuits. 5.Demo and remove existing IT devices as required (Phone / Data / CATV / etc.) 6.Demo and remove loading dock doors and door levelers. New Work: 1.Patch and repir concrete floor. 2.New polycast floor drains and associated piping. 3.Miscellaneous metals and Roof Access Hatch. 4.Structural Steel Modifications including partial removal of lateral bracing system and reinforcing of the same. 5.New roof hatch. 6.New overhead doors. 7.New Storefront Window Assemblies. 8.New through wall louvers for ventilation louvers. 9.New equipment @ loading doors, including dock levelers, door bumpers. 10.New Canopy above loading doors 11.Office area renovations including. a.New partition walls. b.New floor finishes. c.New wall finishes d.New ceiling finishes to match existing. 12.Electrical System Upgrades (See below) 13.HVAC System Upgrades (See below) FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 2 SUMMARY Electrical Scope 1.Existing Services to remain. 2.New sub-panels and circuits per plan. 3.Connections to all HVAC equipment HVAC Scope 1.New Make-up Air Units 2.New Exhaust Air Units 3.New Split Unit - HVAC Units for Office Area. 4.New Ventilation Louvers 1.04 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS A.As provided in the General Conditions, the following items shall be provided by the Owner or by other under a separate agreement with the Owner for which the Owner has responsibility. Coordination with these vendors or sub-contractors is required of the selected General Contractor. 1.Tenant (FXG) will provide the materials and handling equipment design. 2.The Tenant's (FXG's) Vendor, Materials & Handling Equipment Vendor will furnish and install all conveyor systems shown on the plans. 3.The Tenant's (FXG's) Furniture Vendor will furnish office furniture shown on the plans. 4.The Tenant's (FXG's) computer systems vendor will furnish and install all computer room equipment including: a.Computer Servers b.Computer Rack System c.UPS (battery back-up power) shown on the plans. 5.Utility Company "Backcharges" or connection charges 6.Construction Materials Testing 1.05 OWNER PURCHASED/SUPPLIED, OWNER INSTALLED ITEMS A.None 1.06 WORK BY OWNER A.Building Owner (Landlord) will retain all soil and materials testing services for the project including: 1.Soil Sample Testing 2.Soil Compaction Testing 3.Asphalt Paving Testing 4.Concrete Sample Testing 5.Concrete Strength Testing 6.Steel Erection Inspections 7.Steel Welding Inspections 1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY A.Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. 1.08 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A.Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B.Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1.Work by Owner. 2.Work by Owner's Contractors under separate contract FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 3 SUMMARY C.Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1.Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. 1.09 CODES A.Comply with application codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Submit copies of inspection reports, notices, and similar communications to Architect. 1.10 INTENT A.Drawings and Specifications are intended to provide the basis for proper completion of the work, suitable for the intended use of the Owner. Anything expressly set forth but which is reasonably implied or necessary for proper performance of the project shall be included. 1.11 DIMENSIONS A.Verify dimensions indicated on the drawings with field dimensions before fabrication or ordering of materials. Do not scale off of the drawings. 1.12 QUANTITIES A.Where technical specifications refer to any material, item, assembly, system, component or the like in singular, such reference shall be taken in the plural where requried in more than one location and the correct numbers of items shall be provided by the contractor at each location at not additional cost to the Owner. 1.13 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.Where references are made in the contract documents to publications and standards issued by associations or societies, the date of the standard is that in effect as of the bid date, except when a specific date is specified. B.For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. C.Obtain copies of standards when required by the contract documents. Maintain a copy at the job site during progress of that specific work. 1.14 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, AND TESTING REQUIRED BY GOVERNING AUTHORITIES A.If the contract documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jursidiction require any portion of the work to be inspected, tested, or approved, the general contractor shall give the Architect and Owner and such Authority timely notice of its readiness so that designer may observe such inspection and testing. B.Prior to the start of constructon, the general contractor and subcontractors shall complete application to the applicable building code enforcement authority for all building permits. Such permit shall be displayed in a conspicuous locations at the project site. The contractor shall apply for, obtain, and pay for permits, and fees required to perform the work. Submit copies to the Architect. 1.15 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS A.The bidders are expected to examine and to be throughly familiar with contract documents and with the conditions under which work will be carried out. The Owner will not be responsible for errors, omissions, and/or charges for extra work arising from general contractor's or sub-contractor's failure to familiarize themselves with the contract documents or existing conditions. By submitted a bid, the bidder agrees and warrants that he has had the opportunity FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 4 SUMMARY to examine the site and the contract documents, that he is familiar with the conditions and requirements of both and where they require, in any part of the work a given result to be produced, that the contract documents ar adequate and that he will produce the required results. 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK A.Except as specifically specified otherwise under other sections of the Specifications, the General Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching that may be required to make the several parts of the work fit together properly and shall not endanger any work or any part of it. 1.17 CORING AND DRILLING A.Except as specifically specified under other sections of the specifications, each trade subcontractor shall do all this own coring and drilling as may be required to complete his portion of the work. All coring and drilling shall be performed so as not to endanger adjacent work to remain. Coring and drilling will not be considered synonymous with cutting and patching. B.Conduits and openings shall be laid out in advance to permit their provisions in the work. Sleeves and conduits shall be set in forms before concrete is poured. Any extra work required where sleeves or conduits have been omitted or improperly placed shall be performed at the expense of the trade that made the error or omission, C.Sleeves provided for conduit between floors and thorugh fire walls or smoke partitions shall be installed with approved packing between sleeves and conduit to provide for fire stop. D.Where conduits pass through footings, beams or slabs, they shall be provided with waterproof seals. E.Provide acoustic sealer in sleeves between occupied spaces. Sleeves installed in floors shall extend 2" above the floor. Telephone sleeves in closets shall extend to 4" above the finished floor. 1.18 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL A.Inspect substrates and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. B.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C.Take field measurements prior to fabrication where practical. Form to required shapes, and sizes with true edges, lines, and angles. Provide inserts and templates as needed for work of other trades. D.Install materials in exact accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. E.Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with proper appearance. F.Restore units damaged during installation, replace units which cannot be restored at no additonal expense to the Owner. G.Refer to additional installation requirements and tolerances specified under individual specification sections. 1.19 DEFINITIONS A.Provide: Furnish and Install, complete with all necessary accessories, ready for intended us. Pay for all related costs. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 5 SUMMARY B.Approved: Acceptance of item submitted for approval. Not a limitation or release for compliance with Contract Documents for regulatory requirements. Refer to limitations of "Approved" in General and Supplementary Conditions. C.Match Existing: Match Existing as acceptable to the Architect. 1.20 FIELD ENGINEERING A.Provide field engineering services; establish grades, lines, and levels by use of recognized engineering survey practices. B.Control datum for survey is that shown on the drawings. Locate and protect control and reference points. C.The contractor shall obtain services of a registered land surveyor to establish construction layout lines and for the preparation of all required local building department required site engineering documents during construction, including any and all as-built/certified plot plans required by authorities having jurisdiction and as-built/record drawings at the construction close-out. 1.21 STAKING A.The General Contractor shall be responsible for staking work limit areas, building location lines, utility lines, paving lines, etc., as represented on the drawings, and maintaining those items for the duration of the Construction Contract. 1.22 ACCESS AND STAGING AREAS A.The contractor shall be responsible for establishing and properly containing the limit of work area and controlling access to the same. Creating any access and staging areas outside of what is already shown to be cleared and/or reworked as part of any "new work" shall be approved by the architect and owner prior to any occurence. Any work or disruptive activities outside the "limit of work" may require restorative work to return them as close as possible to the existing natural state. The contractor(s) will be responsible for any costs caused by deviations from the plans made without prior approval. 1.23 DEBRIS A.Debris shall not be permitted to accumulate and work shall, at all times, be kept clean and acceptable. B.Remove debris from the site of work and legally dispose of at any private or public dump which the general contractor may choose, provided that the general contractor shall make arrangements and obtain approvals necessary from the owner or officials in charge of the dump and shall pay costs and fees resulting from legal disposal of debris. 1.24 CERTIFIED WELDERS A.All welding shall be performed only by operators who have been qualified by tests, as prescribed in the "Standard Qualification Procedure" of the American Welding Society, to perform the type of work required. B.Pipe welds shal be made only by operators who have been qualified by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau and the operator's qualification record shall be submitted to the designer before any work is performed. C.Shop Welding shall be in accordance with the "Code for Welding in Building Construction." FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 6 SUMMARY 1.25 SAFETY REGULATIONS A.This project is subject to compliance with Public Law 91-596 "Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970" (OSHA), with respect to all rules and regulations pertaining to construction, including volume 36, Numbers 75 and 105, of the Federal Register, as amended and as published by the US Department of Labor. 1.26 MASSACHUSETTS SALES AND USE TAX A.The contractor is not required to pay applicable Massachusetts Sales and Use Tax for materials and supplies that are used or incorporated in the performance of the contract for construction as stipulated in the General Conditions. The Owner is a non-profit organization, and a tax exempt number from the Mass Dept of Revenue will be issued to the successful bidder. 1.C.O.R.D. is a non-profit entity; sales tax exemption does apply. 1.27 SAFETY REGULATIONS A.This project is subject to compliance with Public Law 91-596 "Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970" (OSHA), with respect to all reles and regulations pertaining to construction, including volume 36, No.s 75 and 105, of the Federal Register, as amended, and as published by the US Dept of Labor. 1.28 ANTI-BOYCOTT COVENANT (EXECUTIVE ORDER #130) A.The contractor warrants, represents and agrees that during the time this contract is in effect, neither it nor any affiliated company, as hereinafter defined, participates in or cooperates with an international boycott, as defined in Section 999(b) (3) and (4) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, a amended, or engages in conduct declared to ve unlawful by Section 2 of Chapter 151E, Massachusetts General Laws. If there shall be a breach in warranty, representation, and agreement contained in this paragraph, then without limiting such other rights as it may have, the Commonweath shall be entitles to rescind this contract. As used herein, a affiliated company shall be any business entity of which at least 51% of the ownership interests are directly or indirectly owned by the contractor of by a person or persons or business entity or entities directly or indirectly owning at least 51% of the ownership interests of the contractor. 1.29 MASSACHUSETTS RIGHT TO KNOW LAW A.The general contractor is responsible to comply with the provisions of Chapter III F or the Massachusetts General Laws; added by Chapter 470 of the Acts of 1983 (Right to know Law). 1.30 DIG SAFE A.Within the Commonwealth, "Dig-Safe" is the name of the Utility Underground Plant Damage Prevention Authority. They are located at 111 South Bedford Road, Burlingtion, MA 01830. The Phone number is 1- 800-344-7233. B.Contractors must notify "Dig-Safe" of contemplated excavation, demolition, or explosive work in public or private ways, and any utility company right of way or easement. C.This notification must be made at least 72 hours prior to the work, but not more than 60 days before the contemplated work. Such notice shall be set forth the name or the street or the route number of said way and an accurate description of the location and nature of the proposed work. D.The Owner requires that the notification be sent to "Dig-Safe" by certified mail, with copies to the Owner. The Owner requires a copy of the signed receipt of delivery. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 7 SUMMARY E."Dig-Safe" is required to respond to the notice within 72 hours from the time said notice is received by designating at the locus the location of pipes, mains, wires, or conduits. F.Contractors shall not commence work until "Dig-Safe" has responded as noted above. The work shall then be performed in such a manner, and with reasonable precautions taken to avoid damage to utilities under the surface in said areas of work. G.Prior to the "Dig-Safe" notification, the Owner requires contractor to provide their superintendent with current "Dig-Safe" regulations, and a copy of Massachusetts General Laws Chaper 80, Section 40. 1.31 SUPERVISION OF THE WORK A.The contractor shall be held directly responsible for the correct installation of all work performed under this contract. He must make in good repair, without expense to the Owner, of any part of the work which may become inoperative on account of leaving the work unprotected during construction of the system or which may break or give out in any manner by reason of poor workmanship, defective materials, or lack of space to allow for expansion or contraction of the work during a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work by the Owner. B.The Contractor shall employ a competent Massachusetts licensed superintendent satisfactory to the Owner and to the Architect, who shall supervise all work under this contract, and who shall remain available a the site throughout the Contract period while the work is in progress. 1.32 EMERGENCY CONTACT A.Contractor shall provide the Owner with the name, address, and cell phone numbers of the site supintendent, and at least one tradesman, either of whom may be called on in an emergency, etither at night or on weekends, or other times when the contractor is not working on the job to take care of emergencies. Such emergency work, if required, will be done at NO additional cost to the Owner. If, for any reason, the contractor's representative cannot be reached within 2 hours, temporary repairs will be made by others at the contractor's expense. 1.33 GLASS A.All broken or defective glass not required to be replaced under the provisions of the appropriate sections, shall be replaced at the expense of the General Contractor. B.All glass surfaces installed by the contractor and tha adjacent thereto shall be thorughly cleaned and washed by qualified window cleaners at the expense of the general contractor just prior to acceptance of the work. 1.34 BARRIERS A.The general contractor shall provide protection for existing site elements, including but not limited to; trees, shrubs, grass, planted areas, paving, walkways, and utilities. Damage resulting from actions of the general contractor shall be paid for by the general contractor. 1.35 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A.The General Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. B.The General Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of persons, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1.All employees on site and all other persons who may be affected thereby. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 8 SUMMARY 2.All the work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody, or control of the contractor of any of his subcontractors, or sub-subcontractors. 3.Any other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including, but not limited to, equipment, existing construction to remain, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavement, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of the work. Restore to original condition or replace any property on and/or off the site which may be damaged or destroyed in the execution of the work. C.When not in actual use, staging or ladders shall not remain in position and/or unattended outside the bulding. D.The General and Subcontractors shall comply with (and the general contractor shall give all notices regarding) all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. E.The General Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions, and progress of the work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. F.The General Contractor shal promptly remedy all damage, or loss to any property caused in whole or in part by the general contractor, any subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts fo any of them may be liable, and for which the general contractor is responsible, except damage or loss attributable to the acts of omissions of the Owner of Architect or any one directly or indirectly employed by either of them of by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable. G.The general contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site, whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the general contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the general contractor in writing to the Owner and the Architect. H.The general contractor shall not load or permit any part of the work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. I.In an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the general contractor shall act, at his discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the general contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in the General Conditions for changes in the contract and methods of preparation of changes. J.Water Protection: Always protect excavation, trenches, and buildings from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, backing-up of drains or sewers, and other waters. Provide pumps, equipment and enclosures as required to provide this protection. Construct and maintain temporary drainagel do pumping necessary to keep excavations water free. K.Remove snow and ice as necessary for safety and proper execution of work. Remove same when work is completed. L.Provide constant protection against the weather as required to maintain the work, materials, apparatus, fixtures, fress from injury or damage. If low temperatures make it impossible to continue operations, cease work and notify the Architect. M.The general contractor is responsible for protection and security of all materials. The Owner is not responsible for lost of stolen articles and materials. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 9 SUMMARY 1.36 COORDINATION OF THE WORK A.The contractor shall supervise and direct the work, using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of work under the contract. B.The contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of all work and the coordination of the operations of all trades, subcontractors, or men engaged upon the work. He shall be prepared to guarantee each of his subcontractors all dimensions which they may require for the fitting of their work to all surrounding work. C.The contractor shall layout his own work, and shall be responsible for all lines, elevations, measurements of the building, grading, paving, and other work executed by him under the contract. He must exercise proper precaution to verify materials shown on the drawings before laying out the work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from his failure to exercise such precaution. D.Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings for areas above ceilingd and where close tolerances are required between building elements and mechanical, electrical , plumbing, and fire protection work. E.Verify location of utilities and existing conditions. 1.37 PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL GOALS A.Overview of the environmental requirements for the Project: The Owner wishes to incorporate to the greatest extent possible, "green products" and construction processes including pollution prevention during the construction process, and maintenance of healthy Indoor Air Quality (IAQ). B.Cooperative Effort: The specifications are not intended to limit alternative means of achieving the Owner's enviromental project objectives. Recommendations, and input from the Contractor for improving implementation of the Owner's environmental project objectives are strongly encouraged. C.Contractor's participation: The Contractor shall provide all administrative and procedural requirements necessary for the Owner to achieve its environmental goals in the construction of this project. 1.The Contractor shall incorporate into the construction specific "green" products which comply with the Owner's environmental goals and objective. Additionally, the Contractor is required to utilize "green" products which are part of the building process but not included in the final construction, (for example, cleaners, shipping containers and similar supplementary items.) 2.The Contractor is advised that special consideration and modification of the Contractor's means and methods may be additionally required to achieve the Owner's environmental goals which are beyond the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.The Contractor shall be responsible for instructing all workers and Subcontractors regarding the Owner's environmental goals for this Project. 4.The Contractor shall provide a waste and recycling program for handling and disposal of solid waste. D.Objectives: Major components of the Owner's environmental goals include construction utilizing "green products", pollution prevention during the construction process and maintenance of healthy Indoor Air Quality (IAQ). 1.Green products and materials require the incorporation into the Project: utilization of recycled materials and materials with high recycled content, use of designated sustainable managed products, and energy efficient equipment and fixtures. 2.Pollution prevention as achieved through recycle and reuse of materials , wast handling procedures, and limiting harmful pollutants emitted into the air, soil, and waterways. Pollution prevention efforts include, but are not limited to: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 10 SUMMARY a.Providing additional temporary facilities and controls. b.Minimizing the release of carbon dioxide (CO2) from fuels burned on site or fuels burned off site to supply electricity to the building. c.Avoiding the release of ozone-depleting compounds, such as HCFC's from refrigerants or foam insulation materials. 3.Where required, provide protection of the natural environment on and around the site. 4.Water Resource Protection: Conserve and use water efficiently, limit on-site fresh water usage to the greatest extent possible, control water distribution systems and waste, minimize use of imported and mined water. Capture and utilize rain water to the greatest extent permitted by law. Utilize water conserving appliances and equipment. 5.Air Quality is to be achieved by compliance with the limitation of indoor air concentrations of certain pollutants, at or below the established maximum allowable concentrations. Healthy air quality goals shall be maintained during construction. 6.Use construction practices that achieve the most efficient use of resources and materials. 1.38 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND MATERIAL RECYCLING A.All waste shall be promptlhy transported from the site and shall be legally disposed of off site. B.Materials which must be recycled: 1.Beverage Containers 2.Cardboard 3.Clean dimensional wood and pallets 4.Scrap metal, including but not limited to metals from banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim, steel, iron, galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass and bronze. C.Other recyclable materials to be considered include (but are not limited to): 1.Asphalt 2.Bricks 3.Carpet 4.Ceiling Tile 5.Concrete 6.Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) 7.Drywall 8.Paint 9.Plastic 1.39 TIME OF COMPLETION A.In accordance with the General Conditions, all work shall be commenced at a time stated in the applicable Notices to Proceed, and shall be completed in timeframe indicated in the contract for construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 2000 - 1 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B.Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C.Change procedures. D.Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes. E.Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 00 5000 - Contracting Forms and Supplements: Forms to be used. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.Form to be used: AIA G703. B.Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit draft to Architect for approval. C.Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D.Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification section. Identify site mobilization. E.Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this section, if applicable. For unit cost Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item. F.Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A.Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B.Form to be used: AIA G702. C.Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. D.Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. E.For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following: 1.Item Number. 2.Description of work. 3.Scheduled Values. 4.Previous Applications. 5.Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application. 6.Authorized Change Orders. 7.Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application. 8.Percentage of Completion. 9.Balance to Finish. 10.Retainage. F.Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G.Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products. H.List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of work. I.Submit one electronic and three hard-copies of each Application for Payment. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 2000 - 2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES J.Include the following with the application: 1.Transmittal letter as specified for submittals in Section 01 3000. 2.Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 3000. 3.Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors. 4.Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. K.When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A.Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or subcontractors of changes to Contract Documents. B.For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor. C.For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 7 days. D.Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6000. E.Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. 1.For change requested by Architect for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation with Architect's Requested back up documentation. 2.For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect, with Architect's requested back up documentation. 3.For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will based on the fixed unit prices. 4.For change ordered by Architect without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by Architect based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. F.Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1.Provide the following data: a.Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b.Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c.Overhead and profit. d.Justification for any change in Contract Time. e.Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 2.For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. G.Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. H.After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 2000 - 3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES I.Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. J.Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A.Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B.Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1.All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Document G703TM – 1992 Continuation Sheet AIA Document G703™ – 1992. Copyright © 1963, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1978, 1983 and 1992 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. Purchasers are permitted to reproduce ten (10) copies of this document when completed. To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Architects’ legal counsel, copyright@aia.org. 101210ACD44 AIA Document G702™–1992, Application and Certificate for Payment, or G732™–2009, Application and Certificate for Payment, Construction Manager as Adviser Edition, containing Contractor’s signed certification is attached. In tabulations below, amounts are in US dollars. Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. APPLICATION NO: APPLICATION DATE: PERIOD TO: ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NO: A B C D E F G H I ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION OF WORK SCHEDULED VALUE WORK COMPLETED MATERIALS PRESENTLY STORED (Not in D or E) TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE (D+E+F) % (G ÷ C) BALANCE TO FINISH (C – G) RETAINAGE (If variable rate) FROM PREVIOUS APPLICATION (D + E) THIS PERIOD GRAND TOTAL CAUTION: You should sign an original AIA Contract Document, on which this text appears in RED. An original assures that changes will not be obscured. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 2500 - 1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES SECTION 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 00 6325 - Substitution Request Form - During Construction: Required form for substitution requests made after award of contract (During construction). B.Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, coordination. C.Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, product options, delivery, storage, and handling. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.Substitutions: Changes from Contract Documents requirements proposed by Contractor to materials, products, assemblies, and equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.A Substitution Request for products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1.Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system. 2.Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3.Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the work to be complete, with no additional cost to Owner. 4.Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. B.Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. 1.Note explicitly any non-compliant characteristics. C.Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request, and information necessary to provide an actionable response. D.Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item. 3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION A.Submittal Form (after award of contract): 1.Submit substitution requests by completing the form attached to this section. See this section for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable. B.Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement. 3.03 RESOLUTION A.Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision. Provide this data in an expeditious manner. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 2500 - 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES B.Include completed Substitution Request Forms as part of the Project record. Include both approved and rejected Requests. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 3000 - 1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.General administrative requirements. B.Electronic Correspondence and Exchange of Construction Administration Documents. C.Preconstruction meeting. D.Site mobilization meeting. E.Progress meetings. F.Construction progress schedule. G.Contractor's daily reports. H.Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. I.Number of copies of submittals. J.Requests for Interpretation (RFI) procedures. K.Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 00 7200 - General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment. B.Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C.Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance data; warranties and bonds. 1.03 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Comply with requirements of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements for coordination of execution of administrative tasks with timing of construction activities. B.Make the following types of submittals to Architect: 1.Requests for Interpretation (RFI). 2.Requests for substitution. 3.Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4.Test and inspection reports. 5.Design data. 6.Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 7.Applications for payment and change order requests. 8.Progress schedules. 9.Coordination drawings. 10.Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. 11.Closeout submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A.All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format and transmitted via email. B.All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format and transitted via email to the Architect. These documents include but are not limited to: Submittals for review, information, and closeout; Requests for Information (RFIs); Change Order Requests, Change Orders; Applications for Payment, etc. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 3000 - 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to Requests for Interpretation (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, Contractor's correction punchlist, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 2.It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in allowable format. 3.Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed. 4.All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts. 3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A.Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B.Attendance Required: 1.Owner. 2.Architect. 3.Contractor. C.Agenda: 1.Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2.Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3.Distribution of Contract Documents. 4.Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5.Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect. 6.Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7.Scheduling. 8.Special Site Considerations. D.Architect to Record Meeting Minutes and distribute copies to participants; including Owner, Contractor, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A.Architect will schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. B.Attendance Required: 1.Contractor. 2.Owner. 3.Architect. 4.Contractor's superintendent. 5.Major subcontractors. C.Agenda: 1.Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2.Owner's requirements. 3.Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4.Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 5.Survey and building layout. 6.Security and housekeeping procedures. 7.Schedules. 8.Application for payment procedures. 9.Procedures for testing. 10.Procedures for maintaining record documents. 11.Requirements for start-up of equipment. 12.Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 3000 - 3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 3.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A.Architect will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. B.Attendance Required: 1.Contractor. 2.Owner. 3.Architect. 4.Contractor's superintendent. C.Agenda: 1.Review minutes of previous meetings. 2.Review of work progress. 3.Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4.Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5.Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6.Maintenance of progress schedule. 7.Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8.Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9.Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10.Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11.Other business relating to work. D.Architect to Record minutes and distribute copies within [five] days after meeting to participants, with copies to Contractor, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A.If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. B.Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1.Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. C.Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. D.Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.06 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A.Include only factual information. Do not include personal remarks or opinions regarding operations and/or personnel. B.Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site and project progress: 1.Date. 2.High and low temperatures, and general weather conditions. 3.List of subcontractors at Project site. 4.List of separate contractors at Project site. 5.Safety, environmental, or industrial relations incidents. 6.Meetings and significant decisions. 7.Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Include comparison between scheduled work activities (in Contractor's most recently updated and published schedule) and actual activities. Explain differences, if any. Note days or periods when no work was in progress and explain the reasons why. 8.Testing and/or inspections performed. 9.Signature of Contractor's authorized representative. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 3000 - 4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 3.07 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A.Photography Type: Digital; electronic files. B.In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events: 1.Excavations in progress. 2.Foundations in progress and upon completion. 3.Structural framing in progress and upon completion. 4.Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos. C.Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software. 1.Delivery Medium: Via email. 2.File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification. 3.PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal. 3.08 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) A.Definition: A request seeking one of the following: 1.An interpretation, amplification, or clarification of some requirement of Contract Documents arising from inability to determine from them the exact material, process, or system to be installed; or when the elements of construction are required to occupy the same space (interference); or when an item of work is described differently at more than one place in Contract Documents. 2.A resolution to an issue which has arisen due to field conditions and affects design intent. B.Preparation: Prepare an RFI immediately upon discovery of a need for interpretation of Contract Documents. Failure to submit a RFI in a timely manner is not a legitimate cause for claiming additional costs or delays in execution of the work. 1.Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item. a.Review, coordinate, and comment on requests originating with subcontractors and/or materials suppliers. b.Do not forward requests which solely require internal coordination between subcontractors. C.Content: Include identifiers necessary for tracking the status of each RFI, and information necessary to provide an actionable response. D.Attachments: Include sketches, coordination drawings, descriptions, photos, submittals, and other information necessary to substantiate the reason for the request. E.RFI Log: Prepare and maintain a tabular log of RFIs for the duration of the project. 3.09 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A.Submit to Architect for review a schedule for submittals in tabular format. 1.Submit at the same time as the preliminary schedule specified in Section - 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule. 2.Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule and schedule of values. 3.Format schedule to allow tracking of status of submittals throughout duration of construction. 3.10 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A.When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1.Product data. 2.Shop drawings. 3.Samples for selection. 4.Samples for verification. B.Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 3000 - 5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS C.Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D.After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals. 3.11 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A.When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1.Design data. 2.Certificates. 3.Test reports. 4.Inspection reports. 5.Manufacturer's instructions. 6.Manufacturer's field reports. 7.Other types indicated. B.Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 3.12 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A.Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B.Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C.When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: 1.Project record documents. 2.Operation and maintenance data. 3.Warranties. 4.Bonds. 5.Other types as indicated. D.Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.13 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A.Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible or incomplete files will be rejected. B.Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1.After review, produce duplicates. 2.Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.14 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.General Requirements: B.For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. For submittals that require review by the Architect's subconsultants, allow 21 days for review, excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. 3.15 SUBMITTAL REVIEW A.Submittals for Review: Architect will review each submittal, and approve, or take other appropriate action. B.Submittals for Information: Architect will acknowledge receipt and review. See below for actions to be taken. C.Architect's actions will be reflected by marking each returned submittal using virtual stamp on electronic submittals. D.Architect's and consultants' actions on items submitted for review: 1.Authorizing purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and installation: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 3000 - 6 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS a."Approved", or language with same legal meaning. b."Approved as Noted, Resubmission not required", or language with same legal meaning. 1)At Contractor's option, submit corrected item, with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. c."Approved as Noted, Resubmit for Record", or language with same legal meaning. 2.Not Authorizing fabrication, delivery, and installation: E.Architect's and consultants' actions on items submitted for information: 1.Items for which no action was taken: a."Received" - to notify the Contractor that the submittal has been received for record only. 2.Items for which action was taken: a."Reviewed" - no further action is required from Contractor. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 3216 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECTION 01 3216 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Preliminary schedule. B.Construction progress schedule, bar chart type. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A.Section 01 1000 - Summary: Work sequence. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule. B.If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C.Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. D.Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E.Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 1.04 SCHEDULE FORMAT A.Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. B.Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches. C.Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A.Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 3.02 CONTENT A.Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. B.Identify each item by specification section number. C.Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. D.Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, owner-furnished products, products identified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. E.Indicate delivery dates for owner-furnished products. F.Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures. G.Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. 3.03 BAR CHARTS A.Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B.Identify the first work day of each week. 3.04 UPDATING SCHEDULE A.Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B.Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 3216 - 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE C.Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D.Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E.Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F.Submit reports required to support recommended changes. 3.05 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A.Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to subcontractors, suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties. B.Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 4000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Submittals. B.Testing and inspection agencies and services. C.Control of installation. D.Mock-ups. E.Tolerances. F.Defect Assessment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1.Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C.Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. D.Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1.Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A.Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B.Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C.Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D.Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E.Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F.Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G.Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A.Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 4000 - 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS B.Accepted mock-ups establish the standard of quality the Architect will use to judge the Work. C.Integrated Exterior Mock-ups: Construct integrated exterior mock-up as indicated on drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products as required in individual Specification Sections. Provide adequate supporting structure for mock-up materials as necessary. D.Room Mock-ups: Construct room mock-ups as indicated on drawings. Coordinate installation of materials, products, and assemblies as required in specification sections; finish according to requirements. Provide required lighting and any supplemental lighting where required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the mock-up. E.Notify Architect fifteen (15) working days in advance of dates and times when mock-ups will be constructed. F.Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. G.Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. H.Obtain Architect's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. I.Architect will use accepted mock-ups as a comparison standard for the remaining Work. J.Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Architect. K.Where possible salvage and recycle the demolished mock-up materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A.Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B.Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C.Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A.Testing Agency Duties: 1.Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2.Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3.Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4.Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-compliance of Work or products. 5.Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6.Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B.Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1.Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2.Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3.Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4.Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C.Contractor Responsibilities: 1.Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 4000 - 3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 2.Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3.Provide incidental labor and facilities: a.To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b.To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c.To facilitate tests/inspections. d.To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4.Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5.Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6.Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D.Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. E.Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A.Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 5000 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Temporary utilities. B.Temporary telecommunications services. C.Temporary sanitary facilities. D.Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E.Security requirements. F.Waste removal facilities and services. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A.Owner will provide the following: 1.Electrical power and metering, consisting of connection to existing facilities. 2.Water supply, consisting of connection to existing facilities. B.Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A.Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A.Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B.Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.05 BARRIERS A.Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B.Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. C.Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 FENCING A.Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. B.Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A.Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.08 SECURITY A.Provide security and facilities to protect Work, from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A.Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 5000 - 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS B.Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C.Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. D.Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. 1.10 WASTE REMOVAL A.Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B.Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. C.If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. D.Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.11 FIELD OFFICES A.Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furnitureand drawing display table. B.Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 10 persons. C.Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures. 1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A.Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial Completion inspection. B.Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 5713 - 1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL SECTION 01 5713 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B.Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities. C.Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D.Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Mulch: Use one of the following: 1.Straw or hay. 2.Erosion control matting or netting. B.Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales. 1.Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum. 2.Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension. C.Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long: 1.Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 pound per linear foot. 2.Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time. 3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES A.In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive measures are not required. B.Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface. 1.Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum. 2.Length: 50 feet, minimum. 3.Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way. 4.Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin. C.Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences. 1.Provide linear sediment barriers: a.Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles. 2.Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier: a.Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet.. b.Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet. c.Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet. d.Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 5713 - 2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL e.Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet. D.Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures: 1.Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet. 2.Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement. E.Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings. F.Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at downspout outlets and storm water outlets. G.Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures: 1.Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges. 2.Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, wood chips, or shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay. H.Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months. I.Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A.Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B.Repair deficiencies immediately. 3.05 CLEAN UP A.Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Architect. B.Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 6000 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Transportation, handling, storage and protection. B.Product option requirements. C.Substitution limitations. D.Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 1000 - Summary: Lists of products to be removed from existing building. B.Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1.Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2.For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B.Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C.Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D.Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1.For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A.Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. B.Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A.Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B.Use of products having any of the following characteristics is not permitted: 1.Made outside the United States, its territories, Canada, or Mexico. 2.Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 3.Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. 4.Containing lead, cadmium, or asbestos. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A.Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B.Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 6000 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS C.Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B.Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS A.See Section 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A.Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B.If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C.Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D.Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E.Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F.Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G.Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. H.Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 01 7419. B.Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C.Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D.Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E.For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F.Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G.Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. H.Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. I.Do not store products directly on the ground. J.Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. K.Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. L.Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 6000 - 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS M.Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. N.Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 7000 - 1 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A.For surveying work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. Employ only individual(s) trained and experienced in collecting and recording accurate data relevant to ongoing construction activities, 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.04 COORDINATION A.Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B.Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C.Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D.Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E.In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F.Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G.After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A.New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B.Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B.Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C.Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 7000 - 2 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS D.Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E.Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F.Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B.Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C.Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A.Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B.Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C.Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D.Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. E.Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. F.Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. G.Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. H.Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1.Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2.Grid or axis for structures. 3.Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. I.Periodically verify layouts by same means. J.Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B.Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C.Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D.Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E.Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B.Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1.Complete the work. 2.Fit products together to integrate with other work. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 7000 - 3 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 3.Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4.Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5.Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6.Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7.Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8.Remove and replace defective and non-complying work. C.Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. D.Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. E.Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. F.Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G.Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H.At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element. I.Patching: 1.Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2.Match color, texture, and appearance. 3.Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING A.Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B.Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C.Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D.Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A.Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B.Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C.Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D.Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E.Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F.Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G.Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 7000 - 4 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 3.08 ADJUSTING A.Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.09 FINAL CLEANING A.Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. B.Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C.Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. D.Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E.Clean filters of operating equipment. F.Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and drainage systems. G.Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. H.Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A.Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1.Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B.Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C.Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. D.Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. E.Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect. F.Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. G.Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion final inspection. H.Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3.11 MAINTENANCE A.Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B.Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C.Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 7000 - 5 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS D.Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E.Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 7419 - 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL SECTION 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A.Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B.Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C.Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D.Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, incineration, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports. E.Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1.Burning on the project site. 2.Burying on the project site. 3.Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4.Other illegal dumping or burying. F.Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B.Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C.Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. D.Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. B.Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C.Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. D.Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. E.Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F.Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G.Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H.Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 7419 - 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL I.Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J.Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K.Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L.Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M.Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N.Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O.Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P.Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1.Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2.Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3.Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a.Identification of material. b.Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c.State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d.Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4.Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information: a.Identification of material. b.Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash/waste material from the project delivered to incinerators. c.State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total disposal cost. d.Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 5.Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a.Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b.Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c.Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d.Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e.Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 6.Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a.Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b.Amount, in tons or cubic yards. c.Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 7419 - 3 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 7.Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method. PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A.See Section 01 3000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B.See Section 01 5000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C.See Section 01 6000 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. D.See Section 01 7000 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 2.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A.Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B.Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect. C.Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D.Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1.Prebid meeting. 2.Preconstruction meeting. 3.Regular job-site meetings. E.Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1.Provide containers as required. 2.Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3.Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F.Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G.Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H.Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. I.Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 02 4100 - 1 DEMOLITION SECTION 02 4100 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Selective demolition of built site elements. B.Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 1000 - Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re-use by Contractor. B.Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. C.Section 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. D.Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. E.Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products; temporary bracing and shoring. F.Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B.NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2013. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE A.Remove paving and curbs as required to accomplish new work. B.Remove other items indicated, for salvage and relocation. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000. B.Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1.Obtain required permits. 2.Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 3.Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 4.Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 5.Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 02 4100 - 2 DEMOLITION 6.Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 7.Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 8.Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. C.Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. D.Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed. E.Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1.Provide bracing and shoring. 2.Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3.Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. F.Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1.Comply with requirements of Section 01 7419 - Waste Management. 2.Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 3.Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. G.Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A.Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B.Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C.Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D.Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner. E.Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F.Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G.Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A.Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1.Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. 2.Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3.Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B.Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. C.Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1.Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified. 2.Remove items indicated on drawings. D.Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 02 4100 - 3 DEMOLITION 1.Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2.Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3.Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4.Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. E.Protect existing work to remain. 1.Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2.Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3.Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4.Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A.Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B.Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; do not burn or bury. C.Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. D.Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 1 SUMMARY SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. 2.0 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures and finishes for the following applications: a. Footings. b. Foundation walls. c. Slabs-on-grade. d. Cutting and patching of mechanical and electrical penetrations through cast-in- place concrete. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 033300 Architectural Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 033515 Concrete Finishing 3.0 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 4.0 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Indicate amount of fly ash in the mix. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 1. Indicate coordination requirements for reinforcement locations. D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. 1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring. 2. Blockouts for Architectural Joint Systems: Indicate blockouts and coordination with architectural joint systems E. Formwork Inspection: Indicate compliance with approved shop drawings. F. Anchor Bolt Location: Indicate compliance with approved shop drawings. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 2 SUMMARY G. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. H. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials. I. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances and requirements for applied finishes and materials, except as noted for slope to drains. J. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. K. Hot/Cold weather curing methods: When concrete placement is scheduled to occur during hot or cold weather conditions defined by ACI 305 or 306, the contractor shall submit proposed curing methods to the Engineer for review a minimum of 10 days in advance of the proposed placement date. Submittal shall include description of monitoring conducted by an independent testing agency to verify that the field conditions are in conformance with the approved submittal. 5.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code- -Reinforcing Steel." E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 3 SUMMARY F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 6.0 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.0 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: shall be American-made Portland Cement, free from water soluble salts or alkalis which will cause efflorescence on exposed surfaces. Portland Cement shall be Type II, ASTM C150. Use only one brand of cement for each type of cement throughout project. Contractor shall be responsible for whatever steps are necessary to insure that no visual variations in color will result in exposed concrete and shall place on order and secure in advance a sufficient quantity of this (these) cement(s) to complete concrete work specified herein. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, maximum 15% content 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal weight Fine Aggregate: shall be washed, inert, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33 and following additional requirements: Sieve Retained Percent #4 0 - 5 #16 25 - 40 #50 70 - 87 #100 93 - 97 Fineness Modulus 2.80 (Plus/Minus 0.20) Organic Plate 2 maximum Silt 2.0 percent maximum Mortar Strength 100 percent minimum compression ratio Soundness 5 percent maximum loss, magnesium sulfate, five cycles C. Normal weight Coarse Aggregate: shall be well graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to ASTM C33 and the following additional requirements: Designated Size (inches) 3 2 1-1/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 F.M.(+/-0.20) 7.95 7.45 7.20 6.95 6.70 6.10 4.50 Organic Plate 1 maximum Silt 1.0 percent maximum Soundness 5 percent maximum loss, magnesium sulfate, five cycles Maximum designated sizes for normal weight coarse aggregate to be used in concrete sections shall be as noted below, except that sizes shall also be chosen in conjunction with required clearances. 1. One and one-half inches for sections over ten inches in thickness. 2. One inch for sections more than eight and up to ten inches in thickness. 3. Three-quarter inch for sections more than three and up to eight inches in thickness. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 4 SUMMARY D. Water: shall be from approved source, potable, clean and free from oils, acids, alkali, organic matter and other deleterious material. E. Admixtures: 1. Water-reducing agent conforming to ASTM C494: a. "WRDA" - W.R. Grace & Co. b. "PDA25" - Protex Industries, Inc. c. "Pozzolith 344H" - Master Builder's Co. d. Note: Water-reducing agent shall be by same manufacturer as air-entraining agent. 2. Air-entraining agent conforming to ASTM C260: a. "DAREX AEA" - W.R. Grace & Co. b. "PROTEX AEA" - Protex Industries c. "MB-VR" or "MB-AE" - Master Builder's Co. 3. Superplasticizer: High-range water-reducer conforming to ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. 4. Admixtures retarding setting of cement in concrete shall not be used without written approval of Designer. 5. Admixtures causing accelerated setting of cement in concrete shall not be used without written approval of Designer. 2.0 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. The Contractor shall recommend, on the basis of trial mixes and strength curves specified below, design mixes for each type and strength of concrete. The Testing Agency will verify that the proposed mix designs conform to all specification requirements. B. Sufficient materials for concrete mix design shall be furnished by Contractor not less than five weeks before use. Duplicate small samples plainly and neatly labeled with source, where proposed to be used, date, and name of collector shall be provided and presented to Testing Agency for permanent reference. C. Mixes shall be designed in accordance with "Method 1" of ACI 301, and the requirements of this Section. All concrete is normal weight unless specifically designated otherwise; air-dry weight not to exceed 150 lbs. per cubic foot. D. Limiting values shown below apply for specific strengths of concrete with maximum coarse aggregates ¾” unless noted otherwise in TABLE A below. TABLE A Location Minimum Allowable Maximum Air Entrainment (+/-1%) Compressive Strength Slump (+/-1”) at 28 day (psi) Footings/ Foundation Walls 4,000 5” 6% Interior Slab-on-grade 4,000 3 ½” NO ADDED AIR Exterior Slab-on-grade 4,000 3 ½” 6% E. Water Cement Ratios: Concrete subjected to freezing and thawing: maximum W/C = 0.50 Concrete subjected to deicers: maximum W/C = 0.45 F. Water-Reducing Admixture - The approved water-reducing admixture shall be used in all concrete, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. G. The approved superplasticizer shall be used in all concrete slabs, including slabs on grade. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 5 SUMMARY H. Concrete exposed to deicing chemicals shall not exceed the percentages of total weight of cementitious materials (fly ash, pozzelans, slag, and silica fume) specified in Section 4.2.3 of ACI 318. I. Water content and cement content of concrete to be used in work shall be based on curve showing relation between water content, cement content, and 7 and 28 day compressive strengths of concrete made using proposed materials. Curves shall be determined by four or more points, each representing an average of at least three test specimens at each age, and shall have range of values sufficient to yield desired data, including all compressive strengths required by Contract Documents, without extrapolation. Design mix of concrete to be used in work, as determined from curve, shall correspond to following test strengths (TABLE B) obtained in laboratory trial mixtures, but in no case shall resulting mix conflict with limiting values as specified in TABLE A. TABLE B Minimum Strength of Lab Trial Mixes (psi) Design Trial Mix Strength Strength 7-days 28-days 4000 3800 5000 3000 2700 3750 J. Any deviation from approved mix design, which Contractor deems desirable under certain project conditions, will not be allowed without written approval of Designer. Cost of any additional testing by Testing Agency associated therewith shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.0 FORM MATERIALS A. Construct formwork to shapes, lines, and dimensions required, plumb and straight, secured and braced sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load, and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage, all in conformance with ACI Standard 347, “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork”. B. Formwork for exposed concrete shall be medium-density plastic overlaid plywood, 5/8” minimum thickness; for concealed concrete shall be “Plyform” plywood, 5/8” minimum thickness. C. Chamfer Strips: Half-inch, 45 degree poplar wood strips, nailed six inches on center, and installed in inside corners of all forms, unless otherwise directed by Designer. D. Form Ties and Spreaders: Richmond Tyscrus by Richmond Screw Anchor Co.; Superior-ties by Superior Concrete Accessories, Ind.; or Sure-Grip Ties by Dayton Sure-Grip and Shore Co. Wire ties shall not be used. Ties for foundation walls shall be snap-ties or type specified above with removal cones and shall incorporate water seal washer. Ties shall be arranged in a symmetrical manner. E. Form Release Agent: Non-staining and non-emulsifiable type, or equal approved by Designer. Form release agent shall be biodegradable and shall not impart any stain to concrete nor interfere with adherence of any material to be applied to concrete surfaces. 4.0 REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcing Steel Bars: shall be newly rolled billet steel conforming to ASTM A615 Grade 60. Bars shall be bent cold. B. Welded Wire Fabric: shall conform to ASTM A185. C. All steel embedded items and lintels shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 6 SUMMARY D. All hot-dip galvanized steel shall be inspected for compliance with ASTM A123 and shall be marked with a stamp that indicates the number of ounces of zinc per square foot of steel. After galvanizing, the bars shall be dipped in a 0.2 percent chromic acid solution. A notarized Certificate of Compliance with all of the above shall be required from the galvanizer. E. Reinforcement Accessories: shall conform to Product Standard PS7-766, National Bureau of Standards, Department of Commerce, Class C, as produced by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc.; Dayton Sure-Grip Co.; or R.K.L. Building Specialties Co., Inc. Reinforcement accessories shall include spacers, chairs, ties, slab bolsters, clips, chair bars, and other devices for properly assembling, placing, spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement. Tie wire shall be galvanized or stainless wire of sufficient strength for intended purpose, but not less than No. 18 gage. Metal supports shall be of such type as not to penetrate surface of formwork and show through surface of concrete. Accessories touching interior formed surfaces exposed to view shall have not less than 1/8 inch of plastic between metal and concrete surface. Plastic tips shall extend not less than 1/2 inch up on metal legs. Individual and continuous slab bolsters and chairs shall be of type to suit various conditions encountered and must be capable of supporting 300 pound load without damage or permanent distortion. 5.0 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Grout: shall be ready-to-use metallic aggregate product requiring only addition of water at job site such as "Embeco Pre-mixed Grout" by Master Builder's; "Vibro-Foil Ready-Mixed" by W.R. Grace & Co.; or "Ferrolith G" by Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. Grout shall be easily workable and shall have no drying shrinkage at any age. Compressive strength of grout (2" x 2" cubes) shall not be less than 5000 psi at 7 days, and 7500 psi at 28 days. B. Vapor Barrier: shall be minimum 15 mil polyethylene, ASTM E1745 Class A with permeance of less than 0.01 Perms as tested in accordance with ASTM E1745 Section 7, use thicker barrier when specified elsewhere in the documents. C. Membrane Curing Compound: shall conform to ASTM C309, Type 1, 15% solids (min). Product used shall be shown to be compatible with the later application of coatings. Curing compound shall not be used on any floor slab scheduled to receive an adhered floor finish. D. Chemical Hardener: All exposed concrete floor slabs shall be hardened with three applications of fluosilicate chemical hardener followed by two applications of clear acrylic concrete sealer by Sonneborn Division, ChemRex Inc. “Lapidolith”; or equal product by W.R. Meadows Co. or Concrete Service Material Company. E. Bonding Agent/Anti-Corrosion Coating: All existing reinforcement exposed by sawcutting shall be coated with an application of anti-corrosion coating prior to applying any other coating or casting fresh concrete against existing reinforcement. Apply a bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 1. Available Products: a. Sika Corporation; Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem. b. Euclid Chemical Company; DuralPrep A.C. c. Ardex Engineered Cements; ARDEX BACA F. Foundation Pipe Sleeve: All foundation penetrations shall be sealed to prevent moisture transmission through the sleeve. G. Garage floor (when vehicle maintenance garage is required): Floor sealer shall be Koster VAPI 2000, one coat waterproofing system, as manufactured by Koster American Corporation. Strictly follow the manufacturer’s surface preparation and application instructions. 1. Non-slip aggregate: Add slip-resistant additive to floor sealer per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Approved product and manufacturer: a. “EUCO GRIP” slip resistant additive by Euclid Chemical FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 7 SUMMARY H. Exterior Penetrating Silane/Siloxane Sealer: Exterior concrete slabs shall be treated and sealed with water based, penetrating water repellant for horizontal surfaces. Product shall be designed to protect exterior concrete from winter freeze-thaw cycling and the effects of de-icing salts. Products shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s written directions. 1. Approved product and manufacturer: a. Baracade WB 244, by Euclid Chemical b. SS Harden X SI, by SealSource International 6.0 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS A. Waterstops: PVC split serrated type with center bulb. B. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/4 inch thick and full depth of slab less 1/2 inch. C. Joint Tape: Fortifiber grade 495-pressure sensitive tape. D. Expansion Joint Preformed Strips: Rigid plastic joint forms, minimum 5/8” thick and 1 1/2” deep, with arrow shaped tip and removable top. E. Control joint devices: Preformed, rigid, two-piece with removable top piece. F. Construction and Control Joint filler: Shall meet requirements of ACI 302, including semi-rigid, 100% solids expoxy or polyurethane joint filler. 1. Approved product and manufacturer: a. Qwikjoint UVR, by Euclid Chemical b. CreteFill Pro 85MI, by Curecrete Dist. Inc. 7.0 INJECTION ADHESIVE FASTENERS A. Adhesive/Epoxy: Epoxy adhesive injection anchoring system. 1. Available products: a. Powers Fasteners; PE1000+ b. Hilti; HIT HY 200. c. Simpson Strong-Tie; SET Epoxy Adhesive B. Anchor Rod: Steel threaded rod. Furnish with chamfered ends to receive nuts and washers and chiseled ends to be embedded into the anchorage base. C. Anchorage Base: Solid, sound, structural concrete. Anchorage into newly cast concrete shall not be made until the concrete has been allowed to cure to its 28-day design strength. Minimum anchorage base strength shall be 2,000 psi. D. Base Preparation: Bore holes shall be made with a carbide bit to depths and diameters as recommended by the manufacturer. All bore holes shall be with pressurized air and wire brush as specified by the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.0 INSPECTION A. Structural testing and inspections shall be performed by approved independent testing and inspection agencies (Agency) under the supervision of professional engineers licensed in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. All quality assurance during construction shall b in accordance with the governing building code. The Agency must provide a copy of results from any and all testing and inspections directly to the registered design professional for review. Consulting Structural Engineer, Inc. is the registered design professional (RDP) for the concrete construction on this project. 1. Prior to placement of concrete the Agency shall verify the general arrangement of concrete forms and reinforcement as follows: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 8 SUMMARY a. Formwork – shape, location, dimensions, form saver couplers and embedded items b. Reinforcement – size, quantity, spacing, condition, placement and clearance 2. The Agency shall observe placement operations. Verify proper consolidation procedures and equipment. Verify conformance to specifications including cold and hot weather placement procedures. 3. The Agency shall observe curing procedures and verify conformance with the specifications and contract documents. B. The Agency shall examine all work prepared by others to receive work of this Section and report any defects affecting installation to the Contractor for correction. Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by others. 2.0 HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. Handle and store materials separately in such manner as to prevent intrusion of foreign matter, segregation, or deterioration. Do not use foreign materials or those containing ice. Remove improper and rejected materials immediately from point of use. Cover materials, including steel reinforcement and accessories, during construction period. Stockpile concrete constituents properly to assure uniformity throughout project. 3.0 ERECTION OF FORMWORK, SHORING AND RESHORING A. Set and maintain formwork to insure complete concrete work within tolerance limits listed in ACI 347 latest edition, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork", and with following additional requirements: 1. Maximum variations from plumb: a. In surfaces of columns and walls: In any 10 feet of length 1/4 inch Maximum for entire length 1/2 inch 2. Maximum variations from established position in plan shown on the drawings: Column 1/2 inch Walls 3/4 inch 3. Variations in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thickness of slabs and walls. Minus 1/8 inch Plus 1/4 inch B. For a minimum of one hour prior to concrete placement, wet forms continuously with water to swell forms in order to prevent leakage of concrete matrix and to minimize absorption of concrete matrix water by form materials. This requirement may be waived for those specific cases where Designer deems it unnecessary or impractical. Care must be exercised to prevent a build-up of water at base of forms. C. Before form materials can be re-used, surfaces that will be in contact with freshly cast concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged areas repaired and projecting nails withdrawn. Re-use of form material shall be subject to approval by Designer. D. All interior slabs-on-grade shall be placed on a vapor barrier. 4.0 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with requirements of CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars" and CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports" and with further requirements below. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 9 SUMMARY B. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed in accordance with Contract Documents and shall be firmly secured in position by wire ties, chairs, spacers, and hangers, each of type approved by Designer. Minimum cover between reinforcement and concrete surfaces shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the construction documents: Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 3” Concrete exposed to earth or weather 1 1/2” C. Bending, welding or cutting reinforcement in field in any manner other than as shown on Drawings, is prohibited, unless specific approval for each case is given by Designer. D. Reinforcement shall be continuous through construction joints unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. E. Where continuous bars are called for, indicated, or required they shall be run continuously around corners, lapped at necessary splices, splices staggered, wherever possible, and hooked at discontinuous ends. F. Reinforcement shall be spliced only in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents or as otherwise specifically approved by Designer. Splices of reinforcement at points of maximum stress shall generally be avoided. Welded wire fabric shall lap six inches or one space plus two inches whichever is larger, and shall be wired together. G. At time concrete is placed, reinforcement shall be free of excessive rust, scale, or other coatings that will destroy or reduce bond requirements. Reinforcement expected to be exposed to weather for a considerable length of time shall be painted with a heavy coat of cement grout. Protect stored materials so as not to end or distort bars in any way. Bars that become damaged will be rejected. H. Before concrete is cast, check all reinforcement after it is placed to insure that reinforcement conforms to Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings. Such checking shall be done only by qualified experienced personnel. In addition, the Designer shall be notified at least 36 hours prior to concrete placement and given opportunity to inspect completed reinforcement and formwork before concrete placement. Prior approval of Shop Drawings shall in no way limit Designer's right to demand modifications or additions to reinforcement or accessories. I. Provide and install all necessary tie bars, spacer bars, chair bars, and bolsters as required to maintain reinforcing steel in a rigid position prior to placing concrete. All supports and accessories shall conform to the requirements of CRSI “Recommended Practice For Placing Reinforcing Bars”. 5.0 JOINTS A. Construction and control joints indicated on Drawings are mandatory and shall not be omitted. B. Joints not indicated or specified shall be placed to least impair strength of structure and shall be subject to approval of Designer. C. Contraction joints shall be used to divide slabs-on-grade into rectangular panels. Contraction joints shall be sawed along all column lines unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Joints may be sawed as soon as practical not to damage concrete and shall be sawed no later than 24 hours after concrete is placed. Slab-on-grade construction joints shall be keyed joints and utilized as contraction joints when appropriate. Construction joints shall be sawcut same as would a contraction joint. D. Foundation wall control joints shall be 1” chamfered joints (both sides) and located as per the Drawings, maximum spacing is 25’-0” on center. Foundation wall construction joints shall be keyed joints and may occur at any control joint location, maximum spacing 100’-0” on center. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 10 SUMMARY 6.0 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Conform to requirements of ACI 318, paragraph 6.3, "Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete", and as specified below. B. Install steel sleeves, embedded wall plates and similar items, furnished by other trades, at locations shown on the drawings. C. Anchor bolts for column baseplates shall be installed with templates provided. Vertical alignment and plan locations shall be maintained within one-sixteenth inches of the locations shown on the drawings. 1. Inspection shall be performed by a surveyor licensed in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Certify compliance with shop drawings. 7.0 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORAGE A. Injection adhesive anchors: 1. Anchorage Base: Solid, sound, structural concrete. Anchorage into newly cast concrete shall not be made until the concrete has been allowed to cure to its 28-day design strength. Minimum anchorage base strength shall be 2,000 psi. 2. Base Preparation: Bore holes shall be made with a carbide bit to depths and diameters as recommended by the injection adhesive manufacturer. All bore holes shall be cleaned with pressurized air and wire brush as specified by the adhesive manufacturer. 8.0 MIXING, CONSISTENCY, AND DELIVERY OF CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be ready-mixed, produced by plant acceptable to Designer. Hand or site mixing shall not be done. Constituents, including admixtures except certain corrosion inhibitors and superplasticizers, shall be batched at central batch plant. Admixtures shall be premixed in solution form and dispensed as recommended by manufacturer. B. Central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall conform with Truck Mixer and Agitator Standard of Truck Mixer Manufacturer's Bureau of National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association, and Contract Documents. C. Ready mixed concrete shall be transported to site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded not in excess of rated capacities. Discharge at site shall be within one and one-half hours after cement was first introduced into mix. Discard cement not discharged within one and one-half hours and dispose of legally. Concrete with a temperature greater than 85 degrees F. shall not be placed. Central mixed concrete shall be plant mixed a minimum of five minutes. Agitation shall begin immediately after premixed concrete is placed in truck and shall continue without interruption until discharged. Transit mixed concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for at least ten minutes immediately after charging truck followed by agitation without interruption until discharged. Concrete shall be furnished by a single plant unless accepted by the Designer in writing. D. Retempering of concrete which has partially hardened, that is, mixing with or without additional cement, aggregates, or water, will not be permitted. E. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate with the concrete supplier to ensure a workable mix based on method of placement and jobsite conditions. The use of plasticizers, retardants and other additives shall be at the option of the contractor subject to the approval of the Structural Engineer. Follow recommendations of the manufacturer for the proper use of additives. The use of calcium chloride or other chloride bearing salts shall not be permitted. 9.0 PLACING CONCRETE A. Remove water and foreign matter from forms and excavations and, except in freezing weather or as otherwise directed, thoroughly wet wood forms just prior to placing concrete. Place no concrete on frozen soil and provide adequate protection against frost action during freezing weather. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 11 SUMMARY B. To secure full bond at construction joints, surfaces of concrete already placed, including vertical and inclined surfaces, shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign materials and laitance, roughened with suitable tools such as chipping hammers or wire brushes, and recleaned by stream of water or compressed air. Well before new concrete is deposited, joints shall be saturated with water. After free or glistening water disappears joints shall be given thorough coating of neat cement slurry mixed to consistency of very heavy paste. Surface shall receive coating of approximately one-eighth inch thick; this shall be scrubbed in by means of stiff bristle brushes. New concrete shall be deposited before neat cement dries or changes color. C. Do not place concrete having slump outside of allowable slump range. D. Transport concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods which prevent separation of ingredients and displacement of reinforcement, and which avoid rehandling. Deposit no partially hardened concrete. When concrete is conveyed by chutes, equipment shall be of such size and U-shaped design as to insure continuous flow in chute. Flat (coal) chutes shall not be employed. Chutes shall be of metal or metal lines and different portions shall have approximately same slope. Slope shall not be less than 25 degrees nor more than 45 degrees from horizontal and shall be such as to prevent segregation of ingredients. Discharge end of chute shall be provided with baffle plate or spout to prevent segregation. If discharge end of chute is more than five feet above surface of concrete in forms, spout shall be used, and lower and maintained as near surface of deposit as practicable. When operation is intermittent, chute shall discharge into hopper. Chute shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after each run and debris and any water used shall be discharged outside forms. Concrete shall not be allowed to flow horizontally over distances exceeding five feet. E. Concrete shall be placed in such manner as to prevent segregation, and accumulations of hardened concrete on forms or reinforcement above mass of concrete being placed. To achieve this end, suitable hoppers, spouts with restricted outlets and tremies shall be used as required. F. During and immediately after depositing, concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by means of internal type mechanical vibrators or other tools, or by spading to produce required quality of finish. Vibration shall be done by experienced operators under close supervision and shall be carried on only enough to produce homogeneity and optimum consolidation without permitting segregation of constituents or "pumping" of air. Vibrators used for normal weight concrete shall operate at speed at not less than 7,000 vpm and be of suitable capacity. Do not use vibrators to move concrete. Vibration shall be supplemented by proper wooden spade puddling to remove included bubbles and honeycomb adjacent to visible surfaces. At least one vibrator shall be on hand for every 10 cubic yards of concrete placed per hour, plus one spare. Vibrators shall be operable and on site prior to starting placement. G. Vertical lifts shall not exceed 18 inches. Vibrate completely through successive lifts to avoid pour lines. Vibrate first lift thoroughly until top of lift glistens to avoid stone pockets, honeycomb, and segregation. H. Concrete shall be deposited continuously, and in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and planes of weakness within section. If section cannot be placed continuously between planned construction joints, as specified, field joint and additional reinforcement shall be introduced so as to preserve structural continuity. Designer shall be notified in any such case. I. Cold joints, particularly in exposed concrete, including "honeycomb", are unacceptable. If they occur in concrete surfaces exposed to view, Designer will require that entire section in which blemish occurs be removed and replaced with new materials at Contractor's expense. J. When placing exposed concrete walls or columns, strike corners of forms rapidly and repeatedly from outside along full height while depositing concrete and vibrating. K. Chutes, hoppers, spouts, adjacent work, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after each run and water and debris shall be discharged outside form. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 12 SUMMARY L. Screed floors level maintaining surface flatness and levelness tolerances as follows: 1. Slabs-on-grade: ¼ Inch in 10-Feet. 10.0 FINISHING OF UNFORMED CONCRETE SURFACES A. Smooth troweled finish: shall be provided where concrete flatwork is to be exposed in the finished work or is to receive resilient flooring materials. B. Floated finish: shall be provided where concrete flatwork is to receive waterproofing membranes or setting beds for finished materials. C. Floated finish: shall be provided for top surfaces of walls, slabs and beams. D. Rough struck surface shall be provided at top of pedestals. E. Steel Broom Finish (with smooth edging): shall be provided at exterior concrete walks, pavements and steps. F. Contractor, at his own expense, shall level depressed spots and grind high spots in concrete surfaces which are in excess of specified tolerances. Leveling materials proposed for providing proper surface shall be approved by Designer. G. Finishing of slab surfaces shall comply with the recommendations of ACI 302.1 and 304. 11.0 REPAIRING OF UNFORMED CONCRETE SURFACES A. Tops of slabs and walls shall be repaired by using either same material as originally cast or by use of dry-pack material, as approved by Designer. Areas affected shall be chipped back square and to depth of one inch minimum. Hole shall then be moistened with water for a minimum of two hours, followed by brush coat of 1/16 inch thick cement paste. Immediately plug hole with concrete, or with dry pack material consisting of 1:1.5 mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to touch. Hammer dry-pack into hole until dense, and excess paste appears on surface. Finish patch flush and to same texture as surrounding concrete. For large repairs employ 1-1-2 mixture of cement, concrete sand and pea gravel at same dry-pack consistency. 12.0 CURING AND PROTECTION A. When concrete is placed at or below ambient air temperatures of 40 degrees F. or whenever in opinion of Designer, such or lower temperatures are likely to occur within 48 hours after placement of concrete, cold weather concreting procedures, according to ACI 306 and as specified herein, shall be followed. To this end, entire area affected shall be protected by adequate housing or covering, and heating. No salt, chemicals or other foreign materials shall be used in the mix to lower freezing point of concrete. B. Protect concrete work against injury from heat, cold, and defacement of any nature during construction operations. C. Concrete shall be treated and protected immediately after concreting or cement finishing is completed, to provide continuous moist curing above 50 degrees F. for at least seven days, regardless of ambient air temperatures. D. Curing compounds will not be permitted for slab and beams. E. Keep permanent temperature record showing date and outside temperature for concreting operations. Thermometer readings shall be taken at start of work in morning, at noon, and again late in afternoon. Locations of concrete placed during such periods shall likewise be recorded, in such manner as to show any effect temperatures may have had on construction. Copies of temperature record shall be distributed daily to Designer. F. Curing of slabs shall comply with the recommendations of ACI 308. Provide 7 day curing of slabs immediately after finishing using one of the following methods: 1. Continuously watered burlap FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 13 SUMMARY 2. Waterproof membranes 3. Sprayed-on liquid membrane. G. Protect the concrete surface between finishing operations on hot, dry days or any other time that plastic shrinkage cracks could develop by using wet burlap, plastic membrane or fogging. Protect concrete slab at all times from rain, hail or other injurious effects. 13.0 HARDENER A. Prepare surfaces and apply surface hardener to all concrete floors not receiving resilient flooring, ceramic tile or membrane waterproofing. B. Prepare surface and apply special sealer system to all concrete flatwork and curbs exposed to the elements. 14.0 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK, SHORING AND RESHORING A. Contractor shall be responsible for proper removal of formwork, shoring, and reshoring. B. Forms shall be removed only after concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its shown weight, construction loads to be placed thereon and lateral loads, without damage to structure or excessive deflection. C. Forms and supports shall remain in place for not less than minimum periods of time noted below. These periods represent cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, consecutive unless otherwise approved by Designer during which time mean daily air temperature at surfaces of concrete is above 50 degrees F. 1. Vertical surfaces: concrete shall have reached 100 day-degrees# and shall have attained strength of not less than 30 percent of f'c. Where such forms also support formwork for slab or beam soffits, removal times for latter shall govern. 2. #Definition of day-degrees: Total number of days times mean daily air temperature at surfaces of concrete. For example, five days at temperature of 60 degrees F. equals 300 day degrees. Days or fractions of days in which temperature is below 50 degrees F. shall not be included in calculation of day-degrees. D. Any test cylinders required to verify the specified minimum strengths for form removal shall be field cured under the same conditions as the concrete they represent. Such cylinders and testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. 15.0 REPAIRING AND FINISHING OF FORMED AND ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SURFACES A. In accordance with the provisions of ACI 301, Chapter 10, all concrete shall have "smooth form finish". B. Intent of this Specification is to require forms, mixtures of concrete, and workmanship so that concrete surfaces will require no patching, except for plugging of tie holes. However, where patching is acceptable to Designer, procedure described below shall be followed. C. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas shall not be patched unless examined and approval is given by Designer. If such approval is received by Contractor, areas involved shall be chipped down square and at least one inch deep to sound concrete by means of cold chisels or pneumatic chipping hammers. If honeycomb exists around reinforcement, chip to provide clear space at least three-quarter inch wide all around steel to afford proper ultimate bond thereto. For areas less than one and one-half inches deep, patch shall be made in same manner as described above for filling unformed concrete surfaces, care being exercised to use crumbly-dry (non-trowelable) mixtures and to avoid sagging. Thicker repairs shall require build- up in successive days, each layer being applied as described. To aid strength and bonding of multiple layer repairs, non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate shall be used as an additive as follows: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 14 SUMMARY 16.0 A. Materials Volumes Weights Cement 1.0 1.0 Non-Metallic Aggregate 0.15 0.25 Sand 1.5 1.55 1. For very heavy (generally, formed) patches, pea gravel may be added to mixture and proportions modified as follows: Materials Volumes Weights Cement 1.0 1.0 Non-Metallic Aggregate 0.2 0.33 Sand 1.0 1.0 Pea Gravel 1.5 1.55 B. After hardening, rub lightly as described above for form tie holes. 1. Mortar for patching shall be same mix as above except aggregate shall pass a No. 14 sieve. 2. For all concrete to receive "smooth" finish, remove formwork fins and clean entire surface of grease, form oil, laitance, dust, and other foreign matter. 3. "Smooth" finish shall consist of having all fins removed, joint marks smoothed off, blemishes removed, and surfaces left smooth and unmarred. 4. Begin finishing operations as soon as practicable after removal of forms, continue with curing operations after finishing is completed. After concrete has been well cured, carefully inspect surfaces. Remove any fins, rough spots, streaks, hardened mortar or grout and other foreign material. Patch defects with finishing mortar as specified above, to satisfaction of Designer. C. Patches which become crazed, cracked, or sound hollow upon tapping shall be removed and replaced with new material at Contractor's expense. 17.0 CLEANING A. Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of objectionable stains as determined by the Designer. Materials containing acid in any form or methods which will damage "skin" of concrete surfaces shall not be employed, except where otherwise specified. 18.0 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests and inspections as described in this section and as indicated on the Drawings. B. The Contractor or his Engineer of Record shall carefully inspect falsework and formwork during and after concrete placement operation to determine any abnormal deflection or signs of failure in the work; necessary adjustments shall be made to produce work of the required dimensions. C. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. D. Concrete shall be sampled and tested for quality control during the placement of concrete in accordance with ACI 301-96, as modified by these Contract Documents and as follows: 1. Test specimens in accordance with “method of Test for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders,” ASTM C-39. 2. Concrete shall be sampled at the point of placement for each 50 yards (or portion thereof) of concrete placed. Any placement of concrete for the following shall be sampled: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 01 1000 - 15 SUMMARY a. Footings b. Foundation walls c. Slab-on-grade 3. The following tests shall be made: d. Verify plant batch ticket is in conformance with approved mix design. e. Slump tests shall be in accordance with ASTM C143. f. Air content tests shall be in accordance with ASTM C231. g. Cylinder tests shall be in accordance with ASTM C39. A minimum of 4 cylinders shall be cast. Breaks should be made for 7 days (1), 28 days (2). The fourth cylinder shall be held for 56 days if insufficient results are obtained for the 28 day breaks, otherwise an additional 28 day break shall be made. 4. Evaluation of concrete test results shall be in accordance with ACI 214. 5. When test results indicate that there is a reasonable doubt that the concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, the testing agency shall, at the request of the Owner or Owners representative, conduct tests to determine the strength and other characteristics of the in-place concrete by compression tests on cored cylinders complying with ASTM C-42, or by load as outlined in ACI-318, or such other tests as may be directed or required. If tests show required design strengths have not been met, the cost of all tests and repairs shall be borne by the responsible contractor. If tests confirm design strengths have been met, the cost of all tests and repairs shall be by the Owner. E. During hot or cold weather conditions, the Contractor shall monitor all concrete curing aids and/or protection to ensure proper curing of concrete. F. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 03 3000.10 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (ARCHITECTURAL) SECTION 03 3000.10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (ARCHITECTURAL) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Concrete formwork. B.Concrete for composite floor construction. C.Floors and slabs on grade. D.Concrete foundation walls. E.Concrete foundations and anchor bolts. F.Concrete walkways, ramps and stairs. G.Concrete reinforcement. H.Joint devices associated with concrete work. I.Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads and light pole bases. J.Concrete curing. K.Concrete infill at steel bollards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B.ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009). C.ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016. D.ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (Errata 2007). E.ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000. F.ACI 305R - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting; 2010. G.ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010. H.ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). I.ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2016). J.ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014. K.ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2016. L.ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009 (Reapproved 2015). M.ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2016. N.ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement; 2014. O.ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017. P.ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2012. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 03 3000.10 - 2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (ARCHITECTURAL) Q.ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016. R.ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2016b. S.ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2016a. T.ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2016a. U.ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2015a. V.ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016. W.ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2016. X.ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2016. Y.ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a (Reapproved 2016). Z.ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. AA.ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2014. AB.ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2016. AC.ASTM C579 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes; 2001 (Reapproved 2012). AD.ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2015. AE.ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 2014. AF.ASTM C827/C827M - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures; 2016. AG.ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2014a. AH.ASTM D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2015. AI.ASTM D3963/D3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2015. AJ.ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011. AK.ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011. AL.COE CRD-C 513 - COE Specifications for Rubber Waterstops; 1974. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. C.Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design. 1.Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete Mixtures. 2.Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 - Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing. D.Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 03 3000.10 - 3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (ARCHITECTURAL) E.Samples: Submit two, 12 inch long samples of waterstops and construction joint devices. F.Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified. G.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction. H.Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. I.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. 1.Maintain one copy of each document on site. B.Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C.Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.06 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE WORK. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, THE SPECIFICATIONS ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL PREVAIL FOR ALL STRUCTURAL CONCRETE WORK. 2.02 REFER TO FEDEX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA DATED 01/07/22 FOR ADDITIONAL PRODUCT INFORMATION. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE FEDEX CONCRETE SPECIFICATION, THIS CONCRETE SPECIFICATION AND THE STRUCTURAL DRAWING NOTES SHALL PREVAIL. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE WORK. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, THE SPECIFICATIONS ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL PREVAIL FOR ALL STRUCTURAL WORK. 3.02 REFER TO FEDEX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA DATED 01/07/22 FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION INFORMATION. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE FEDEX CONCRETE SPECIFICATION, THIS CONCRETE SPECIFICATION AND THE STRUCTURAL DRAWING NOTES SHALL PREVAIL. 3.03 EXAMINATION A.Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.04 PREPARATION A.Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B.Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C.Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 03 3000.10 - 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (ARCHITECTURAL) D.Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 1.Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor retarder as indicated on drawings. Do not use sand. 3.05 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A.Fabricate and handle epoxy-coated reinforcing in accordance with ASTM D3963/D3963M. B.Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. C.Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. D.Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A.Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B.Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C.Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D.Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. E.Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. F.Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting. G.Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.07 SLAB JOINTING A.Locate joints as indicated on drawings. B.Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C.Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. 1.Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains. D.Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab. E.Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form, with removable top section for joint sealant. 3.08 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1.Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 2.Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 3.Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. B.Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 03 3000.10 - 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (ARCHITECTURAL) C.Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.09 CONCRETE FINISHING A.Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B.Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C.Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: D.Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1.Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. 3.10 CURING AND PROTECTION A.Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B.Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1.Normal concrete: Not less than seven days. C.Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D.Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1.Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. a.Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously for 4 days. b.Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet. c.Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place. 2.Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a.Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges. b.Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. B.Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C.Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D.Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure compliance with specified requirements. E.Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 50 cubic yards or less of each class of concrete placed. F.Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G.Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C143/C143M. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 03 3000.10 - 6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (ARCHITECTURAL) 3.12 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured. 3.14 WINDOW WELL INSTALLATION A. Window Wells to be installed per manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 1200.01 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING (GENERAL REQUIREMENTS) SECTION 05 1200.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING (GENERAL REQUIREMENTS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Structural steel framing members. B.Column Protectors 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; 2011. B.ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2015. C.AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012. D.AWS B2.1/B2.1M - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification; 2014. E.AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata). F.IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc; 2015. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2.Connections not detailed. 3.Indicate cambers and loads. 4.Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C.Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D.Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis. E.Fabricator Test Reports: Comply with ASTM A1011/A1011M. F.Materials Test Reports: Submit independent test results or engineered performance analysis of structural thermal-break pad performance in bearing or slip-critical connections where shear and moment loads are applied. G.Welders' Qualification Statement: Welders' certificates in accordance with AWS B2.1/B2.1M and dated no more than 12 months before start of scheduled welding work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN) "Steel Construction Manual." B.Maintain one copy of each document on site. C.Welder Qualifications: Welding processes and welding operators qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and no more than 12 months before start of scheduled welding work. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel in accordance with IAS AC172. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 1200.01 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING (GENERAL REQUIREMENTS) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAME WORK. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE STEEL FRAME SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND ATTACHED SPECIFICATION SECTION 05 1200, THE SPECIFICATIONS ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION SECTION 05 1200 SHALL PREVAIL. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Column Protectors: 1. Manufacturer: FS Industries; www.fsindustries.com; Park Sentry Column Protection System. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXECUTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAME WORK. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE STEEL FRAME SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND ATTACHED SPECIFICATION SECTION 05 1200, THE SPECIFICATIONS ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION SECTION 05 1200 SHALL PREVAIL. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 1200 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Structural steel. B. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 050850 – HOT DIP GALVANIZING 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, professional engineer, testing agency. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Shop primers. 4. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality-control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 1200 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" and "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." 4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 5. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members" and "Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members." 6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. B. Verify in the field parts of the existing building that are critical to installation of the structural steel or parts of the existing building in close proximity to structural steel. Make field measurements and confirm that the structural steel shown on the shop drawings can be erected as intended. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992. B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36. D. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Compressive strength: 5,000 psi at 28 days. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 1200 - 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL 1. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 2. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.4 STEEL PRIMERS AND FINISHES A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be field welded, embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 3. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 4. Comply with SSPC-PA 2, "Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with magnetic Gages.” C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Urethane zinc rich primer compatible with topcoat Specified in Section 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING. Provide primer with a VOC content of 340 g/L (2.8 lb/gal.) or less per OTC ozone standards. Provide Tnemec Series 394 or Ameron Series 5105 for exposed steel to be fireproofed, or Tnemec 901K97 or 90-97 or Ameron Series 68HS for exposed steel to be finish painted at 3.0 mils DFT or approved substitute by DuPont or Carboline. D. Galvanizing: For steel exposed to the elements, weather or corrosive environments and other steel indicated to be galvanized, provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the hot-dip process. Comply with ASTM A 123 for fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for hardware. Provide thickness of galvanizing specified in referenced standards. The galvanizing bath shall contain high grade zinc and other earthly materials. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. E. Shop Priming for Galvanized Steel: For steel indicated to be galvanized and primed, provide hot-dip galvanizing and factory-applied polyamide epoxy primer, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry film thickness, certified OTC/VOC compliant less than 2.8 lbs/gal. and conforming to EPA and Commonwealth of Massachusetts requirements. Apply primer within 12 hours after galvanizing at the galvanizer’s plant in a controlled environment meeting applicable environmental regulations and as recommended by the coating manufacturer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 1200 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL F. Shop Priming and Finish for Galvanized Steel: For steel indicated to be galvanized, shop primed and topcoated, provide factory-applied architectural coating over primed galvanized steel as previously referenced. Apply coating at the galvanizer’s plant, in a controlled environment meeting applicable EPA and Commonwealth of Massachusetts regulations. Apply the galvanizing and coating within the same facility and provide single-source responsibility for galvanizing, priming and finish coating. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 1200 - 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Designer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner to engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1 and 780 CMR 1705.5.3.2. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and other inspection procedures at testing agency's option. At least 25% of all field welds must be verified by non-destructive testing. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 5000 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Shop fabricated steel items. B.Repair work at existing steel stair and catwalk. C.Concrete filled Steel Bollards D.Interior Guardrail systems E.Prefabricated ladders and ship ladders. F.Ladder safety systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B.Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs. C.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Paint finish. D.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.29 CFR 1910.23 - Ladders; current edition. B.29 CFR 1910.28 - Duty to have Fall Protection and Falling Object Protection; Current Edition. C.29 CFR 1910.29 - Fall Protection Systems and Falling Object Protection - Criteria and Practices; Current Edition. D.ALI A14.3 - Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements; 2014. E.ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008. F.ANSI/ASSP Z359.16 - Safety Requirements for Climbing Ladder Fall Arrest Systems; 2016. G.ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. H.ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. I.ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. J.ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2013. K.ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2014. L.ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2014. M.ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2015. N.ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a. O.AWS B2.1/B2.1M - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification; 2014. P.AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata). Q.SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004). FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 5000 - 2 METAL FABRICATIONS R.SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004). S.SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets on each ladder safety system product to be used, including installation instructions. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. D.Welders' Qualification Statement: Welders' certificates in accordance with AWS B2.1/B2.1M and dated no more than 12 months before start of scheduled welding work. E.Certificate: Provide documentation that ladder safety system products of this section meet or exceed cited 1, 1, 1, and 1 requirements. F.Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A.Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B.Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing. C.Plates: ASTM A283/A283M. D.Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E.Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, Grade A, plain. F.Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, plain. G.Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. H.Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. I.Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A.Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B.Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C.Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D.Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A.Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime paint finish. B.Bumper Posts and Guard Rails: As detailed; prime paint finish. C.Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish. 1.Size: 6" Diameter, or 8" Diameter, as indicated on the drawings D.Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 5000 - 3 METAL FABRICATIONS E.Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel sections; prime paint finish. 2.04 PREFABRICATED LADDERS A.Prefabricated Ship Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible. 1.Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this section. 2.Materials: Carbon steel; 1, Grade 36, minimum. 3.Incline: 60 degrees. 4.Finish: Powder coat; color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 5.Finish: Manufacturer's standard hot-dipped galvanizing; comply with ASTM A153/A153M. 2.05 LADDER SAFETY SYSTEMS A.Ladder Safety System: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.29, 29 CFR 1926.1053 and Section 7 of ALI A14.3; ladder safety system allows the worker to climb up and down using both hands; does not require the employee continuously, hold, push, or pull any part of the system while climbing. 1. Install on new fixed ladders over 24 feet in height. 2. Anchorage: Fixed ladder meeting requirements of 29 CFR 1910.23. 3. Flexible Carrier: Fixed 3/8 inch diameter stainless steel wire rope lifeline with shock absorber and top, bottom and intermediate supports. a. Provide with stainless steel extension post at top of ladder. 4. Rigid Carrier: Fixed 304 stainless steel U-shaped slotted track with top, bottom and intermediate supports. a. Provide with stainless steel extension post at top of ladder. 5. Fall Arrester: Stainless steel automatic pass-through carrier sleeve fall arrester; compatible with carrier. 6. Manufacturers; Non-ANSI/ASSP Z359.16 compliant: a. Guardian Fall Protection: www.guardianfall.com/#sle. b. Honeywell International, Inc: www.honeywell.com/#sle. c. Sellstrom Manufacturing Company: www.fallprotection.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.06 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete and items to be embedded in masonry. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. F.Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. 2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A.Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B.Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C.Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 5000 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS D.Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E.Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B.Confirm that the ladder structure to which the ladder safety system is installed is capable of withstanding the loads applied by the system in the event of a fall. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B.Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B.Install ladder safety system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C.Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D.Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 5100 - 1 METAL STAIRS SECTION 05 5100 METAL STAIRS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Stairs with metal treads. B.Structural steel stair framing and supports. C.Handrails and guards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AISC 201 - AISC Certification Program for Structural Steel Fabricators, Standard for Steel Building Structures; 2006. B.ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014. C.ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. D.ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. E.ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013. F.ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2014. G.ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2015. H.ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2016. I.ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2015. J.ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a. K.AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012. L.AWS B2.1/B2.1M - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification; 2014. M.AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata). N.IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc; 2015. O.SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004). P.SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 1.Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 5100 - 2 METAL STAIRS 2.Include the design engineer's seal and signature on each sheet of shop drawings. C.Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. D.Design Data, Seismic Performance: Submit documentation that stairs meet performance requirements specified. E.Welders' Qualification Statement: Welders' certificates in accordance with AWS B2.1/B2.1M and dated no more than 12 months before start of scheduled welding work. F.Welders' Certificates. G.Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is certified under AISC 201. H.Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer. B.Welder Qualifications: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FEDEX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA DATED 01/07/22 FOR ADDITIONAL PRODUCT INFORMATION. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE METAL STAIRS SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE FEDEX PIPE AND TUBE RAILING SPECIFICATION, THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL PREVAIL. 2.02 METAL STAIRS - GENERAL A.Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. 1.Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents. 2.Handrails: Comply with applicable accessibility requirements of ADA Standards. 3.Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the applicable local code. 4.Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. 5.Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for transport and access to site. 6.No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch. 7.Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape. B.Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: 1.Architectural: All joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical. a.Welded Joints: Continuously welded and ground smooth and flush. b.Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline; concealed fastenings only. c.Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. d.Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for highest quality gloss finish. 2.Service: Exposed joints tight with face surfaces aligned; underside of stair not covered by soffit is not considered exposed to view. a.Welded Joints: Welded on back side wherever possible. b.Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth; not required to be flush. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 5100 - 3 METAL STAIRS c.Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts or screw threads. d.Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded smooth, suitable for satin or matte finish. C.Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with design and specified quality level. D.Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required. 2.03 METAL STAIRS WITH METAL TREADS A.Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Service, as defined above. B.Risers: Open. C.Treads: Checkered steel plate. 1.Tread Thickness: 1/4 inch, minimum. 2.Nosing: Plate bent to minimum radius with down return of 1 inch. 3.Anchorage to Stringers: Welded or bolted to carrier angles welded or bolted to stringers. D.Stringers: Rolled steel channels. 1.End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends. E.Railings: Steel pipe railings. F.Finish: Shop- or factory-prime painted. 2.04 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS A.Wall-Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. 1.Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum. B.Wall Mounted Handrail Brackets: Julius Blum & Co., Galvanized Cast Iron Brackets Model # 1382., www.juliusblum.com. C.Guards: 1.Top Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated. a.Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum. 2.Infill at Pipe Railings: Pipe or tube rails sloped parallel to stair. a.Outside Diameter: 1 inch. b.Material: Steel pipe or tube, round. c.Vertical Spacing: Maximum 4 inches on center. d.Jointing: Welded and ground smooth and flush. 3.Infill at Mesh Railings: Woven wire mesh panels. a.Material and Finish: Same as stair. b.Wire Size: 0.125 inch. c.Wire Spacing: 2 inch. d.Mounting: Mesh welded to steel bar frame, frame welded to posts. 4.End and Intermediate Posts: Same material and size as top rails. a.Horizontal Spacing: As indicated on drawings. b.Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer. 2.05 MATERIALS A.Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B.Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M or ASTM A501/A501M structural tubing, round and shapes as indicated. C.Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. D.Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: Hot- or cold-rolled, except use cold-rolled where finished work will be exposed to view. 1.Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation CS (commercial steel). 2.Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (commercial steel). FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 05 5100 - 4 METAL STAIRS E.Checkered Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled steel floor plate; manufacturer's standard pattern. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A.Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, and galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components. B.Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. C.Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.07 SHOP FINISHING A.Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B.Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C.Prime Painting: Use specified shop- and touch-up primer. 1.Preparation of Steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. 2.Number of Coats: One. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A.When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B.Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C.Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. D.Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations specified for jointing quality levels. E.Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled. F.After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B.Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 06 1000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Structural dimension lumber framing. B.Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings. C.Subflooring. D.Underlayment. E.Roof-mounted curbs. F.Roofing nailers. G.Preservative treated wood materials. H.Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. I.Communications and electrical room mounting boards. J.Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. K.Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Setting anchors in concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. B.ASTM E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies; 2011. C.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2016. D.ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016. E.AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2016. F.ICC-ES AC310 - Water-resistive Membranes Factory-bonded to Wood-based Structural Sheathing, Used as Water-Resistive Barriers; 2015. G.PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. H.PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010. I.PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.05 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 06 1000 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FEDEX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA DATED 01/07/22 FOR ADDITIONAL PRODUCT INFORMATION. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE ROUGH CARPENTRY SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE FEDEX ROUGH CARPENTRY SPECIFICATION, THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL PREVAIL. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1.If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2.Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A.Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B.Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C.Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ): 1.Grade: No. 2. D.Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ): E.Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1.Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2.Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A.Roof Sheathing: Oriented strand board structural wood panel, PS 2, with factory laminated roofing underlayment layer. 1.Sheathing Panel: a.Grade: Structural 1 Sheathing. b.Size: 4 feet wide by 8 feet long. c.Performance Category: 5/8 PERF CAT. d.Span Rating: 40/20. e.Edge Profile: Square edge. f.Thickness: 5/8" 2.Integral Roofing Underlayment Layer: Medium density, phenolic impregnated kraft paper overlay. 3.Exposure Time: Sheathing undamaged and integral roofing underlayment layer intact after exposure to weather for up to 180 days. 4.Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastener spacing for 16 inches and 24 inches on center. 5.Seam Tape: Manufacturer's standard pressure-sensitive, self-adhering, cold-applied seam tape consisting of polyolefin film with acrylic adhesive. 6.Warranty: Manufacturer's standard 30 year limited system warranty of: a.Performance: Panel and tape resistance to water penetration; tape adhesion. b.Material: Free from manufacturing defects and panel delamination. 7.Manufacturers: a.Huber Engineered Woods, LLC; ZIP System Roof/Wall Sheathing and ZIP System Seam Tape: www.huberwood.com/#sle. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 06 1000 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY B.Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A.Fasteners and Anchors: 1.Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B.Construction Adhesives: 1.Manufacturers: a.Franklin International, Inc; Titebond Fast Set Polyurethane Construction Adhesive: www.titebond.com/#sle. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A.Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1.Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2.Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B.Preservative Treatment: 1.Manufacturers: a.Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com. b.Koppers Performance Chemicals, Inc: www.koppersperformancechemicals.com. c.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. a.Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b.Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c.Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. d.Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FEDEX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA DATED 01/07/22 FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION INFORMATION. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE ROUGH CARPENTRY SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE FEDEX ROUGH CARPENTRY SPECIFICATION, THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL PREVAIL. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.Select material sizes to minimize waste. B.Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C.Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 06 1000 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A.Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B.In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C.In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. D.In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E.Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. F.Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking: 1.Cabinets and shelf supports. 2.Wall brackets. 3.Handrails. 4.Grab bars. 5.Towel and bath accessories. 6.Wall-mounted door stops. 7.Wall paneling and trim. 8.Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A.Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B.Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A.Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted. B.Underlayment: Secure to subflooring with nails and glue. 1.At locations where resilient flooring or carpet tiles will be installed, fill and sand splits, gaps, and rough areas. 2.Place building paper between floor underlayment and subflooring. C.Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples. D.Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1.At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2.Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3.Install adjacent boards without gaps. 4.Size: 48 by 96 inches, installed horizontally at ceiling height. 3.07 TOLERANCES A.Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B.Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 06 1000 - 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY C.Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 06 2000 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Finish carpentry items. B.Custom work counters and casework - Refer to FedEx Specifications Section 06 2023 Interior Finish Carpentry. C.Storage Room Shelving - Refer to FedEx Specifications Section 06 2023 Interior Finish Carpentry. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Painting of finish carpentry items. C.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Painting of finish carpentry items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014. B.AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.0; 2016. C.NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. D.PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. B.Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: 1.Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. D.Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 12 inch long. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect work from moisture damage. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 06 2000 - 2 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FEDEX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA DATED 01/07/22 FOR ADDITIONAL PRODUCT INFORMATION. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE FINISH CARPENTRY SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE FEDEX INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY SPECIFICATION, THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL PREVAIL. 2.02 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A.Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. B.Interior Woodwork Items: 1.Counters and Casework 2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS A.Hardwood Lumber: White Oak - Reclaimed Wood species, plain sawn, S4S, maximum moisture content of 6 percent. 2.04 SHEET MATERIALS A.Softwood Plywood, Not Exposed to View: Any face species, veneer core; PS 1 Grade A-B, glue type as recommended for application. B.Softwood Plywood, Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, veneer core; PS 1 Grade A-B, glue type as recommended for application. C.Hardwood Plywood: For paint finish; Face species - Poplar, plain sawn, book matched, veneer core; HPVA HP-1, Front Face Grade A, Back Face Grade 2, glue type as recommended for application. 2.05 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A.Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3; color as selected by Architect. 1.Products: a.Wilsonart - Refer to FedEx Specification for Laminate Specifications 2.06 FASTENINGS A.Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. B.Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; stainless steel finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations. C.Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A.Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of Poplar or Pine species. B.Primer: as specified in Section 09 9000. C.Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.08 FABRICATION A.Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B.Fit exposed sheet material edges with matching hardwood edging - size as indicated on the drawings. Use one piece for full length only. C.Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. D.When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 06 2000 - 3 FINISH CARPENTRY E.Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 2.09 SHOP FINISHING A.Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. B.Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. C.Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FEDEX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA DATED 01/07/22 FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION INFORMATION. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE FINISH CARPENTRY SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE FEDEX INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY SPECIFICATION, THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL PREVAIL. 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B.Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade indicated. B.Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C.Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. D.Securely anchor reclaimed beam together and to concrete floor slab at a minimum of 24" on center and at each edge/corner. 3.04 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A.Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B.Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.05 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B.Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 07 8400 - 1 FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Firestopping systems. B.Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Cutting and patching. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2016a. B.ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a. C.ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved 2011). D.ASTM E2174 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Firestops; 2014b. E.ASTM E2393 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers; 2010a (Reapproved 2015). F.ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barriers Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus; 2015b. G.ASTM E2837 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Resistance of Continuity Head-of-Wall Joint Systems Installed Between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated Horizontal Assemblies; 2013. H.ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 2015. I.ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. J.FM 4991 - Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors; 2013. K.FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition. L.SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition. M.UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N.UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. P.UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. C.Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F.Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. G.Manufacturer's qualification statement. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 07 8400 - 2 FIRESTOPPING H.Installer's qualification statement. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1.Listing in UL (FRD), FM (AG), or ITS (DIR) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1.06 MOCK-UP A.Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project. 1.Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions, install one assembly for each different combination. B.If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for this work. C.If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of this work. Remove and replace mock-ups not accepted. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days after installation of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Firestopping Manufacturers: 1.A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com/#sle. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Manufacturers: 1.A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.: www.adfire.com. 2.Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com. B.Firestopping Materials: Any materials meeting requirements. C.Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of materials as required for tested firestopping assembly. 2.03 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS A.Perimeter Fire Containment Firestopping: Use system that has been tested according to ASTM E2307 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of floor assembly. 1. Movement: Provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. 2. Temperature Rise: Provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating as indicated. 3. Air Leakage: Provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. 4. Where floor assembly is not required to have a fire rating, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. B. Head-of-Wall (HW) Joint System Firestopping at Joints Between Fire-Rated Wall Assemblies and Non-Rated Horizontal Assemblies: Use system that has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of wall assembly. 1. Movement: Provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. C. Floor-to-Floor (FF), Floor-to-Wall (FW), Head-of-Wall (HW), and Wall-to-Wall (WW) Joints, Except Perimeter, Where Both Are Fire-Rated: Use system that has been tested according to FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 07 8400 - 3 FIRESTOPPING ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the assembly in which the joint occurs. 1. Movement: Provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. 2. Air Leakage: Provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. 3. Watertightness: Provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as indicated. 4. Listing by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or UL (FRD) in their certification directories will be considered evidence of successful testing. D. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use system that has been tested according to ASTM E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly. 1.Temperature Rise: Provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating as indicated. 2.Air Leakage: Provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. 3.Watertightness: Provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as indicated. 4.Listing by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or UL (FRD) in their certification directories will be considered evidence of successful testing. 2.04 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A.Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1.Fire Ratings: See drawings for required systems and ratings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B.Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B.Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. C.Install labeling required by code. 3.04 CLEANING A.Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.05 PROTECTION A.Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 07 9200 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B.Self-leveling pourable joint sealants. C.Joint backings and accessories. 1.Joint and backings restoration at existing precast exterior panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Setting exterior door thresholds in sealant. B.Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. C.Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings. D.Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Sealant between tile and plumbing fixtures and at junctions with other materials and changes in plane. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer; 2015. B.ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2014. C.ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014a. D.ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. E.ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). F.ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-Applied Sealants; 2002 (Reapproved 2013). G.ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2015. H.SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be used, that includes the following. 1.Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and color availability. 2.List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product. 3.Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 4.Substrates the product should not be used on. 5.Substrates for which use of primer is required. 6.Installation instructions, including precautions, limitations, and recommended backing materials and tools. 7.Sample product warranty. C.Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each product to be used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and recommended tools. D.Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color cards showing standard colors available for selection. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 07 9200 - 2 JOINT SEALANTS 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C.Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve watertight seal , exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FEDEX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA DATED 01/07/22 FOR ADDITIONAL PRODUCT INFORMATION. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE JOINT SEALANTS SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE FEDEX JOINT SEALANTS SPECIFICATION, THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL PREVAIL. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A.Non-Sag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or slumping. 1.Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 2.Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 3.Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Self-Leveling Sealants: Pourable or self-leveling sealant that has sufficient flow to form a smooth, level surface when applied in a horizontal joint. 1.Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. 2.W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com/sle. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A.Scope: 1.Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on drawings, unless specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a.Wall expansion and control joints. b.Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. c.Joints between different exposed materials. d.Openings below ledge angles in masonry. e.Other joints indicated below. 2.Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a.Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. b.Other joints indicated below. 3.Do not seal the following types of joints. a.Intentional weepholes in masonry. b.Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other type of sealing device. c.Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed. d.Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section. e.Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls. B.Exterior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, Type 2, unless otherwise indicated. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 07 9200 - 3 JOINT SEALANTS 1.Control and Expansion Joints in Concrete Paving: Self-leveling polyurethane "traffic-grade" sealant; Type 4. C.Interior Joints: Use non-sag polyurethane sealant, Type 2 or 3, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Joints between Fixtures in Wet Areas and Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant; white; Type 1. D.Interior Wet Areas: Bathrooms, restrooms, and kitchens; fixtures in wet areas include plumbing fixtures, countertops, cabinets, and other similar items. E.Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as "STC-rated", "sound-rated", or "acoustical". 2.04 JOINT SEALANTS - GENERAL A.Sealants and Primers: Provide products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than indicated in SCAQMD 1168. B.Colors: As indicated on drawings. 2.05 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A.Type 1 - Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1.Color: Selected by Architect. 2.Manufacturers: a.Pecora Corporation; 898 NST: www.pecora.com. b.Sika Corporation; Sikasil GP: www.usa-sika.com/#sle. c.Tremco Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing: Tremsil 200. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Type 2 - Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; multi-component; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1.Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2.Hardness Range: 20 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4.Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F. 5.Manufacturers: a.Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II: www.pecora.com. b.W. R. Meadows, Inc; POURTHANE NS: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. c.Tremco Global Sealants: Dymeric 240FC: www.tremcosealants.com. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C.Type 3 - Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single-component; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1.Hardness Range: 20 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 2.Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 3.Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 degrees F. 4.Manufacturers: a.Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL: www.pecora.com. b.Tremco Global Sealants: Dymonic 100: www.tremcosealants.com. c.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.06 SELF-LEVELING SEALANTS A.Type 4 - Semi-Rigid Self-Leveling Epoxy Joint Filler: Epoxy or epoxy/polyurethane copolymer; intended for filling cracks and control joints not subject to significant movement; rigid enough to support concrete edges under traffic. 1.Composition: Multi-component, 100 percent solids by weight. 2.Durometer Hardness: Minimum of 85 for Type A or 35 for Type D, after seven days when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240. 3.Color: Concrete gray. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 07 9200 - 4 JOINT SEALANTS 4.Joint Width, Minimum: 1/8 inch. 5.Joint Width, Maximum: 1/4 inch. 6.Joint Depth: Provide product suitable for joints from 1/8 inch to 2 inches in depth including space for backer rod. 7.Manufacturers: a.Dayton Superior Corporation; Pro-Poxy P606: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. b.Nox-Crete; DynaFlex 502: www.nox-crete.com/#sle. c.W.R. Meadows, Inc; Rezi-Weld Flex: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A.Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to, compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specific application. 1.Type for Joints Not Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type O - Open Cell Polyurethane. 2.Type for Joints Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type B - Bi-Cellular Polyethylene. 3.Open Cell: 40 to 50 percent larger in diameter than joint width. 4.Closed Cell and Bi-Cellular: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width. 5.Manufacturers: a.Nomaco, Inc; HBR: www.nomaco.com/#sle. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application. C.Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, non-staining, removable without adhesive residue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants. D.Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; non-staining. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FEDEX GROUND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA DATED 01/07/22 FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION INFORMATION. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE ARE INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE JOINT SEALANTS SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE FEDEX JOINT SEALANTS SPECIFICATION, THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL PREVAIL. 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B.Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C.Verify that backer rods are of the correct size. 3.03 PREPARATION A.Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B.Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C.Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D.Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable. 3.04 INSTALLATION A.Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B.Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 07 9200 - 5 JOINT SEALANTS C.Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1.Width/depth ratio of 2:1. 2.Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. 3.Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width. D.Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. E.Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. F.Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. G.Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface. H.Concrete Floor Joint Filler: After full cure, shave joint filler flush with top of concrete slab. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Perform field quality control inspection/testing as specified in PART 1 under QUALITY ASSURANCE article. B.Remove and replace failed portions of sealants using same materials and procedures as indicated for original installation. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. B.Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. C.Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames. D.Hollow metal borrowed lites glazing frames. E.Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B.Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field painting. D.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B.ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011. C.ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014. D.ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011. E.ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015. F.ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2016. G.ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2015. H.BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2014. I.ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009. J.ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. K.NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002. L.NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011. M.NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2007. N.NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016. O.NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012. P.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. Q.UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 1113 - 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced standards/guidelines. C.Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any indicated finish requirements. D.Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. E.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years documented experience. B.Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements. B.Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify existing conditions before starting work. B.Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C.Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated. B.Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C.Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D.Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100. E.Comply with glazing installation requirements of Section 08 8000. 3.03 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.04 ADJUSTING A.Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 3100 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS SECTION 08 3100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Wall and ceiling access door and frame units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field paint finish. B.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of each access door and/or panel unit. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ASSEMBLIES A.Wall-Mounted Units: 1.Material: Steel. 2.Size: 12 inch by 12 inch. 3.Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle. 4.Wall Mounting Criteria: Provide surface-mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface. 5.Gypsum Board Mounting Criteria: Provide drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface. 6.Plaster Mounting Criteria: Provide drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface. B.Wall-Mounted Units in Wet Areas: 1.Material: Steel, hot-dipped zinc, or zinc-aluminum-alloy coated. 2.Size: 12 inch by 12 inch. 3.Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle. 4.Wall Mounting Criteria: Provide surface-mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface. 5.Gypsum Board Mounting Criteria: Provide drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface. 6.Plaster Mounting Criteria: Provide drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface. C.Fire-Rated Wall-Mounted Units: 1.Wall Fire-Rating: As indicated on drawings. 2.Material: Steel. 3.Size: 12 inch by 12 inch. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 3100 - 2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 4.Door/Panel: Insulated double-surface panel, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle. D.Ceiling-Mounted Units: 1.Material: Steel. 2.Size - Lay-In Grid Ceilings: To match module of ceiling grid. 3.Size - Other Ceilings: 12 inch by 12 inch. 4.Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle. 2.02 WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED UNITS A.Manufacturers: 1.Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com. 2.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Wall and Ceiling Mounted Units: Factory fabricated door and frame, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with type of installation assembly being used for each unit. 1.Style: Exposed frame with door surface flush with frame surface. a.Gypsum Board Mounting Criteria: Use drywall bead type frame. b.Plaster Mounting Criteria: Use plaster bead type frame. 2.Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 3.Frames: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch, minimum thickness. 4.Heavy Duty Frames: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch, minimum thickness. 5.Single Steel Sheet Door Panels: 1/16 inch, minimum thickness. 6.Heavy Duty Single Steel Sheet Door Panels: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch, minimum thickness. 7.Insulation: Non-combustible mineral wool or glass fiber. 8.Units in Fire-Rated Assemblies: Fire rating as required by applicable code for fire-rated assembly that access doors are being installed. 9.Steel Finish: Primed. 10.Primed and Factory Finish: Polyester powder coat; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 11.Hardware: a.Hardware for Fire-Rated Units: As required for listing. b.Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. c.Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch. d.Gasketing: Extruded neoprene, around perimeter of door panel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. B.Begin installation only after substrates have been properly prepared, and if the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to proceeding with this work. B.Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for applicable substrates in accordance with project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place. C.Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 3323.13 - 1 OVERHEAD RAPID COILING DOORS SECTION 08 3323.13 OVERHEAD RAPID COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Overhead high-speed coiling doors, operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction. B.Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinder cores and keys. C.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field paint finish. D.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field paint finish. E.Division 26 0000 - Wiring Connections and Conduit 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition. B.NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts; 2000 (R2005), with errata, 2008. C.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. E.UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide general construction, electrical equipment, and component connections and details. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedure details, and adjustment and alignment instructions. E.Manufacturer's qualification statement. F.Installer's qualification statement. G.Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with at least three years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B.Manufacturer Warranty: Provide two-year manufacturer warranty for standard metal door panel slats, rollers, hinges, and door tracks. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 3323.13 - 2 OVERHEAD RAPID COILING DOORS C.Manufacturer Warranty: Provide seven-year manufacturer warranty for polycarbonate vision panes against breaks, coating failure, excessive increased haze, excessive yellowing, or loss of light transmission. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. D.Manufacturer Warranty: Provide five-year manufacturer warranty for three-ply multifilament polyester fabric curtain. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. E.Manufacturer Warranty: Provide five-year manufacturer warranty for motor and gearbox. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. F.Manufacturer Warranty: Provide two-year manufacturer warranty for other mechanical and electrical components. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. G.Manufacturer Warranty: Provide lifetime manufacturer warranty for counterweights and tension springs. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 08 3001 RAPID ROLL DOOR FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 08 3001 RAPID ROLL DOOR FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building structure without distortion or stress. C.Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D.Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E.Coordinate installation of electrical service with Division 26 0000. F.Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. G.Complete wiring from fire alarm system. H.Install enclosure and perimeter trim. 3.04 TOLERANCES A.Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B.Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C.Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D.Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 feet straight edge. 3.05 ADJUSTING A.Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.06 CLEANING A.Clean installed components. B.Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 3613 - 1 SECTIONAL DOORS SECTION 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Overhead sectional doors, electrically operated. B.Operating hardware and supports. C.Electrical controls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction. B.Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Lock cylinders. C.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Finish painting. D.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Finish painting. E.Division 26 000 - Wiring Connections and Conduit. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. C.Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project conditions. E.Manufacturer's Qualification Statement. F.Installer's Qualification Statement. G.Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting. H.Maintenance Data: Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare part sources. I.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years documented experience. C.Comply with applicable code for motor and motor control requirements. D.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or testing firm acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, as suitable for purpose specified. 1.05 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for warranty requirements. B.Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C.Warranty: Include coverage for electric motor and transmission. D.Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric operating equipment. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 3613 - 2 SECTIONAL DOORS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 08 3800 SECTIONAL DOORS FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 08 3800 SECTIONAL DOORS FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits. B.Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.03 PREPARATION A.Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal. B.Apply primer to wood frame. 3.04 INSTALLATION A.Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C.Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. D.Fit and align door assembly including hardware. E.Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to unit components. F.Install perimeter trim. 3.05 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. B.Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. C.Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. D.Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 3.06 ADJUSTING A.Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping. B.Have manufacturer's field representative present to confirm proper operation and identify adjustments to door assembly for specified operation. 3.07 CLEANING A.Clean doors and frames and glazing. B.Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 3.08 PROTECTION A.Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. B.Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 4313 - 1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS SECTION 08 4313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. B.Aluminum doors. C.Weatherstripping. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. B.Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015. B.AAMA 503 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems; 2014. C.AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum (Combined Document); 2015. D.AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2013. E.AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2013. F.ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. G.ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013. H.ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). I.ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014. J.ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016). K.ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2015. L.FLA (PAD) - Florida Building Code Online - Product Approval Directory; database at www.floridabuilding.org. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 4313 - 2 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS C.Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D.Samples: Submit two samples 2 x 2 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, glass, glazing materials. E.Field Quality Control Submittals: Report of field testing for water penetration and air leakage. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B.Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C.Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D.Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 08 4313 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B.Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C.Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D.Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E.Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F.Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 4313 - 3 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS G.Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H.Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I.Install hardware using templates provided. 1.See Section 08 7100 for hardware installation requirements. J.Install glass in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. K.Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inch per 3 feet non-cumulative or 0.06 inch per 10 feet, whichever is less. B.Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A.Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A.Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B.Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths, and take care to remove dirt from corners and to wipe surfaces clean. C.Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609 & 610. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Hardware for wood, aluminum, and hollow metal doors. B.Thresholds. C.Weatherstripping and gasketing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 08 0671 - Door Hardware Schedule: Schedule of door hardware sets. B.Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. C.Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Door hardware, except as noted in section. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B.BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2013. C.BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; 2011. D.BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; 2014. E.BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; 2013. F.BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2010. G.BHMA A156.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; 2014. H.BHMA A156.16 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2013. I.BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; 2012. J.BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; 2014. K.BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems, Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012. L.BHMA A156.28 - American National Standard for Recommended Practices for Mechanical Keying Systems; 2013. M.DHI (H&S) - Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule; 1996. N.DHI (KSN) - Keying Systems and Nomenclature; 1989. O.ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009. P.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware is installed on. B.Keying Requirements Meeting: 1.Attendance Required: a.Contractor. b.Owner. c.Architect. d.Tenant. 2.Agenda: 3.Incorporate "Keying Requirements Meeting" decisions into keying submittal upon review of door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 7100 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE a.Access control requirements. b.Key control system requirements. c.Schematic diagram of preliminary key system. d.Flow of traffic and extent of security required. 4.Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 5.Deliver established keying requirements to manufacturers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly show products to be furnished for this project, and includes construction details, material descriptions, finishes, and dimensions and profiles of individual components. C.Shop Drawings - Door Hardware Schedule: Submit detailed listing that includes each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in Contract Documents. 1.Prepared by or under supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2.Comply with DHI (H&S) using door numbers and hardware set numbers as indicated in construction documents. a.Submit in vertical format, refer to Section 08 0671. 3.List groups and suffixes in proper sequence. 4.Provide complete description for each door listed. 5.Provide manufacturer's and product names, and catalog numbers; include functions, types, styles, sizes and finishes of each item. 6.Include account of abbreviations and symbols used in schedule. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E.Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. 2.Bitting List: List of combinations as furnished. F.Keying Schedule: 1.Submit three (3) copies of Keying Schedule in compliance with requirements established during Keying Requirements Meeting unless otherwise indicated. G.Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. H.Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit. I.Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2.Lock Cylinders: Ten for each master keyed group. 3.Tools: One set of each special wrench or tool applicable for each different or special hardware component, whether supplied by hardware component manufacturer or not. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified for commercial door hardware with at least three years of documented experience. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 7100 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match door hardware schedule. 1.08 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Warranty against defects in material and workmanship for period indicated, from Date of Substantial Completion. 1.Closers: Five years, minimum. 2.Exit Devices: Three years, minimum. 3.Locksets and Cylinders: Three years, minimum. 4.Other Hardware: Two years, minimum. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION AND DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A.Provide specified door hardware as required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to extent indicated. B.Provide individual items of single type, of same model, and by same manufacturer. C.Provide door hardware products that comply with the following requirements: 1.Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2.Accessibility: ADA Standards and ICC A117.1. 3.Hardware Preparation for Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames: BHMA A156.115W. D.Lock Function: Provide lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufacturer's series. Refer to Section 08 0671 for listing of hardware sets. E.Fasteners: 1.Provide fasteners of proper type, size, quantity, and finish that comply with commercially recognized standards for proposed applications. a.Aluminum fasteners are not permitted. b.Provide phillips flat-head screws with heads finished to match door surface hardware unless otherwise indicated. 2.Provide machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal and aluminum frames. a.Self-drilling (Tek) type screws are not permitted. 3.Provide stainless steel machine screws and lead expansion shields for concrete and masonry substrates. 2.03 FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX A.Manufacturers: 1.Knox Company; Knox-Box Rapid Entry System: www.knoxbox.com. B.Fire Department Lock Box: 1.Capacity: Holds 10 keys. 2.Finish: Manufacturer's standard dark bronze. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive this work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 7100 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE B.Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C.Door Hardware Mounting Heights: Distance from finished floor to center line of hardware item. As indicated in following list; unless noted otherwise in Door Hardware Schedule or on drawings. 1.Mounting heights in compliance with ADA Standards: a.Locksets: 40-5/16 inch. b.Push Plates/Pull Bars: 42 inch. c.Deadlocks (Deadbolts): 48 inch. d.Exit Devices: 40-5/16 inch. e.Door Viewer: 43 inch; standard height 60 inch. D.Set exterior door thresholds with full-width bead of elastomeric sealant at each point of contact with floor providing a continuous weather seal; anchor thresholds with stainless steel countersunk screws. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. 3.04 ADJUSTING A.Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. B.Adjust hardware for smooth operation. C.Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete seal. 3.05 CLEANING A.Clean finished hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after final adjustments have been made. B.Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C.Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost. D.See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional requirements. 3.06 PROTECTION A.Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. B.Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 8000 - 1 GLAZING SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Insulating glass units. B.Glazing units. C.Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished as part of storefront assembly. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B.ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015. C.ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2015). D.ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014a. E.ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. F.ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. G.ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014. H.ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016. I.ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass; 2015. J.ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016. K.ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes; 2014a. L.ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. M.GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008. N.NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2014. O.NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014. P.NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Systems; 2014. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit and Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. C.Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available colors. D.Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass units. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 8000 - 2 GLAZING E.Samples: Submit 12 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. F.Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. G.Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years documented experience. C.Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B.Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.07 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units. C.Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for delamination, including providing products to replace failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Glass Fabricators: 1.Viracon, Inc: www.viracon.com. 2.Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A.Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, and to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass. 1.Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions, and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass. 2.Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load. 3.Glass thicknesses listed are minimum. B.Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier. 1.In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. C.Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide exterior glazing products with performance properties as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's published data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods: 1.Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 2.Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 3.Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 8000 - 3 GLAZING 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A.Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless otherwise indicated. 1.Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality - Q3. 2.Kind HS - Heat-Strengthened Type: Complies with ASTM C1048. 3.Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR 1201 criteria for safety glazing used in hazardous locations. 4.Thicknesses: As indicated; provide greater thickness as required for exterior glazing wind load design. B.Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. 1.Laminated Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 - Class B or 16 CFR 1201 - Category I impact test requirements. 2.04 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A.Manufacturers: 1.Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 2.Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1.Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 2.Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated vision glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS. 3.Warm-Edge Spacers: _____. a.Spacer Width: As required for specified insulating glass unit. b.Spacer Height: 0.27 inch. c.Manufacturers: 1)Technoform Glass Insulation; TGI-Spacer: www.glassinsulation.us/#sle. 4.Spacer Color: Black. 5.Edge Seal: a.Dual-Sealed System: Provide polyisobutylene sealant as primary seal applied between spacer and glass panes, and silicone, polysulfide, or polyurethane sealant as secondary seal applied around perimeter. 6.Color: Black. 7.Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed. C.Type IG-1 - Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed. 1.Applications: Exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2.Space between lites filled with air. 3.Outboard Lite: Heat Strengthened, provide Laminated safety glass where required by Code, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a.Tint: Clear. b.Coating: Low-E (passive type), on #2 surface. 4.Inboard Lite: Heat Strengthened, provide Laminated safety glass where required by Code float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a.Tint: Clear. 5.Total Thickness: 1 inch. 2.05 GLAZING UNITS A.Type L-G-1 - Laminated Glass (1/4" Thick) 1.Applications: As indicated on the drawings. 2.Glass Type: Laminated float glass. 3.Tint: Clear. 4.Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal. 5.Outer Lite: 1/8 inch heat strengthened FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 8000 - 4 GLAZING 6.Interlayer: 0.30" Clear PVB Interlayer 7.Inner Lite: 1/8 inch heat strengthened 8.Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing. B.Type L-G-2 - Laminated Glass (1/2" Thick) 1.Applications: As indicated on the drawings. 2.Glass Type: Laminated float glass. 3.Tint: Clear. 4.Thickness: 1/2 inch, nominal. 5.Outer Lite: 1/4 inch heat strengthened 6.Interlayer: 0.30" Clear PVB Interlayer 7.Inner Lite: 1/4 inch heat strengthened 8.Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing. C.Type T-G - Monolithic Interior Vision Glazing: 1.Applications: As indicated on the drawings. 2.Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass. 3.Tint: Clear. 4.Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal. 5.Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing. 2.06 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A.Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A, Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color. B.Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 20 to 35; color as selected. C.Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color as selected. D.Manufacturers: 1.Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2.Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com/construction. 3.Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4.BASF Corporation: www.basf.com/us/en.html. 5.Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A.Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch by height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B.Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Minimum 3 inch long by one half the height of the glazing stop by thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C.Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids compound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; 5 to 30 cured Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. D.Glazing Splines: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option II; color black. E.Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 8000 - 5 GLAZING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A.Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. B.Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided. C.Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system. D.Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively. E.Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B.Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C.Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's instructions. B.Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated. C.Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing, plastering, mortar droppings, etc. 3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A.Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the interior of the building. B.Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C.Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. D.Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B.Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. C.Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.06 CLEANING A.Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. B.Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. C.Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. D.Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 8000 - 6 GLAZING 3.07 PROTECTION A.After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. B.Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 9100 - 1 LOUVERS SECTION 08 9100 LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Louvers, frames, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Prepared exterior wall opening. B.Section 23 0000 - Heating Ventilating and Air Condtioning 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata). B.AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2015. C.AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2013. D.AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2012. E.AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; 2010. F.ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. G.ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2014. H.ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014. I.ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013. J.ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air velocity, design free area, materials and finishes. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. D.Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior and interior surfaces. E.Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance criteria. F.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G.Maintenance Data: Include lubrication schedules, adjustment requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 9100 - 2 LOUVERS B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide five year manufacturer's warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and connection failures of louver components. 1.Finish: Include twenty year coverage against degradation of exterior finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Louvers: 1.Airline Louvers: www.airlinelouvers.com/sle. 2.Airolite Company, LLC: www.airolite.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 LOUVERS A.Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories; AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511. 1.Wind Load Resistance: Design to resist positive and negative wind load of 25 psf without damage or permanent deformation. 2.Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft water penetration at calculated intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 3.Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter recessed into both jambs of frame. 4.Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers. 5.Hinged Units: Provide secondary frame to which louver frame is attached; non-ferrous hinges; provide at ______. B.Stationary Louvers: Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction, with intermediate mullions matching frame. 1.Free Area: As required by Mechanical Equipment 2.Blades: Straight. 3.Frame: 4 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and, with continuous recessed caulking channel each side. 4.Aluminum Thickness: Frame 12 gage, 0.0808 inch minimum; blades 12 gage, 0.0808 inch minimum. 5.Aluminum Finish: High performance organic coatings; finish welded units after fabrication. 2.03 MATERIALS A.Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). 2.04 FINISHES A.High Performance Organic Coatings: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured fluoropolymer system. B.Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A.Blank-Off Panels: Same material as louver, painted black on exterior side; provide where duct connected to louver is smaller than louver frame, sealing off louver area outside duct. B.Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw attached;installed on inside face of louver frame. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 08 9100 - 3 LOUVERS C.Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 14 gage, 0.0641 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave, diagonal design. D.Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh. E.Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel. F.Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one piece per location. G.Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive this work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install louvers level and plumb. C.Set sill members and sill flashing in continuous bead of sealant. D.Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. E.Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. F.Coordinate with installation of mechanical ductwork. 3.03 ADJUSTING A.Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement of control mechanism. Lubricate operating joints. 3.04 CLEANING A.Strip protective finish coverings. B.Clean surfaces and components. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 2116 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B.Metal stud wall framing. C.Metal channel ceiling framing. D.Acoustic insulation. E.Cementitious backing board. F.Gypsum wallboard. G.Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. B.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. C.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls. D.Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsum board or plaster work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2015. B.ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014. C.ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2017. D.ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2016. E.ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2015. F.ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2016. G.ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2014a. H.ASTM C1288 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior Substrate Sheets; 2014. I.ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014a. J.ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016. K.ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016). L.ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016. M.GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2016. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 2116 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES C.Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. D.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. E.Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing, with minimum 5 years of experience. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA): www.ssma.com/#sle. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTIONS 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING AND 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD FOR ADDITIONAL PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A.Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1.See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B.Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1.Acoustic Attenuation: STC as indicated calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. 2.03 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A.Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1.Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 2.Marino: www.marinoware.com. 3.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 4000. C.Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf. 1.Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 2.Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3.Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. 4.Resilient Furring Channels: Single or double leg configuration; 1/2 inch channel depth. a.Products: 1)Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D.Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as indicated on drawings. E.Non-Loadbearing Framing Accessories: 1.Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. 2.Partial Height Wall Framing Support: Provides stud reinforcement and anchored connection to floor. 2.04 BOARD MATERIALS A.Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1.CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 2116 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. 3.National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 4.USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 5.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B.Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1.Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2.At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 3.Thickness: a.Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch, or as indicated on the drawings. b.Ceilings: 1/2 inch or as indicated on the drawings. c.Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. 4.Paper-Faced Products: a.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Board. b.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond BRAND Fire-Shield Type X Gypsum Board. c.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Type C Gypsum Board. d.USG Sheetrock Gypsum Panels e.USG Sheetrock FireCode Type X Gypsum Panels f.USG Sheetrock FireCode Type C Gypsum Panels g.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 5.Mold Resistant Paper Faced Products: a.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 6.Glass Mat Faced Products: a.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Interior Extreme Gypsum Panel. b.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Fire-Shield Interior Extreme Gypsum Panel. c.USG Corporation; USG Sheetrock Brand Glass-Mat Panels Mold Tough. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C.Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products: 1.Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and shower ceilings. 2.Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3.ASTM Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based, cementitious board complying with ASTM C1288. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products: 1) James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 4. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated. 5. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 6. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch. 7. Edges: Tapered. 8. Products: a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 2116 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.05 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness as indicated on the drawings. B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant. C. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic, galvanized steel, or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise. 1. Corner Beads: Low profile, for 90 degree outside corners. a. Products: 1) Trim-Tex, Inc: www.trim-tex.com. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Fiberglass Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Joint Compound: Setting type, field-mixed. E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion resistant. F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTIONS 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING AND 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. 2. Laterally brace entire suspension system. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. E. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members. 3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 2116 - 5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where firestopping is provided. 3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board perpendicular to framing, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Use glass mat faced gypsum board at exterior walls and at other locations as indicated. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. D. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-resistant sealant. E. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over wood framing members where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and manufacturer's instructions. F. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board. G. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows: 1. Single-Layer Applications: Screw attachment. 2. Double-Layer Application: Install base layer using screws. Install face layer using screws. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. 3.07 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings in all areas. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish. D. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 3000 - 1 TILING SECTION 09 3000 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Tile for floor applications. B.Tile for wall applications. C.Stone thresholds. D.Non-ceramic accessories E.Ceramic accessories. F.Ceramic trim. G.Non-ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction and fixtures. B.Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backer board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014. B.ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). C.ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). D.ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised). E.ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). F.ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). G.ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). H.ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). I.ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). J.ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016). K.ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010). L.ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed 2010). M.ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012 (Revised). FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 3000 - 2 TILING N.ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2010 (Revised). O.ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installation; 2014. P.ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2014. Q.ANSI A118.15 - American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012. R.ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2013.1. S.ASTM C373 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products, Ceramic Tiles, and Glass Tiles; 2014a. T.TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2016. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C.Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. D.Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal methods. E.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2.Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of five years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. B.Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 09 3013 CERAMIC TILE FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 09 3013 CERAMIC TILE FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 3000 - 3 TILING B.Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C.Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. D.Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E.Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.03 PREPARATION A.Protect surrounding work from damage. B.Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C.Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D.Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. 3.04 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations. B.Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C.Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D.Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E.Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F.Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G.Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H.Install thresholds where indicated. I.Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. J.Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive. K.Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. L.Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. M.At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding. 3.05 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A.Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated. 2.Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F122, with latex-Portland cement grout. B.Over wood substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F142, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. C.Over wood substrate with backer board underlayment, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F144, for cementitious backer boards, with standard grout. D.Install tile-to-tile floor movement joints in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method EJ171F. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 3000 - 4 TILING 3.06 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS A.At bathtub and shower walls install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B412, over cementitious backer units with waterproofing membrane. B.Grout with standard grout as specified above. 3.07 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A.Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms. 3.08 CLEANING A.Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.09 PROTECTION A.Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 5100 - 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B.Acoustical units. C.Alterations to existing Acoustic Tile Ceilings - Including Replacement Tiles to Match Existing 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a. B.ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B.Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning. C.Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. D.Samples: Submit two samples ____by____ inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. F.Manufacturer's Qualification Statement. G.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Designer Qualifications for Seismic Design: Perform under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located. B.Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C.Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. 1.Replacement Tiles to match existing in ceiling to remain being altered or repaired. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 5100 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify existing conditions before starting work. B.Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.03 PREPARATION A.Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. B.Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 3.04 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. B.Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. C.Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. D.Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. E.Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. F.Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. G.Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. H.Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1.Install in bed of acoustical sealant. 2.Use longest practical lengths. 3.Overlap and rivet corners. I.Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixtures in accordance with fire rated assembly requirements and light fixture ventilation requirements. 3.05 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C.Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D.Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E.Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F.Cutting Acoustical Units: 1.Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3.06 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B.Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 5100 - 3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 6500 - 1 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Resilient tile flooring. B.Resilient base. C.Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. B.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry - Underlayment 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM D2047 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine; 2011. B.ASTM E662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials; 2015a. C.ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015. D.ASTM F386 - Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces; 2011. E.ASTM F925 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring; 2013. F.ASTM F970 - Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit; 2015. G.ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile; 2013a. H.ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). I.NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C.Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. D.Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. E.Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. F.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2.Extra Flooring Material: 20 square feet of each type and color. 3.Extra Wall Base: 50 linear feet of each type and color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 6500 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the correct style, color, quantity and run numbers. B.Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space. C.Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. D.Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. E.Do not double stack pallets. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B.Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1.Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.03 PREPARATION A.Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. B.Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured. 3.04 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B.Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.05 INSTALLATION - SOUND CONTROL UNDERLAYMENT A.At all LVT/LVP installations. B.Install in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING A.Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions. B.Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern. C.Install woven vinyl tile in monolithic pattern using velcro hooktabs. 3.07 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE A.Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 48 inches between joints. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 6500 - 3 RESILIENT FLOORING B.Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C.Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 3.08 CLEANING A.Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B.Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.09 PROTECTION A.Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 9113 - 1 EXTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Surface preparation. B.Field application of paints. C.Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: D.Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1.Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2.Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3.Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4.Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5.Floors, unless specifically indicated. 6.Glass. 7.Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1.Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2.MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3.Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 4.Manufacturer's installation instructions. 5.If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of substitutions proposed. C.Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1.Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2.Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available. 3.Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect. 4.Paint color submittals will not be considered until color submittals for major materials not to be painted, such as masonry, have been approved. D.Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 4 by 4 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. E.Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified. F.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. G.Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets (MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished surfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 9113 - 2 EXTERIOR PAINTING H.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2.Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where directed. 3.Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 MOCK-UP A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B.Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint color, texture, and finish. C.Locate where directed by Architect. D.Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B.Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C.Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B.Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C.Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTIONS 09 123 INTERIOR FINISHES AND 09 9500 COLOR SET CHART (FINISH SCHEDULE) FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A.Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1.Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2.Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3.Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTIONS 09 9123 INTERIOR FINISHES AND 09 9500 COLOR SET CHART (FINISH SCHEDULE) FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 9113 - 3 EXTERIOR PAINTING B.Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. C.Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 3.03 PREPARATION A.Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B.Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C.Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing. D.Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E.Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3.04 APPLICATION A.Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". B.Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. C.Apply each coat to uniform appearance. D.Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. E.Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection. 3.06 CLEANING A.Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.07 PROTECTION A.Protect finishes until completion of project. B.Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 9123 - 1 INTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Surface preparation. B.Field application of paints. C.Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. 1.Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment. 2.Mechanical and Electrical: a.In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. b.In finished areas, paint shop-primed items. c.Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. d.Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. D.Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1.Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2.Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3.Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4.Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5.Floors, unless specifically indicated. 6.Glass. 7.Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. B.Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Shop-primed items. C.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting. D.Section 32 1723.13 - Painted Pavement Markings: Painted pavement markings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.Comply with ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2016. B.ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Based Materials; 2015. C.MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 9123 - 2 INTERIOR PAINTING B.Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1.Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2.MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3.Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 4.Manufacturer's installation instructions. C.Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1.Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2.Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available. 3.Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect. 4.Paint color submittals will not be considered until color submittals for major materials not to be painted, such as masonry, have been approved. D.Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 4 by 4 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. E.Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified. F.Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. G.Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets (MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished surfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used. H.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2.Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where directed. 3.Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B.Provide panel, 3 feet long by 3 feet wide, illustrating paint color, texture, and finish. C.Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint color, texture, and finish. D.Locate where directed by Architect. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B.Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C.Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 9123 - 3 INTERIOR PAINTING B.Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C.Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTIONS 09 123 INTERIOR FINISHES AND 09 9500 COLOR SET CHART (FINISH SCHEDULE) FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL A.Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1.Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2.Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3.Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTIONS 09 9123 INTERIOR FINISHES AND 09 9500 COLOR SET CHART (FINISH SCHEDULE) FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B.Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially effect proper application. C.Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D.Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1.Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2.Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent. 3.Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent. 4.Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 5.Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent. 3.03 PREPARATION A.Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B.Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C.Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D.Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E.Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3.04 APPLICATION A.Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 09 9123 - 4 INTERIOR PAINTING B.Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". C.Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D.Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer. E.Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. F.Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection. 3.06 CLEANING A.Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.07 PROTECTION A.Protect finishes until completion of project. B.Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 10 1400 - 1 SIGNAGE SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Room and door signs. B.Interior directional and informational signs. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition. B.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. C.ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C.Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1.When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2.Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. D.Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment. E.Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips. F.Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified. G.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices. H.Manufacturer's Qualification Statement. I.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B.Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building. C.Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B.Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 10 1400 - 2 SIGNAGE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 10 1423.16 ROOM IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE FOR PRODUCT SPECIFICATION INFORMATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFER TO FED EX SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL FOR CY22 ANNEX CAPE COD, MA, DATED 01/07/22 SECTION 100 1423.16 ROOM IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE FOR ADDITIONAL EXECUTION SPECIFICATION INFORMATION 3.02 EXAMINATION A.Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C.Protect from damage until Date of Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 10 4400 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Fire extinguishers. B.Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2017. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cabinets and cabinet physical dimensions. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E.Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F.Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Fire Extinguishers: 1.Kidde, a unit of United Technologies Corp: www.kidde.com/#sle. 2.Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com/#sle. 3.Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business: www.pyrochem.com/#sle. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A.Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A.Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify existing conditions before starting work. B.Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A.See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 10 4400 - 2 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES B.Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 10 7313 - 1 AWNINGS SECTION 10 7313 AWNINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Fabric awnings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM B211/B211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2019. B.ASTM B241/B241M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube; 2016. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Metal Product Data: Product data sheets, including material descriptions and finishes, and preparation instructions and recommendations. C.Fabric Product Data: Provide data on awning fabric covering, color fastness, stitching and seaming methods, attachment devices to framing system, and _______. D.Shop Drawings: Indicate awning profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, graphic images, patterns, accessories, and locations. E.Samples, Fabric Covering: Submit 12 by 12 inch sample of covering with representative hem stitch detail, seam with reinforcement, and attachment devices to framing system. F.Selection Samples: Manufacturer's color charts for metal framing and awning panel colors and finishes. G.Design Data: Submit comprehensive structural analysis of design for the specified loads. Stamp and sign calculations by professional engineer. H.Designer's qualification statement. I.Manufacturer's qualification statement. J.Installer's qualification statement. K.Executed warranty. L.Specimen warranty. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with at least three years of documented experience. 1.05 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B.Manufacturer Warranty: Provide two-year manufacturer warranty for frame and fabric. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. C.Installer Warranty: Provide two-year warranty for installation commencing on the Date of Substantial Completion. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with installer. D.Finish Warranty: Provide 20-year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of factory-applied finishes. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with warrantor. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 10 7313 - 2 AWNINGS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Fabric Awnings: 1.Dorchester Awning Company: www.dorchesterawning.com. 2.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 AWNINGS - GENERAL A.Design Criteria: Design and fabricate to resist the following loads without failure, damage, or permanent deflection: B.Configuration: As indicated on drawings. C.Sizes: As indicated on drawings. D.Provide a complete system ready for erection at project site. E.Shop fabricate to the greatest extent possible; disassemble if necessary for shipping. 2.03 FABRIC AWNINGS A.Description: Shaped lightweight metal framework with fabric covering attached to building exterior over a door or window to protect from sun or rain. B.Shape: Traditional shed. C.Framework: Aluminum. D.Covering Materials: Comply with applicable code for fire resistance ratings for awning covering. 1.Solution Dyed Acrylic: 9.25 oz/sq yd, resistant to ultraviolet and color degradation, mildew and water resistant; color as selected. 2.Covering Attachment: a.Screws: Zinc-coated No.10 3/4 inch self-tapping screws, space evenly at 6 inches apart, maximum. 2.04 COMPONENTS A.Aluminum Framing System: 1.Aluminum Outriggers, Fascia, Diagonal Supports, and Mounting Brackets: ASTM B211/B211M, 6061 alloy, T6 temper. 2. Framing: Aluminum tubing sizes per awning design engineer for installation conditions.. 3. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wall brackets; cast aluminum. 4. Mounting: Brackets and flanges, with aluminum inserts for embedding into masonry. 5. Splice Connectors: Concealed spigot; cast aluminum. 6. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk galvanized steel screws or bolts; consistent with design of system. 7. Exposed Aluminum Finish: Selected from Manufacturer's Standard Finishes. 2.05 FABRICATION - FRAMING A. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. 2.06 FABRICATION - FABRIC COVERING A. Manufacture covering in one piece wherever possible, sized and configured to suit framing. 2.07 FINISHES A. Finish Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall substrate anchors are acceptable and are ready to receive work. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 10 7313 - 3 AWNINGS 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 3.03 INSTALLATION - FRAMING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FABRIC COVERING A. Install covering over framing members, stretched taut without creases or folds. B. Attach covering and fasten securely. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Misalignment From True Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 11 1319.13 - 1 LOADING DOCK LEVELERS SECTION 11 1319.13 LOADING DOCK LEVELERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Prefabricated steel dock leveler with guard rails. B.Hydraulic operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 11 1313 - Loading Dock Bumpers. B.Section 11 1316 - Loading Dock Seals and Shelters. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide materials and finish, installation details, roughing-in measurements, and operation of unit and safety lock device. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate required opening dimensions and tolerances, placement dimensions of safety lock device, and perimeter conditions of construction. D.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special requirements and ________. E.Manufacturer's Qualification Statement. F.Installer's Qualification Statement. G.Operation Data: Provide operating instructions, and identify unit limitations. H.Maintenance Data: Provide unit maintenance information, lubrication cycles, and provide spare parts manual. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with at least five years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.05 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B.Manufacturer agrees to correct defective work within two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Loading Dock Levelers: 1.Blue Giant Equipment Corporation: www.bluegiant.com/#sle. 2.Kelly Company: www.kelleycompany.com/#sle. 3.Rite-Hite Corp: www.ritehite.com/#sle. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A.Loading Dock Leveler: 1.Operation: Hydraulic. 2.Capacity: 40,000 lbs. 2.03 FINISHES A.Leveler Platform: Galvanized. B.Leveler Frame: Galvanized. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 11 1319.13 - 2 LOADING DOCK LEVELERS C.Guard Railing: Galvanized. D.Pit Frame: Galvanized. E.Vehicle Restraint: Yellow painted hook, galvanized steel operating mechanism. F.Provide galvanized finish at minimum of 1.25 oz/sq ft. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A.Loading Dock Bumpers: Refer to Section 11 1313. B.Loading Dock Seals and Shelters: Refer to Section 11 1316. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that rough-in openings are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install dock leveler and vehicle restraint unit in prepared opening in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Set square and level. C.Anchor unit securely, flush with dock; weld back of leveling dock to pit frame, and touch-up welds with primer. D.Anchor safety lock securely and flush with vertical dock face. 3.03 ADJUSTING A.Adjust installed unit and safety device for smooth and balanced operation. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES SECTION 21 0400 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section applies to certain sections of Division 26, "Electrical," and this section applies to all sections of Division 21, "Fire Protection" of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. C. The Drawings of other trades (Architectural, Structural, Landscape, Civil, Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical, Communications and Fire Alarm) shall be examined for coordination and familiarity of work with other Contractors. Any duplication or omission of provisions in this project should be brought to the attention of the Owners prior to Bidding. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are a part of this Division and are to be considered a part of this Contract. B. Where items of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are repeated in other Sections of the Specifications, it is merely intended to qualify or to call particular attention to them. It is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted if not repeated therein. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors supplying labor and/or equipment and/or materials as required under each Section of this Division. Where conflicts exist between the drawings and the specifications or between this section of the specifications and other sections, the more stringent or higher cost option shall apply. 1.03 INTENT A. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. B. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on drawings but mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation as determined by good trade practice even if not particularly specified, shall be furnished, delivered and installed under their respective Divisions without any additional expense to the Owner. C. Minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary for proper installation and operation shall be included in the work as though they were hereinafter shown or specified. D. Work under each Section shall include giving written notice to the Owner and Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable; in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; and any necessary items of work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually agreed that FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES work under each Section includes the cost of all required items for the accepted, satisfactory functioning of the entire system without extra compensation. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. “Approved equal” also known as “alternative” mean any product which in the opinion of the Engineer is equal in quality, arrangement, appearance, and performance to the product specified. B. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Engineer," "requested by the Engineer," and similar phrases. C. “Finished” refers to all rooms and areas to be specified to receive architectural treatment as indicated on the drawings. All rooms and areas not covered, including underground tunnels and areas above ceilings shall be considered not finished, unless otherwise noted. D. “Furnish” or “supply” shall mean purchase, deliver to, and off-load at the job site, ready to be installed including where appropriate all necessary interim storage and protection. E. No Exceptions Taken – reviewed and determined to be in general conformance with contract documents. F. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended. G. “Install” shall mean set in place complete with all mounting facilities and connections as necessary ready for normal use or service. H. "Lead Free" shall mean not more than .25% in the wetted surface area. I. “Product” shall mean any item of equipment, material, fixture, apparatus, appliance or accessory installed under this Division. J. “Provide” shall mean furnish (or supply) and install as necessary. K. Regulation: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. L. Remove: The term “remove” means “to disconnect from its present position, remove from the premises and to dispose of in a legal manner.” M. Special Warranties: The term “Special Warranties” are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. N. Standard Product Warranties: The term “Standard Product Warranties” are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES O. “Subcontractor” means specifically the subcontractor working under this Division. Other Contractors are specifically designated “Fire Protection Subcontractor”, “General Contractor” and so on. Note: Take care to ascertain limits of responsibility for connecting equipment which requires connections by two or more trades. P. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction proposed by the Contractor are considered requests for "substitutions." Q. “Wiring” shall mean cable assembly, raceway, conductors, fittings and any other necessary accessories to make a complete wiring system. 1.05 DRAWINGS A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the Contract. Consult the Architectural Drawings and Details for exact location of fixtures and equipment; where same are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect. (Do not scale the drawings) B. Work under each Section shall closely follow Drawings in layout of work; check Drawings of other Divisions to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom; where space conditions appear inadequate, Owner and Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with installations. C. The Owner may, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and/or for proper execution of the work. D. Where variances occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within either of the Documents, the item or arrangement of better quality, shall be included in the Contract price. The Owner and Engineer shall decide on the item and the manner in which the work shall be installed. 1.06 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS A. Before submitting his Bid, the Contractors shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions under which work will be installed. This Contract includes all modifications of existing systems required for the installation of new equipment. This Contract includes all necessary offsets, transitions and modifications required to install all new equipment in existing spaces. All new and existing equipment and systems shall be fully operational under this Contract before the job is considered complete. The Contractors shall be held responsible for any assumptions he makes, any omissions or errors he makes as a result of his failure to become fully familiar with the existing conditions at the site and the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at the site and check the correctness of same as related to the work. C. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancies between actual measurements and those indicated which prevent following good practice or which interfere with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, the Engineer will be notified and work will not proceed until instructions from the Engineer are received. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES 1.07 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Reference Standard Compliance 1. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. 2. Independent Testing Organization Certificate: In lieu of the label or listing indicated above, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Engineer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. B. The Following Codes and Standards listed below apply to all Fire Protection work. Wherever Codes and/or Standards are mentioned in these Specifications, the latest applicable edition or revision shall be followed: Building Code Including all Supplements Fire Safety Code Including all Supplements Construction Standards and Guidelines Building Standards Guidelines – Compliance for High Performance Buildings The International Building Code The International Mechanical Code The International Fire Protection Code The International Energy Conservation Code NFPA 13, Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code ASHRAE 90.1 and International Energy Conservation Code C. The following Standards shall be used where referenced by the following abbreviations: AIA American Institute of Architects ANSI American National Standards Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES AWS American Welding Society CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturing Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual FSSC Federal Specification HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISO Insurance Services Office NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NSC National Safety Council OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration UL Underwriters’ Laboratories D. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the NFPA, the requirements of the local utility companies, the recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction and the requirements of all Governmental departments having jurisdiction. E. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and Drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether shown on Drawings and/or specified or not. 1.08 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits; and pay all Government and State sales taxes and fees where applicable, and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with the work, file all necessary Drawings, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all Governmental and State departments having jurisdiction, obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work, and deliver a copy to the Owner and Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. 1.09 EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Certain manufacturers of material, apparatus or appliances are indicated in the drawings and specifications for this project. These items have been used as the basis of design, and as a convenience in fixing the minimum standard of workmanship, finish and design that is required. If the Contractors uses an “approved equal” alternative to the basis of FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES design, and if the features of that alternative have an impact on other components of the Project, the Contractor shall include the necessary adjustments in those components, whether for architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, fire protection, or any other elements, plus any adjustments for difference in performance. B. Where one name only is used and is followed by the words “or approved equal”, the Contractor must use the item named or he is required to apply for a substitution. Where one name only is used, the Contractor must use that item named. C. Where no specific make of material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be submitted for Architect and Engineer review. D. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item that is different from the basis of design in the Drawings and specifications, and that will require the redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other component of the mechanical, plumbing, electrical, or architectural layout, the Contractor shall provide the necessary redesign of those components. E. Where the Contractor proposes to deviate (provide an equivalent or request for substitution) from the basis of design scheduled equipment or materials as hereinafter specified or shown on the drawings, they are required to submit a requested for substitution in writing. The Contractor shall state in their request whether it is a substitution, equivalent or a non approved equivalent to that specified and the amount of credit or extra cost involved. A copy of said request shall be included in the Base Bid with manufacturer’s equipment cuts. The Base Bid shall be based on using the materials and equipment as specified with no exceptions. F. If an alternative or substitute item results in a difference in quantity and arrangement of piping, ductwork, valves, pumps, insulation, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and install any such additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner including any costs added to other trades due to the equivalent change from the basis of design detailed in the drawings or included within the specifications. G. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as an “equivalent” shall meet the following requirements: 1. The equivalent shall have the same construction features such as, but not limited to: a. Material thickness, gauge, weight, density, etc. b. Welded, riveted, bolted, etc., construction c. Finish, undercoating, corrosion protection 2. The equivalent shall perform with the same or better operating efficiency. 3. The equivalent shall be locally represented by the manufacturer for service, parts and technical information. 4. The equivalent shall bear the same labels of performance certification as is applicable to the specified item, such as UL or NEMA labels. H. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as a “substitution” shall meet the following requirements: 1. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received in writing 14 days before the bid date. Requests received later than 14 days before the bid date may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Engineer/Owner. Once the Contractor submits a complete request for substitution as determined by the engineer, the engineer reserves the right to FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES request the time necessary to evaluate the request for substitution and review it with the Owner. 2. Submit three (3) copies of each request for substitution for consideration. 3. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. h. Engineer's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the Engineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance of a product substitution will be in the form of an Addendum. i. Other Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Engineer when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Engineer; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1) The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 2) The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 3) A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 8 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES 1.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Provide Submittals in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and as indicated in the following. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1. Allow two weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Engineer will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. 3. Allow two weeks for reprocessing each submittal. 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. D. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. Submittals shall be arranged in order of specification sections. 1. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Engineer. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number, title and paragraph of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. E. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Engineer using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. F. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, the Engineer will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 9 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES G. Action Stamp: The Engineer will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, to indicate the action taken. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit neatly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. The Contractor shall submit for review detailed shop drawings of all equipment and material specified in each section and coordinated sprinkler layouts. No material or equipment may be delivered to the job site or installed until the Contractor has received shop drawings for the particular material or equipment which have been properly reviewed. Shop drawings shall be submitted within 60 days after award of Contract before any material or equipment is purchased. The Contractor shall submit for review copies of all shop drawings to be incorporated in the Fire Protection Contract. Refer to Division 01 for the quantity of copies required for submission. Where quantities are not specified, provide seven (7) copies for review. C. Provide shop drawings for all devices specified under equipment specifications for all systems. Shop drawings shall include manufacturers’ names, catalog numbers, cuts, diagrams, dimensions, identification of products and materials included, compliance with specified standards, notation of coordination requirements, notation of dimensions established by field measurement and other such descriptive data as may be required to identify and accept the equipment. A complete list in each category (example: all fixtures), of all shop drawings, performance cuts, material lists, etc., shall be submitted to the Engineer at one time. No consideration will be given to a partial shop drawing submittal. D. When a submittal could involve more than one trade, e.g., valves, piping, etc., the submitted shall be separated by traded involved, ie. HVAC, plumbing, electrical, etc. E. Where multiple quantities or types of equipment are being submitted, provide a cover sheet (with a list of contents) on the submittal identifying the equipment or material being submitted. F. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary templates, patterns, etc., for installation work and for the purpose of making adjoining work conform; furnish setting plans and shop details to other trades as required. G. “No Exception Taken” rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, review does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Verify available space prior to submitting shop drawings. Review of shop drawings shall not apply to quantity of material. H. After shop drawings have been reviewed, with no exceptions taken, no further changes will be allowed without the written consent of the Engineer. I. Shop drawing submittal sheets which may show items that are not being furnished shall have those items crossed off to clearly indicate which items will be furnished. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES J. Bidders shall not rely on any verbal clarification of the Drawings and/or Specifications. Any questions shall be referred to the Engineer in writing at least five (5) working days prior to Bidding to allow for issuance of an Addendum. K. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. 1.12 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings drawn in the latest Revit version in accordance with Division 01 to a minimum scale of 1/4"=1'-0" detailing major elements, components, and systems of fire protection equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. The Contractor shall indicate the proposed locations of piping, conduit, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the following: a. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. b. Equipment connections and support details. c. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. d. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. e. Sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases. B. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. C. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. D. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling- mounted items. E. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall sign and date each coordination drawing prior to submission. F. Work shall not be performed until coordination drawings have been approved by the architect and engineer. G. Electronic copies of the MEP floor plans are available to use as a basis for preparing coordination drawings and can be provided by the Engineer. The cost for these floor plans is a lump sum fee of $ 1,000.00. If the Contractor elects to obtain the Engineers electronic files an Electronic Drawing File Release Form must be submitted with payment. This form must be signed by the Contractor, Owner, and Architect. Upon receipt of a signed copy of the Electronic Drawing File Release Form, and payment, the Engineer will provide copies of the electronic files for the Contractor’s use. A copy of the Electronic Drawing File Release Form is appended to the end of this specification section 1.13 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS A. All work shall be carried out in conjunction with other trades and full cooperation shall be given in order that all work may proceed with a minimum of delay and interference. Particular emphasis is placed on timely installation of major apparatus and furnishing FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 11 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES other Contractors, especially the Contractor or Construction Manager, with information as to openings, chases, sleeves, bases, inserts, equipment locations, panels, etc., required by other trades. B. The Contractors are required to examine all of the Project Drawings and mutually arrange work so as to avoid interference with the work of other trades. In general, ductwork, HVAC piping, sprinkler piping and drainage lines take precedence over water, gas and electrical conduits. The Engineer shall make final decisions regarding the arrangement of work which cannot be agreed upon by the Contractors. C. Where the work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to or will interfere with work of other trades, the Contractors will cooperate in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. D. If the work under a Section is installed before coordinating with other Divisions or Sections or so as to cause interference with work of other Sections, the necessary changes to correct the condition shall be made by the Contractor causing the interference without extra charge to the Owner. 1.14 WORKMANSHIP A. Service Support: The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. B. Modification of References: In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. C. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work together with all skilled workmen, fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers and laborers required to unload, transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test each system. D. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, all equipment and materials shall be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer and in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends. E. All labor for installation of Fire Protection systems shall be performed by experienced, skilled tradesmen under the supervision of a licensed journeyman foreman. All work shall be of a quality consistent with good trade practice and shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any work which, in his opinion, has been installed in a substandard, dangerous or unserviceable manner. The Contractor shall replace said work in a satisfactory manner at no extra cost to the Owner. 1.15 SHUTDOWNS A. When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existing operating system, the connection of the new system shall be performed at such time as designated by the Owner. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 12 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES B. The Engineer and the Owner shall be notified in writing of the estimated duration of the shutdown period at least ten (10) days in advance of the date the work is to be performed. C. Work shall be arranged for continuous performance whenever possible. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, including overtime if required, to assure that existing operating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make necessary connections. 1.16 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General: Provide new materials and equipment; if acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. C. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. D. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A" fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures. E. Utilities: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where the company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the company's recommendations. 1. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Engineer, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. F. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. H. Termination and Removal: Unless the Engineer requires that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES 1.17 PROJECT PHASING A. Work under each Section shall include all necessary temporary connections, equipment, piping, heating, temperature control work, fire stopping, water heaters, labor, and material as necessary to accommodate the phasing of Construction as developed by the General Contractor or Construction Manager and approved by the Owner. All existing systems that pass-thru an area of the building shall remain operational during all phases of construction. No extra compensation shall be granted the Contractor for work required to maintain existing systems operational or to accommodate the construction phasing of the project. 1.18 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until the facility has been accepted by the Owner. Protect work against theft, injury or damage and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place and completely connecting equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.19 ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. After all the equipment and accessories to be furnished are in place, they shall be put in final adjustment and subjected to such operating tests so as to assure the Engineer that they are in proper adjustment and in satisfactory, permanent operating condition. B. Where requested by the Engineer, a factory-trained service representative shall inspect the installation and assist in the initial startup and adjustment to the equipment. The period of these services shall be for such time as necessary to secure proper installation and adjustments. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation, the service representative shall supervise the initial operation of the equipment and instruct personnel responsible for operation and maintenance of the equipment. The service representative shall notify the Contractor in writing that the equipment was installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations and is operating as intended by the manufacturer. 1.20 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping and equipment of all foreign substances, oils, burrs, solder, flux, etc., inside and out before being placed in operation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 14 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and/or remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired or replaced when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all pipes shall be capped in an acceptable manner to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. E. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 4. Wipe surfaces of fire protection equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. F. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove and dispose of ALL waste materials, packaging material, skids etc. from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner in accordance with municipal, state and federal regulations. G. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. 1.21 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE A. Upon completion of all work and tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating his system and equipment for a period specified under each applicable Section of this Division. During this period, he shall fully instruct the Owner or the Owner’s representative in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The Contractor shall give at least seven (7) days notice to the Owner and the Engineer in advance of this period. B. The Contractor shall include the maintenance schedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this Division. C. The Contractor shall physically demonstrate procedures for all routine maintenance of all equipment furnished under each respective Section to assure accessibility to all devices. D. An authorized manufacturer’s representative shall attest in writing that the equipment has been properly installed prior to startup of any major equipment. The following equipment FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 15 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES will require this inspection: pumps; controls, water heaters, compressors, boilers etc. These letters shall be bound into the operating and maintenance books. E. Refer to individual trade Sections for any other particular requirements related to operating instructions. 1.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and as follows. The Contractor shall prepare six (6) copies of a complete maintenance and operating instructions manual, bound in booklet form. Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information and designation partitions with identification tabs. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. B. Manual shall include the following: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing and operating instructions including lubrication charts and schedules. 5. Emergency and safety instructions. 6. Spare parts list. 7. Copies of warranties. 8. Wiring diagrams. 9. Recommended "turn around" cycles. 10. Inspection procedures. 11. Approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. 12. Equipment Start-up Reports. C. Include in the manual, a tabulated equipment schedule for all equipment. Schedule shall include pertinent data such as: make, model number, serial number, voltage, normal operating current, belt size, bearing number, etc. Schedule shall include maintenance to be done and frequency. D. Maintenance and instruction manuals shall be submitted to the Owner at the same time as the seven (7) day notice is given prior to the instruction period. 1.23 ACCEPTANCES A. The equipment, materials, workmanship, design and arrangement of all work installed under the Fire Protection Sections shall be subject to the review of the Engineer. B. Within 30 days after the awarding of a Contract, the Fire Protection Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for review, a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the work under the Fire Protection Sections. The intent to use the exact manufacturers and models specified does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of submitting such a list. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 16 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES C. If extensive or unacceptable delivery time is expected on a particular item of equipment specified, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer, in writing, within 30 days of award of the Contract. In such instances, equipment substitutions may be made pending acceptance by the Engineer or the Owner’s representative. D. Where any specific material, process or method of construction or manufactured article is specified by reference to the catalog number of a manufacturer, the Specifications are to be used as a guide and are not intended to take precedence over the basic duty and performance specified or noted on the Drawings. In all cases, the Fire Protection Contractor shall verify the duty specified with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review. Equipment characteristics are to be used as mandatory requirements where the Contractor proposes to use an acceptable equivalent. E. If material or equipment is installed before it is reviewed and/or approved, the Contractor shall be liable for its removal and replacement at no extra charge to the Owner if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material or equipment does not meet the intent of, or standard of quality implied by, the Drawings and Specifications. F. Failure on the part of the Engineer to reject shop drawings or to reject work in progress shall not be interpreted as acceptance of work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications. Work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications shall be corrected whenever it is discovered. 1.24 RECORD DRAWINGS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Engineer's reference during normal working hours. B. Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Items to be indicated include but are not limited to: 1. Dimensional change 2. Revision to drawing detail 3. Location and depth of underground utility 4. Revision to pipe routing 5. Revision to electrical circuitry 6. Actual equipment location 7. Pipe size and routing 8. Location of concealed internal utility 9. Changes made by Change Order 10. Details not on original Contract Drawing 11. Information on concealed elements which would be difficult to identify or measure later C. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. D. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. E. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 17 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES F. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. 1.25 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. The following general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties are to be included: 1. General close-out requirements included in Division 01. 2. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installation that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-02 through -50. 3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. C. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime Contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own Contract. 1.26 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, right and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. E. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. F. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 18 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES G. Submit written warranties to the Engineer prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Engineer's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Engineer. H. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Engineer within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. I. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Engineer for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-02 through -50 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. J. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. K. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS," the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. 3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. 1.27 GUARANTEES A. The Contractor shall guarantee all material and workmanship under these Specifications and the Contract for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by Owner. During this guarantee period, all defects developing through faulty equipment, materials or workmanship shall be corrected or replaced immediately by this Contractor without expense to the Owner. Such repairs or replacements shall be made to the Engineer's satisfaction. B. Contractor shall provide name, address, and phone number of all contractors and subcontractors and associated equipment they provided. 1.28 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Contractor shall submit annual maintenance proposal to the Architect/Engineer for review and approval as part of the close out documents. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 19 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES B. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents in accordance with Division 01. C. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. D. Complete start-up testing of systems, including measuring and documenting all required startup checklist requirements documented in installation and maintenance instructions by the equipment manufacturer, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. E. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. F. Field Observation Procedures: On receipt of a request for an Engineers Field Observation, the Engineer will advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Engineer will advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. The Engineer will repeat the Field Observation when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed list of unfulfilled items will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 0400 - 20 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION TRADES Electronic Drawing File Release Form DELIVERY OF ELECTRONIC FILES FOR: Project Name In accepting and utilizing any drawings or other data on any form of electronic media generated and provided by the Design Professional, the Contractor covenants and agrees that all such drawings and data are instruments of service of the Design Professional, who shall be deemed the author of the drawings and data, and shall retain all common law, statutory law and other rights, including copyrights. The Contractor further agrees not to use these drawings and data, in whole or in part, for any purpose or project other than the project which is the subject of this Agreement. The Client agrees to waive all claims against the Design Professional resulting in any way from any unauthorized changes or reuse of the drawings and data for any other project by anyone other than the Design Professional. In addition, the Contractor agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to indemnify and hold the Design Professional harmless from any damage, liability or cost, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs of defense, arising from any changes made by anyone other than the Design Professional or from any reuse of the drawings and data without the prior written consent of the Design Professional. Under no circumstances shall transfer of the drawings and other instruments of service on electronic media for use by the Client be deemed a sale by the Design Professional, and the Design Professional makes no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. _____________________________________________ ________________________ Contractor’s Signature Date _____________________________________________ Company - Title _____________________________________________ ________________________ Architects’ Signature Date _____________________________________________ Firm - Title _____________________________________________ ________________________ Owner’s Signature Date _____________________________________________ Company - Title FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 1313 - 1 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SECTION 21 1313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes wet-pipe sprinkler system, system design, installation, and certification. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections to equipment specified by this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. Factory Mutual: 1. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide. C. Underwritters Laboratory: 1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This project comprises alterations and renovations to the existing sprinkler system. The contractor shall field verify all existing conditions prior to submitting shop drawings including but not limited to, location of the existing sprinkler heads, locations and sizes of existing sprinkler piping, and available static pressure, residual pressure and flow at the base of the riser. Contractor shall make revisions to sprinkler piping as required to support the new layout of sprinkler heads, including revising sizes of existing piping. B. Provide a wet pipe system hydraulically designed in accordance with NFPA 13 and all requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. System to provide coverage for building areas noted. D. Provide system to NFPA Standard occupancy requirements as noted on the drawings. E. Interface system with building fire alarm system. F. The sprinkler locations and piping arrangements indicated on the contract documents are diagrammatic. It is the responsibility of the contractor to fully coordinate sprinkler and piping locations with all other trades. The Contractor shall field verify all existing conditions. If it is determined by the contractor that the existing swing joint assemblies are supplied by ½” tee outlets contractor shall inform Architect/Engineer immediately for direction on how to proceed with work. G. Sprinkler locations indicated on the Contract Documents indicate sprinkler coverage utilizing standard coverage sprinklers maximum 225 square feet per sprinkler for light hazard and 130 square feet per sprinkler for ordinary hazard. Extended coverage FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 1313 - 2 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS sprinklers shall not be installed in any locations unless specifically indicated on the Contract Document drawings. H. All sprinklers installed in a light hazard classification occupancy shall be a listed quick response type. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 – General Requirements: Submittal procedures. B. Where the terms “authorities having jurisdiction” is used, within this Specification, it is intended to include the Insurance Underwriter and all regulatory agencies having vested interest in this project. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide fire protections shop drawings drawn to a minimum scale of ¼”=1’-0”. Shop drawings shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. Indicate pipe materials used, joining methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. 2. Provide hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. 3. All sprinkler drawings and calculations shall bear the seal of a Professional Engineer licensed in the State where the project is located. Seal and signature shall not be copied and shall be provided as an original on drawings and each calculation. 4. Sprinklers shall be as shown on drawings and submittals and shall be specifically identified with the applicable style or series designation as published in the appropriate agency listing or approval. Trade names or other abbreviated designations are not permitted. D. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. E. After successful review by the Engineer, submit sprinkler layout shop drawings, product data, and hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction, Fire Marshall, and Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer. F. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on shop drawings and product submittals and shall be specifically identified with the applicable Victaulic style or series designation. G. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and all code requirements. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 – General Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 1313 - 3 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Workmanship and Qualifications: All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with NFPA and all applicable local codes and ordinances. The Sprinkler Contractor shall be state licensed to install sprinkler systems. The Sprinkler Contractor shall make sure that all work and materials conform to the requirements set forth by this Specification. Fire protection equipment shall be installed to conform to NFPA as applicable, and devices used shall be listed and approved by Underwriters laboratories (UL) and/or Factory Mutual (FM). B. Codes and Standards: All work shall be equal or superior to that required by codes, regulations, ordinances, and laws imposed by the jurisdictional authorities, including those of state codes, the State Fire Marshall, local ordinances and OSHA. Nothing in the Specifications permit violations of such directives, and where conflict occurs, the directive shall govern, except where superior work is specified or indicated. C. In addition to complying with the above codes and regulations, comply with the requirements of the following: 1. NFPA Standard 13. 2. State Building and Fire Codes. 3. Local Jurisdictional Authorities. D. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. E. Valves: Bear UL and/or FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer’s name and pressure rating marked on valve body. F. All items of similar class shall be the products of the same manufacturer. All valves, accessory items, etc., shall be from the same source. G. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. H. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum five years experience. I. Design sprinkler system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State where the project is located. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 1313 - 4 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Division 01 – General Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Deliver and store products in shipping containers, with labeling in place. C. All equipment, valves, gages and etc., shall be covered and protected during the execution of the work. All equipment and piping shall be protected from freezing. Labeling to remain in place. D. All unloading, hauling, and handling of materials shall be the responsibility of the Sprinkler Contractor. E. The Sprinkler Contractor can obtain information on available storage space on site from the Owner when making examination of the site. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Division 01 – General Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Division 01 – General Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13. C. Furnish suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. D. Provide metal storage cabinet adjacent to the sprinkler riser. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Viking. 2. Tyco. 3. Victaulic. 4. Grinnell Corp. 5. Reliable Sprinkler Corp. 6. Substitutions: Division 01 – General Requirements B. All sprinklers shall be adjustable, glass bulb, automatic sprinklers with ½ inch orifice and 5.6 K-factor unless noted otherwise. Type of sprinkler head shall be as indicated on the plans and in accordance with the following. C. Sprinkler bodies shall be die-cast brass, with hex shaped wrench boss integrally cast into the sprinkler body to reduce the risk of damage during installation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 1313 - 5 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS D. Unless noted otherwise, ordinary temperature rated sprinkler heads shall be used throughout the building. E. Where sprinklers will be installed in close proximity to heat sources and special locations, as identified in NFPA 13, temperature ratings shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 F. Where plans call for extended coverage sprinkler heads coordinate coverage requirements with required pressure and K-factor. G. Spare Sprinklers: The Sprinkler Contractor shall furnish spare automatic sprinklers in accordance with the requirements of NFPA for stock of extra sprinklers. The sprinklers shall be packed in a suitable container and shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. The Sprinkler Contractor shall furnish no less than two special sprinkler wrenches, or at least one wrench for each container or sprinkler box, whichever is greater. H. In areas where sprinkler heads are subject to physical damage, provide sprinkler guard assembly over head, finish to match sprinkler finish. This shall include but not limited to the following locations. 1. Heads in elevator shafts. 2. Heads under lower rakes of stairways. 3. Heads in electrical rooms, boiler rooms and other mechanical rooms. 4. Heads installed 7’-0” or less above finished floors. 5. Heads in gymnasium/fitness center areas. I. Sprinklers shall be in accordance with the schedule indicated on the plans. 2.02 ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, ASTM A795 or ASTM A135; Schedule 40 carbon steel. Schedule 10 pipe shall be allowed for pipe sizes 1 ¼” diameter and larger when roll grooved mechanical couplings are used. 1. Fittings: a. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.4, screwed fittings. b. Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, screwed Class 300 type. Threads shall conform to ANSI/ASTM A47. c. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ANSI A21.10/AWWA C-110 ductile iron; ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A234 Grade WPB; or factory fabricated from carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53; with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings. Fittings shall be of the same manufacturer as the adjoining couplings. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12, ductile iron housing, elastomer gasket with nuts and bolts to secure roll grooved pipe and fittings. Fire Protection Service Temperature Range Gasket Recommendation Water/Wet Systems Ambient C-Shape or EZ Style 009 1) Rigid Type Couplings: Housings cast with offsetting, angle- pattern bolt pads to provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with NFPA-13. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 1313 - 6 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS a) 1-1/4” through 4”: Factory assembled for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Victaulic Style 009 EZ. b) 5” through 8”: Victaulic FireLock™ Style 005. c) 10” and larger: Victaulic Zero-Flex® Style 07. 2) Flexible Type Couplings: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required, and for seismic considerations in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Victaulic Style 75. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B75; ASTM B88; or ASTM B251; Type [L] [K], hard drawn, seamless. 1. Fittings: a. ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy pressure fittings, or ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper and copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings. 2. Joints: a. [ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA] [ANSI/AWS A5.8 BCuP silver braze]. b. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12, ductile iron housing, FlushSeal® or QuickVic elastomer gasket with nuts and bolts to secure roll grooved pipe and fittings. Housings cast with offsetting, angle- pattern bolt pads to provide rigidity, and manufactured to connect copper tubing and fittings without flaring. Victaulic Style 606 or Style 607 “QuickVic” stab-on couplings. 2.03 OUTLET FITTINGS A. Rubber-gasketed outlet fittings that are used on sprinkler systems shall meet the following requirements: 1. Be installed in accordance with the listing and manufacturer’s installation instructions 2. Have all disks retrieved 3. Have smooth bores cut into the pipe, with all cutting residue removed 4. Not be modified 2.04 UNIONS AND DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under: 1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. B. Dielectric Connections: Union, waterway fitting, or flange with water impervious isolation barrier; Victaulic Style 47 or Watts 3000 Series or approved equal. 2.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Conform to NFPA 13. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inch and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 1313 - 7 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. H. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. I. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPERATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work. B. Prepare piping connections to equipment with grooved joint couplings, flanges, or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Install fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems. C. Impairments to the existing water supplies shall be minimized. All work shall be complete before making the final connections to the existing water supplies. The Contractor shall notify the owner’s representative before impairing any fire protection equipment. D. The Contractor shall maintain a clean and orderly site during the installation of the sprinkler system. Materials shall not be stored in the halls or other public areas. E. Cutting, welding and other hot work shall not be permitted without permission from the building owner. Contractor shall provide a fire watch for one hour after all welding F. The required tests shall be witnessed by the Fire Marshall, authority having jurisdiction, Owner's insurance underwriter and Architect/Engineer. G. Center heads in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. H. Sprinkler Bulb protector must remain in place until the sprinkler is completely installed. Remove the bulb protector by hand after installation and before the system is placed in service. (Do not use any tools to remove the bulb protector.) I. Do not install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of fluid. Never install sprinklers with cracked bulbs. J. Provide wire guards on sprinklers as indicated on drawings. K. Hydrostatically test entire system in accordance with the requirmetns of NFPA 13. L. Require test be witnessed by Authority having jurisdiction. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 1313 - 8 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 3.03 INSTALLATION – PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe/insulation: All wet sprinkler piping must be plumbed on the heated side of the building insulation to prevent freezing. The fire protection contractor must install the wet sprinkler piping such that space is provided around all wet piping for insulation to be installed. The space required for insulation is dictated by the insulation R-value for the specific area as specified by the Architect. B. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems. C. Pipe and fitting shall be installed per the manufacture’s installation requirements. The fire protection contractor shall furnish all materials necessary to meet these requirements including but not limited to hangers, support, insulation, shields, sleeves and power supplies. D. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings unless noted otherwise. E. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. F. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. G. Pipe and fitting shall be installed per the manufacture’s installation requirements. The fire protection contractor shall furnish all materials necessary to meet these requirements including but not limited to hangers, support, insulation, shields, sleeves and power supplies. H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. I. Install pipe sleeve at piping penetrations through partitions, walls, and floors. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation. J. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Use Victaulic Style 77 or 75 couplings in accordance with Victaulic instructions for expansion and contraction of pipe. K. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be verified as suitable for the intended service prior to installation. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer. The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved joint products. The manufacturer’s representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and review installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any joints deemed improperly installed. L. Pitch piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. M. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Refer to Section 09 90 00. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 21 1313 - 9 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS N. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. O. Where more than one piping system material is specified, install compatible system components and joints. Install flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. P. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. Q. Provide dielectric fittings whenever joining two dissimilar metals. R. Provide surge restrainers on all end of branches and arm overs in excess of 12-inches. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Verify signal devices are installed and connected to fire alarm system. 3.05 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:Final cleaning. B. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. 3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Apply masking tape or paper cover to protect concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons not receiving field paint finish. Remove after painting. [Replace painted sprinklers with new.] 3.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide and apply signs to control, drain, test and alarm valves to identify their purpose and function. B. Provide and permanently attach hydraulic calculations data nameplate at the controlling valve for the sprinkler system. Provide lettering size and style from NFPA’s suggested styles. 3.08 TESTING A. Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES SECTION 22 0400 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section applies to certain sections of Division 26, "Electrical," and this section applies to all sections of Division 22, "Plumbing" of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. C. The Drawings of other trades (Architectural, Structural, Landscape, Civil, Mechanical, Fire Protection and Electrical) shall be examined for coordination and familiarity of work with other Contractors. Any duplication or omission of provisions in this project should be brought to the attention of the Owners prior to Bidding. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are a part of this Division and are to be considered a part of this Contract. B. Where items of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are repeated in other Sections of the Specifications, it is merely intended to qualify or to call particular attention to them. It is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted if not repeated therein. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors supplying labor and/or equipment and/or materials as required under each Section of this Division. Where conflicts exist between the drawings and the specifications or between this section of the specifications and other sections, the more stringent or higher cost option shall apply. 1.03 INTENT A. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. Provide all parts necessary for the intended use, fully complete and operational, and installed in professional manner in accordance with the design intent. B. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on drawings but mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete and ready for operation as determined by good trade practice even if not particularly specified, shall be furnished, delivered and installed under their respective Divisions without any additional expense to the Owner. C. Minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary for proper installation and operation shall be included in the work as though they were hereinafter shown or specified. D. Work under each Section shall include giving written notice to the Owner and Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable; in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; and any necessary items of work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually agreed that FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES work under each Section includes the cost of all required items for the accepted, satisfactory functioning of the entire system without extra compensation. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. “Approved equal” also known as “alternative” mean any product which in the opinion of the Engineer is equal in quality, arrangement, appearance, and performance to the product specified. B. No Exceptions Taken – reviewed and determined to be in general conformance with contract documents. C. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Engineer," "requested by the Engineer," and similar phrases. D. “Finished” refers to all rooms and areas to be specified to receive architectural treatment as indicated on the drawings. All rooms and areas not covered, including underground tunnels and areas above ceilings shall be considered not finished, unless otherwise noted. E. “Furnish” or “supply” shall mean purchase, deliver to, and off-load at the job site, ready to be installed including where appropriate all necessary interim storage and protection. F. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended. G. “Install” shall mean set in place complete with all mounting facilities and connections as necessary ready for normal use or service. H. "Lead Free" shall mean not more than .25% in the wetted surface area. I. No Exceptions Taken – reviewed and determined to be in general conformance with contract documents. J. “Product” shall mean any item of equipment, material, fixture, apparatus, appliance or accessory installed under this Division. K. “Provide” shall mean furnish (or supply) and install as necessary. L. Regulation: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. M. Remove: The term “remove” means “to disconnect from its present position, remove from the premises and to dispose of in a legal manner.” N. Special Warranties: The term “Special Warranties” are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES O. Standard Product Warranties: The term “Standard Product Warranties” are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. P. “Subcontractor” means specifically the subcontractor working under this Division. Other Contractors are specifically designated “Plumbing Subcontractor”, “General Contractor” and so on. Note: Take care to ascertain limits of responsibility for connecting equipment which requires connections by two or more trades. Q. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction proposed by the Contractor are considered requests for "substitutions." R. “Wiring” shall mean cable assembly, raceway, conductors, fittings and any other necessary accessories to make a complete wiring system. 1.05 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The two dimensional drawings govern the construction. They show the design intent and are part of the Contract Documents. BIM models are not part of contract documents. They are developed for convenience only. B. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the Contract. Consult the Architectural Drawings and Details for exact location of fixtures and equipment; where same are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect. (Do not scale the drawings) C. Work under each Section shall closely follow Drawings in layout of work; check Drawings of other Divisions to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom; where space conditions appear inadequate, Owner and Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with installations. D. The Owner may, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and/or for proper execution of the work. 1.06 DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS A. Where variances occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within either of the Documents, the item or arrangement of better quality, shall be included in the Contract price. The Owner and Engineer shall decide on the item and the manner in which the work shall be installed. B. Where Drawings or Specifications conflict or are unclear, submit clarification request in writing before Award of Contract. Otherwise, Architect's interpretation of Contract Documents shall be final, and no additional compensation shall be permitted due to discrepancies or un-clarities thus resolved. C. Where Drawings or Specifications do not coincide with manufacturers' recommendations or with applicable codes and standards, submit clarification request in form of an RFI before installation. Otherwise, make changes in installed work required for compliance with manufacturer instructions or codes and standards within Contract Price. D. Where insufficient information exists in the documents to precisely describe a certain component or subsystem, or the routing of a component or its coordination with other building elements, where notification required by Paragraph (B) above has not been FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES submitted, provide the specific component or subsystem with all parts necessary for the intended use, fully complete and operational, and installed in professional manner either concealed or exposed in accordance with the design intent. E. Where discrepancies exist between the mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical drawings in regards to what trade owns disconnects or starters, the discrepancy shall be brought to the Architect’s attention in accordance with paragraph (B) above. If the scope is not resolved prior to the Award of Contract, Division 26 shall provide such items. 1.07 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS A. Before submitting the Bid, the Contractors shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions under which work will be installed. This Contract includes all modifications of existing systems required for the installation of new equipment. This Contract includes all necessary offsets, transitions and modifications required to install all new equipment in existing spaces. All new and existing equipment and systems shall be fully operational under this Contract before the job is considered complete. The Contractors shall be held responsible for any assumptions made, any omissions or errors made as a result of their failure to become fully familiar with the existing conditions at the site and the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at the site and check the correctness of same as related to the work. C. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancies between actual measurements and those indicated which prevent following good practice or which interfere with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, the Engineer will be notified and work will not proceed until instructions from the Engineer are received. 1.08 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Reference Standard Compliance 1. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. 2. Independent Testing Organization Certificate: In lieu of the label or listing indicated above, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Engineer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. B. Wherever Codes and/ or standards are mentioned in these specifications, the latest applicable edition or revision of the local building or life safety code shall be followed. C. The following Standards shall be used where referenced by the following abbreviations: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists AGA American Gas Association AIA American Institute of Architects ANSI American National Standards Institute API American Petroleum Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CGA Compressed Gas Association CSA Canadian Standards Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturing Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual FSSC Federal Specification HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISO Insurance Services Office MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America NBS National Bureau of Standards NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES NFPA National Fire Protection Association NOFI National Oil Fuel Institute NSC National Safety Council NSF National Sanitation Foundation OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute SBI Steel Boiler Industry (Division of Hydronics Institute) SDWA Safe Drinking Water Act SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association STI Steel Tank Institute UL Underwriters’ Laboratories D. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the NFPA, the requirements of the local utility companies, the recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction and the requirements of all Governmental departments having jurisdiction. E. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and Drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether shown on Drawings and/or specified or not. 1.09 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits; and pay all Government and State sales taxes and fees where applicable, and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with the work, file all necessary Drawings, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all Governmental and State departments having jurisdiction, obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work, and deliver a copy to the Owner and Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. 1.10 EQUIPMENT EQUIVALENTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Certain manufacturers of material, apparatus or appliances are indicated in the drawings and specifications for this project. These items have been used as the basis of design, and as a convenience in fixing the minimum standard of quality, finish and design that is required. If the Contractors uses an “approved equal” alternative to the basis of design, and if the features of that alternative have an impact on other components of the Project, the Contractor shall include the necessary adjustments in those components, whether for architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, fire protection, or any other elements, plus any adjustments for difference in performance. B. Where no specific make of material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be submitted for Architect and Engineer review. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES C. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item that is different from the basis of design in the Drawings and specifications, and that will require the redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other component of the mechanical, electrical, or architectural layout, the Contractor shall provide the necessary redesign of those components. D. Where the Contractor proposes to deviate (provide an equivalent or request for substitution) from the basis of design scheduled equipment or materials as hereinafter specified or shown on the drawings, they are required to submit a requested for substitution in writing. The Contractor shall state in their request whether it is a substitution, equivalent or a non-approved equivalent to that specified and the amount of credit or extra cost involved. A copy of said request shall be included in the Base Bid with manufacturer’s equipment cuts. The Base Bid shall be based on using the materials and equipment as specified with no exceptions. E. If an alternative or substitute item results in a difference in quantity and arrangement of structure, piping, ductwork, valves, pumps, insulation, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and install any such additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner including any costs added to other trades due to the equivalent change from the basis of design detailed in the drawings or included within the specifications. F. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as a “substitution” shall meet the following requirements: 1. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received in writing 14 days before the bid date. Requests received later than 14 days before the bid date may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Engineer/Owner. Once the Contractor submits a complete request for substitution as determined by the engineer, the engineer reserves the right to request the time necessary to evaluate the request for substitution and review it with the Owner. 2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 8 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. h. Engineer's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the Engineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance of a product substitution will be in the form of an Addendum. i. Other Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Engineer when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Engineer; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1) The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 2) The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 3) A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. 1.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Provide Submittals in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and as indicated in the following. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 9 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1. Allow ten business days for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Engineer will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. 3. Allow ten business days for reprocessing each submittal. 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. D. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. Submittals shall be arranged in order of specification sections. 1. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Engineer. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number, title and paragraph of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. E. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Engineer using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES F. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, the Engineer will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. G. Action Stamp: The Engineer will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, to indicate the action taken. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit neatly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. The Contractor shall submit for review detailed shop drawings of all equipment and material specified in each section and coordinated plumbing layouts. No material or equipment may be delivered to the job site or installed until the Contractor has received shop drawings for the particular material or equipment which have been properly reviewed. Shop drawings shall be submitted within 60 days after award of Contract before any material or equipment is purchased. The Contractor shall submit for review all shop drawings to be incorporated in the Plumbing Contract. C. Provide shop drawings for all devices specified under equipment specifications for all systems. Shop drawings shall include manufacturers’ names, catalog numbers, cuts, diagrams, dimensions, identification of products and materials included, compliance with specified standards, notation of coordination requirements, notation of dimensions established by field measurement and other such descriptive data as may be required to identify and accept the equipment. A complete list in each category (example: all fixtures), of all shop drawings, performance cuts, material lists, etc., shall be submitted to the Engineer at one time. No consideration will be given to a partial shop drawing submittal. D. When a submittal could involve more than one trade, e.g., valves, piping, etc., the submitted shall be separated by traded involved, ie. HVAC, plumbing, fire protection, etc. E. Where multiple quantities or types of equipment are being submitted, provide a cover sheet (with a list of contents) on the submittal identifying the equipment or material being submitted. F. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary templates, patterns, etc., for installation work and for the purpose of making adjoining work conform; furnish setting plans and shop details to other trades as required. G. “No Exception Taken” rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, review does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Verify available space prior to submitting shop drawings. Review of shop drawings shall not apply to quantity of material. H. After shop drawings have been reviewed, with no exceptions taken, no further changes will be allowed without the written consent of the Engineer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 11 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES I. Shop drawing submittal sheets which may show items that are not being furnished shall have those items crossed off to clearly indicate which items will be furnished. J. Bidders shall not rely on any verbal clarification of the Drawings and/or Specifications. Any questions shall be referred to the Engineer in writing at least five (5) working days prior to bidding to allow for issuance of an Addendum. K. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. L. All submittals shall be made in electronic PDF format with searchable OCR (Optical Character Recognition) format. This excludes scanned and faxed materials. 1.13 COORDINATION DRAWINGS AND BIM MODEL A. Coordination drawings are required for all fire protection, plumbing, mechanical and electrical trades. The content and procedures described in Division 01 shall be followed, with the additional requirements specifically for the plumbing and electrical trades as described in this Section. If a BIM model is not used on this project, the below requirements shall be accomplished in CAD. B. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 01 to a minimum scale of 1/4"=1'-0" detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. The Contractor shall indicate the proposed locations of piping, conduit, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the following: a. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. b. Equipment connections and support details. c. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. d. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. e. Sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases. C. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. D. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. E. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling- mounted items. F. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall sign and date each coordination drawing prior to submission. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 12 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES G. Work shall not be performed until coordination drawings have been approved by the architect and engineer. H. Electronic copies of the MEP floor plans and/or BIM model are available to use as a basis for preparing coordination drawings and can be provided by the Engineer. If the Contractor elects to obtain the Engineers electronic files an Electronic Drawing File Release Form must be submitted. This form must be signed by the Contractor, Owner, and Architect. Upon receipt of a signed copy of the Electronic Drawing File Release Form, the Engineer will provide copies of the electronic files for the Contractor’s use. A copy of the Electronic Drawing File Release Form is appended to the end of this specification section I. Review by Engineer of coordination drawings is limited to confirming that requirements for coordination and preparation of plans have been complied with by the Contractor and shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical and other related work. 1.14 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS A. All work shall be carried out in conjunction with other trades and full cooperation shall be given in order that all work may proceed with a minimum of delay and interference. Particular emphasis is placed on timely installation of major apparatus and furnishing other Contractors, especially the Contractor or Construction Manager, with information as to openings, chases, sleeves, bases, inserts, equipment locations, panels, etc., required by other trades. B. The Contractors are required to examine all of the Project Drawings and mutually arrange work so as to avoid interference with the work of other trades. In general, ductwork, HVAC piping, sprinkler piping and drainage lines take precedence over water, gas and electrical conduits. The Engineer shall make final decisions regarding the arrangement of work which cannot be agreed upon by the Contractors. C. Where the work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to or will interfere with work of other trades, the Contractors will cooperate in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. D. If the work under a Section is installed before coordinating with other Divisions or Sections or so as to cause interference with work of other Sections, the necessary changes to correct the condition shall be made by the Contractor causing the interference without extra charge to the Owner. E. The two dimensional drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate general arrangements of mechanical systems and other work, and are intended to convey sufficient information for skilled contractors and tradespeople to furnish and install complete systems. They are not intended to be absolutely precise; they are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, and component. The purpose of the drawings is to indicate a systems concept, the main components of the systems, and the approximate geometrical relationships. Based on the systems concept, the main components, and the approximate geometrical relationships, provide all other components and materials to make the systems fully complete, coordinated with other systems and the structure and space available, and operational. Similarly, the drawings do not show all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to coordinate with structure and other trades in order to avoid interferences and to meet ceiling heights and other Architectural requirements. Establish and provide offsets, changes in direction, FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES and exact routings to coordinate all systems. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit a “Request for Information” (RFI). F. Controls contractor shall coordinate and sequences of operation with all other trades as necessary to provide a complete and functioning system. 1.15 QUALITY CONTROL A. Service Support: The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. B. Modification of References: In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. C. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work together with all skilled tradespeople, fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers and laborers required to unload, transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test each system. D. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, all equipment and materials shall be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer and in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends. E. All labor for installation of plumbing systems shall be performed by experienced, skilled tradespeople under the supervision of a licensed journeyman foreman. All work shall be of a quality consistent with good trade practice and shall be installed in a neat, professional manner. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any work which, in their opinion, has been installed in a substandard, dangerous or unserviceable manner. The Contractor shall replace said work in a satisfactory manner at no extra cost to the Owner. 1.16 SHUTDOWNS A. When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existing operating system, the connection of the new system shall be performed at such time as designated by the Owner. B. The Engineer and the Owner shall be notified in writing of the estimated duration of the shutdown period at least ten (10) days in advance of the date the work is to be performed. C. Work shall be arranged for continuous performance whenever possible. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, including overtime if required, to assure that existing operating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make necessary connections. 1.17 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General: Provide new materials and equipment; if acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 14 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. C. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. D. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A" fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures. E. Utilities: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where the company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the company's recommendations. 1. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Engineer, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. F. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. H. Termination and Removal: Unless the Engineer requires that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. 1.18 EQUIPMENT ACCESS A. Appliances, controls devices, valves and accessories that utilize energy shall be accessible for inspection, service, repair and replacement without disabling the function of a fire-resistance-rated assembly or removing permanent construction, other appliances, venting systems or any other piping not connected to the appliance being inspected, serviced, repaired or replaced. A level working space not less than 30 inches deep and 30 inches wide shall be provided in front of the control side to service an appliance. 1.19 PROJECT PHASING A. Work under each Section shall include all necessary temporary connections, equipment, piping, heating, temperature control work, fire stopping, water heaters, labor, and material as necessary to accommodate the phasing of Construction as developed by the General FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 15 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES Contractor or Construction Manager and approved by the Owner. All existing systems that pass-thru an area of the building shall remain operational during all phases of construction. No extra compensation shall be granted the Contractor for work required to maintain existing systems operational or to accommodate the construction phasing of the project. 1.20 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or tradespeople and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until the facility has been accepted by the Owner. Protect work against theft, injury or damage and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place and completely connecting equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt and/or damage by tradespeople or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.21 ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. After all the equipment and accessories to be furnished are in place, they shall be put in final adjustment and subjected to such operating tests so as to assure the Engineer that they are in proper adjustment and in satisfactory, permanent operating condition. B. Where requested by the Engineer, a factory-trained service representative shall inspect the installation and assist in the initial startup and adjustment to the equipment. The period of these services shall be for such time as necessary to secure proper installation and adjustments. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation, the service representative shall supervise the initial operation of the equipment and instruct personnel responsible for operation and maintenance of the equipment. The service representative shall notify the Contractor in writing that the equipment was installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations and is operating as intended by the manufacturer. 1.22 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping and equipment of all foreign substances, oils, burrs, solder, flux, etc., inside and out before being placed in operation. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and/or remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired or replaced when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 16 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES C. During the course of construction, all pipes shall be capped in an acceptable manner to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. E. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 4. Wipe surfaces of plumbing equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. F. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove and dispose of ALL waste materials, packaging material, skids etc. from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner in accordance with municipal, state and federal regulations. G. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. 1.23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE A. Upon completion of all work and tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating his system and equipment for a period specified under each applicable Section of this Division. During this period, he shall fully instruct the Owner or the Owner’s representative in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The Contractor shall give at least seven (7) days’ notice to the Owner and the Engineer in advance of this period. B. The Contractor shall include the maintenance schedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this Division. C. The Contractor shall physically demonstrate procedures for all routine maintenance of all equipment furnished under each respective Section to assure accessibility to all devices. D. An authorized manufacturer’s representative shall attest in writing that the equipment has been properly installed prior to startup of any major equipment. The following equipment will require this inspection: pumps; controls, water heaters, compressors, boilers etc. These letters shall be bound into the operating and maintenance books. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 17 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES E. Refer to individual trade Sections for any other particular requirements related to operating instructions. F. Demonstration shall be recorded on USB Flash drive and turned over to the Owner. Video recording shall be done in a professional manner with quality video (1080p resolution) and clear audible sound. 1.24 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and as follows. The Contractor shall prepare up to six (6) copies of a complete maintenance and operating instructions manual, bound in booklet form. Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information and designation partitions with identification tabs. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. B. Manual shall include the following: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing and operating instructions including lubrication charts and schedules. 5. Emergency and safety instructions. 6. Spare parts list. 7. Copies of warranties. 8. Wiring diagrams. 9. Recommended "turn around" cycles. 10. Inspection procedures. 11. Approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. 12. Equipment Start-up Reports. 13. Balance reports. C. Include in the manual, a tabulated equipment schedule for all equipment. Schedule shall include pertinent data such as: make, model number, serial number, voltage, normal FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 18 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES operating current, belt size, bearing number, etc. Schedule shall include maintenance to be done and frequency. D. Maintenance and instruction manuals shall be submitted to the Owner at the same time as the seven (7) day notice is given prior to the instruction period. 1.25 ACCEPTANCES A. The equipment, materials, quality, design and arrangement of all work installed under the Plumbing Sections shall be subject to the review of the Engineer. B. Within 30 days after the awarding of a Contract, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for review, a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the work under the Plumbing Sections. The intent to use the exact manufacturers and models specified does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of submitting such a list. C. If extensive or unacceptable delivery time is expected on a particular item of equipment specified, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer, in writing, within 30 days of award of the Contract. In such instances, equipment substitutions may be made pending acceptance by the Engineer or the Owner’s representative. D. Where any specific material, process or method of construction or manufactured article is specified by reference to the catalog number of a manufacturer, the Specifications are to be used as a guide and are not intended to take precedence over the basic duty and performance specified or noted on the Drawings. In all cases, the Plumbing Contractor shall verify the duty specified with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review. Equipment characteristics are to be used as mandatory requirements where the Contractor proposes to use an acceptable equivalent. E. If material or equipment is installed before it is reviewed and/or approved, the Contractor shall be liable for its removal and replacement at no extra charge to the Owner if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material or equipment does not meet the intent of, or standard of quality implied by, the Drawings and Specifications. F. Failure on the part of the Engineer to reject shop drawings or to reject work in progress shall not be interpreted as acceptance of work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications. Work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications shall be corrected whenever it is discovered. 1.26 RECORD DRAWINGS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Engineer's reference during normal working hours. B. Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Items to be indicated include but are not limited to: 1. Dimensional change 2. Revision to drawing detail FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 19 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES 3. Location and depth of underground utility 4. Revision to pipe routing 5. Revision to electrical circuitry 6. Actual equipment location 7. Pipe size and routing 8. Location of concealed internal utility 9. Changes made by Change Order 10. Details not on original Contract Drawing 11. Information on concealed elements which would be difficult to identify or measure later C. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. D. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. E. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. F. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. G. Final record documents shall be prepared in the latest electronic version and on USB Flash drive of all drawings and a clean set of reproducible paper copies shall be turned over to the Owner at the completion of the work. 1.27 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. The following general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers’ standard warranties on products and special warranties are to be included: 1. General close-out requirements included in Division 01. 2. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installation that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-02 through -50. 3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 20 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES C. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime Contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own Contract. 1.28 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, right and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. E. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. F. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. G. Submit written warranties to the Engineer prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Engineer's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Engineer. H. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Engineer within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. I. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Engineer for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-02 through -50 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. J. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 21 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. K. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS," the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. 3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. 1.29 GUARANTEES A. The Contractor shall guarantee all material and installation quality under these Specifications and the Contract for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by Owner. During this guarantee period, all defects developing through faulty equipment, materials or installation quality shall be corrected or replaced immediately by this Contractor without expense to the Owner. Such repairs or replace- ments shall be made to the Engineer's satisfaction. B. Contractor shall provide name, address, and phone number of all contractors and subcontractors and associated equipment they provided. 1.30 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Submit specific warranties, quality bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents in accordance with Division 01. B. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. C. Complete start-up testing of systems, including measuring and documenting all required startup checklist requirements documented in installation and maintenance instructions by the equipment manufacturer, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. D. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. E. Field Observation Procedures: On receipt of a request for an Engineers Field Observation, the Engineer will advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Engineer will advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. Contractor shall submit written response to each corrective item including specific photos prior to final Engineering inspection. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 22 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES 1. The Engineer will repeat the Field Observation when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed list of unfulfilled items will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0400 - 23 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING TRADES Electronic Drawing File Release Form DELIVERY OF ELECTRONIC FILES FOR: Project Name In accepting and utilizing any drawings or other data on any form of electronic media generated and provided by the Design Professional, the Contractor covenants and agrees that all such drawings and data are instruments of service of the Design Professional, who shall be deemed the author of the drawings and data, and shall retain all common law, statutory law and other rights, including copyrights. The Contractor further agrees not to use these drawings and data, in whole or in part, for any purpose or project other than the project which is the subject of this Agreement. The Contractor agrees to waive all claims against the Design Professional resulting in any way from any unauthorized changes or reuse of the drawings and data for any other project by anyone other than the Design Professional. In addition, the Contractor agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to indemnify and hold the Design Professional harmless from any damage, liability or cost, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs of defense, arising from any changes made by anyone other than the Design Professional or from any reuse of the drawings and data without the prior written consent of the Design Professional. Under no circumstances shall transfer of the drawings and other instruments of service on electronic media for use by the Client be deemed a sale by the Design Professional, and the Design Professional makes no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. _____________________________________________ ________________________ Contractor’s Signature Date _____________________________________________ Company - Title _____________________________________________ ________________________ Architects’ Signature Date _____________________________________________ Firm - Title _____________________________________________ ________________________ Owner’s Signature Date _____________________________________________ Company - Title FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING SECTION 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Identification for Piping and Equipment 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Pipe markers. 4. Ceiling tacks. 5. Labels. 6. Radon Labels 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84-18b - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction Materials. 3. ASTM E814-13a - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Fire Stop Systems. 4. ASTM F708-92 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 5. ASTM E1966-15 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. FM Global: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0500 - 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Standard for Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials 2. UL 723 – Standard for Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 – Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 – Standard Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 – Requirements for Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for piping and equipment identification list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for pipe identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Shop Drawings (Identification): Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Welders’ Certificate: Include welders’ certification of compliance with ASME Section IX or AWS D1.1. G. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Indicate results of inspection by manufacturer’s representative. H. Product Data: 1. Product Data for Pipe and Equipment Identification: Submit for mechanical identification manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. I. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0500 - 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. See Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and packaging in place until installation. C. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.09 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors, guides, tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. C. Operation and Maintenance Data (Expansion): Submit adjustment instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD A. Refer to Division 03 - Concrete B. Concrete Housekeeping Pad: 1. Cementious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source unless specified otherwise in Division 03 – Concrete. a.Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 b.Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded. c.Water ASTM C 94 2. Concrete Mixtures a.Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0500 - 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING b.Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to the ACI 301 to minimum compressive strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 3. Minimum thickness to be 6” in height and 3” in excess of the perimeter of the equipment it serves. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Identification Systems 2. Safety Sign Co. 3. Seton Identification Products 4. Substitutions: Division 01 – General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background color. C. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light background color, minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter. D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. E. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. F. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.03 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Identification Systems 2. Safety Sign Co. 3. Seton Identification Products 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0500 - 5 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709. 2.04 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a.Craftmark Identification Systems b.Safety Sign Co. c.Seton Identification Products d.Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. 2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter. B. Metal Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a.Craftmark Identification Systems b.Safety Sign Co. c.Seton Identification Products d.Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. 2. Aluminum with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished edges. C. Information Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a.Craftmark Identification Systems b.Safety Sign Co. c.Seton Identification Products d.Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. 2. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3- 1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0500 - 6 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame. 2.05 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a.Craftmark Identification Systems b.Safety Sign Co. c.Seton Identification Products d.Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a.Craftmark Identification Systems b.Safety Sign Co. c.Seton Identification Products d.Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. 2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a.Seton b.Northtown c.Kolbi d.Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0500 - 7 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 2. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 3. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with color code as follows: a.Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters. b.Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters. c.Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Orange with black letters. d.Flammable Fluids: Yellow with black letters. e.Combustible Fluids: Brown with white letters. f.Compressed Air: Blue with white letters. g.Heat traced piping: to match the color code of the fluid or gas being used. 2.06 CEILING TACKS A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton 2. Northtown 3. Kolbi 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head. C. Color code as follows: 1. Plumbing valves: Green. 2.07 LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton 2. Northtown 3. Kolbi 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0500 - 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING B. Description: Polyester for above grade and Laminated Mylar for below grade, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING WORK A. Disconnect and remove abandoned motors B. Maintain access to existing motors and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel. C. Clean and repair existing motors to remain or are to be reinstalled. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install plastic nameplates with adhesive. B. Install plastic tags with corrosion resistant metal chain. 3.03 INSTALLATION - IDENTIFICATION A. Install identification of heat traced pipe every 20 feet at minimum. B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. G. Identify water heaters, pumps, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags. H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. J. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers, plastic tape pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 10 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. K. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0500 - 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.15. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0517 - 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 0517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe sleeves. B. Stack sleeves fittings. C. Sleeve-seal systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection. C. Division 09 – Finishes. D. Division 22 – Plumbing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket- Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2016. B.ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 - General Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified this section. 1. Minimum three years experience. C. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have accumulated from the installation and testing of the system. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0517 - 2 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store sleeve and sleeve seals in shipping containers, with labeling in place. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel sleeves if shipped loose. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SLEEVES A. Materials 1. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeve: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated 2. Galvanized Steel Pipe Sleeve: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeve: 0.0239-inch thickness; round tube closed with longitudinal joint. 2.02 STACK SLEEVE FITTINGS A. Manufacturers 1. Zurn Industries, LLC 2. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. 3. MIFAB, Inc. 4. Josam 5. Substitutions: See Division - 01 General Requirements. B. Stack Sleeve Fitting 1. Galvanized cast iron sleeve with integral flashing flange. Provide underdeck clamp where required. 2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flexicraft Industries; PipeSeal. 2. Metraflex 3. Link-Seal 4. Substitutions: See Division - 01 General Requirements. B. Modular/Mechanical Seal: 1. Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall/casing opening. 2. Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening. 3. Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0517 - 3 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Lay out penetration and sleeve openings in advance, to permit provision in work. Coordinate work with architectural and structural work. Set sleeves in forms before concrete is poured. Provide remedial work where sleeves are omitted or improperly placed. Remedial work includes core drilling (see requirements below) for penetrations if walls are poured, or otherwise constructed, without required sleeves. Provide core drilling (see requirements below) of existing construction. Do not penetrate structural members without Structural Engineer’s/Architect's written approval. B. Install piping and pipe sleeves to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. C. Sleeve installation shall meet NFPA-101 requirements, UL rated assemblies requirements, and materials requirements of these specifications. Submit a list of the UL listed details that the Contractor intends on using on this project in all rated assemblies. D. Sleeves that penetrate outside walls, basement slabs, footings and beams shall be waterproof. Sleeves that penetrate floors shall be waterproof. E. Where pipes passing through openings are exposed in finished rooms, finishes of filling materials shall match and be flush with adjoining floor, ceiling, and wall finishes. F. Identify unused sleeves and slots for future installation. Fill slots, sleeves and other openings in floors or walls if not used. Fill spaces in openings after installation of pipe. Fill for floor penetrations shall prevent passage of water, smoke, fire, and fumes. Fill shall be fire resistant in fire floors and walls, and shall prevent passage of air, smoke and fumes. G. Do not support piping risers or conduit on sleeves. H. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 for materials. I. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. J. Structural Considerations: Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Exterior Concrete Walls Above Grade: a. Cast-iron pipe sleeves or galvanized-steel pipe sleeves. 2. Exterior Concrete Walls Below Grade: a. Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. b. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0517 - 4 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING a. Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system, or galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. b. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 4. Concrete Slabs above Grade: a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves, or stack sleeve fittings 5. Interior Partitions: a. Cast iron pipe sleeves, galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves, or galvanized- steel-sheet sleeves. 6. Floors with membrane waterproofing: a. Stack sleeve fittings. 3.03 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. 2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve- seal system. D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection E. Sleeves for insulated pipe in non-fire rated construction shall accommodate continuous insulation without compression. F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 3.02 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed. B. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0517 - 5 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING C. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection D. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. E. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. F. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings. G. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection. 3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building. B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. C. Position piping in center of sleeve. D. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. E. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal. F. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 CORE DRILLING A. Core drilling shall be avoided in new construction. Set sleeves prior to installation of structure for passage of pipes, conduit and ducts. Where core drilling is unavoidable (e.g. when individual sleeves are not installed or incorrectly located) or required by renovation projects, locate required openings prior to coring and submit locations for review. B. Coordinate openings with other Divisions. C. Do not disturb existing systems. Protect areas from damage. D. Thoroughly investigate existing conditions in vicinity of required opening prior to coring. 3.05 CLEANING A. Upon completion of work, clean all parts of the installation. B. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have accumulated from the installation and testing of the system. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0523 - 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Gate valves. 2. Ball valves. 3. Check valves. 4. Pressure reducing. 5. Strainers. 6. Flow control devices. 7. Reduced pressure backflow preventers. 8. Plug valves. 9. Gas pressure regulators. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 – General Requirements. 2. Division 22 – Plumbing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 2. ASTM D4101 - Standard Specification for Propylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. B. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 2. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 3. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 4. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 6. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. C. Safe Drinking Water Act: 1. SDWA 1417 - Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 – General Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0523 - 2 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - General Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For drinking water service, provide valves complying with NSF 61. B. All valves installed on the domestic water distribution system shall comply with SDWA 1417. Exception shall be main shut-off valve at domestic water service entrance that is 2- inches or larger. C. All valve manufacturers shall demonstrate that valve products have been certified per NSF/ANSI Standard 372. D. All valves installed on the domestic water system shall have labeling of lead content engraved on the valve body. E. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved end piping systems, all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by Victaulic or an Engineer Approved Equal 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years experience]. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - General Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 – General Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not install valves underground when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Division 01 – General Requirements: Requirements for warranties. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0523 - 3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding packing. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials. B. Furnish two packing kits for each size valve. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Apollo 2. Milwaukee Valve Co. 3. NIBCO, Inc. 4. American Valve Co. 5. Watts 6. Division 01 – General Requirements B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 300, bronze body, bronze trim, lead free, threaded bonnet, non-rising stem, hand-wheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends, Milwaukee Valve Company Model # UP115. C. 2 1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 70, Class 175, cast iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, hand-wheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends, Milwaukee Valve Company F-2885-FP. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.02 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Apollo 2. Milwaukee Valve Co. 3. NIBCO, Inc. 4. American Valve Co. 5. Watts 6. Division 01 – General Requirements B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 600 psi WOG, two piece bronze body, lead free, type 316 stainless steel ball, full port, teflon seats, stainless steel blow-out proof stem, solder ends with lever handle, Milwaukee Valve Company Model #UPBA450S. C. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, Class 250, bronze, two piece body, lead free, type 316 stainless steel ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, press ends, lever handle, Nibco Model # PC585-66-LF. 2.03 CHECK VALVES A. Horizontal Swing Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Apollo b. Milwaukee Valve Co. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0523 - 4 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING c. NIBCO, Inc. d. American Valve Co. e. Watts f. Division 01 – General Requirements 2. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 300, bronze body and cap, bronze seat, brass disc, solder ends, Milwaukee Valve Co. Model # 1509. 3. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125 cast iron body, bolted cap, bronze or cast iron disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged ends. B. Spring Loaded Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Apollo b. Milwaukee Valve Company c. NIBCO, Inc. d. American Valve Co. e. Watts f. Division 01 – General Requirements 2. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 250, bronze body, in-line spring lift check, silent closing, Buna-N disc, integral seat, solder ends. 3. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 125, Class 125, lead free, wafer style, cast iron body, bronze seat, center guided bronze disc, stainless steel spring and screws, flanged ends, Nibco Model # F-910-LF. 2.04 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Watts Model 223: 1. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, threaded ends, with strainer. 2. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged, with strainer, MSS-SP-80. 2.05 STRAINERS A. Watts series 77: 1. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged cast iron body, Class 125 for 200 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.06 FLOW CONTROL VALVES A. FDI Series ICSS. 1. Construction: series 300 stainless steel body with nickel plated union nut. 2. Threaded inlet and outlet connection. 3. Automatic flow cartridge, stainless steel with machined piston, stainless steel spring, factory set calibration. 4. Maximum operating temperature: 180 degrees F. 5. NSF 61 certification. B. Victaulic/TA Series 76X: 1. Construction: series 300 stainless steel body with nickel plated union nut. 2. Threaded inlet and outlet connection. 3. Automatic flow cartridge, stainless steel with machined piston, stainless steel spring, factory set calibration. 4. Maximum operating temperature: 180 degrees F. 5. NSF 61 certification. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0523 - 5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2.07 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013, AWWA C506; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; test cocks, Watts 909 or equal. 2.08 PLUG VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. DeZURIK, Unit of SPX Corp. 2. Flow Control Equipment, Inc. 3. Homestead Valve 4. Milliken Valve Co. 5. Substitutions: Division 01 – General Requirements B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 78, Class 300, semi-steel construction, rectangular port, full pipe area, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. Furnish one plug valve wrench for every ten plug-valves with minimum of one wrench. C. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 78, Class 300, semi-steel construction, rectangular port, full pipe area, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends. Furnish wrench- operated. 2.09 GAS REGULATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Equimeter. 2. DeZurik. 3. Maxitrol. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 – General Requirements B. Cast iron body (ASTM A126) spring adjustment, Buna-N soft seat, aluminum orifices, die cast aluminum alloy diaphragm case, vent valve and seal cap. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 – General Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify piping system is ready for valve installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. C. Install 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. D. Install valves with clearance for installation of insulation and allowing access. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0523 - 6 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING E. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. 3.03 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff and drain valves at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with this Section. B. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. C. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. D. Provide line sized isolation valves on all domestic water branches greater than ¾” when more than two fixtures are supplied. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. Formed steel channel. 6. Equipment bases and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03- Concrete Section 23 04 00 – General Conditions for Mechanical Trades 2. Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 3. Division 09- Finishes 4. Division 22 – Plumbing 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems 4. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 5. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - General Requirements B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01- General Requirements. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - General Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Globe Pipe Hanger Products Inc. 2. Anvil International 3. Empire Industries 4. Hilti Inc. 5. Substitutions: Division 01- General Requirements B. Plumbing Piping - DWV: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, or MSS SP 58. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, or MSS SP 58. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring. D. Natural Gas / LP Gas Piping: 1. Conform to MSS SP 58. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded as required by application. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.03 INSERTS A. Manufacturers: 1. HiltiInc. 2. Anvil International 3. Eaton 4. 3M 5. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Refer to Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 2.05 SLEEVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Flexicraft Industries; Pipe Wall Sleeve 2. Metraflex; Pipe Wall Sleeve 3. CCI Pipeline; Pipe Wall Sleeve 4. GPT – Centuryline Sleeve Series 5. Substitutions: See Division 01 - General Requirements and 22 04 00 – General Requirements. B. Vertical Piping: 1. Sleeve Length: 1 inch above finished floor. 2. Provide sealant for watertight joint. 3. Blocked Out Floor Openings: Provide 1-1/2 inch angle set in silicon adhesive around opening. 4. Drilled Penetrations: Provide 1-1/2 inch angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. C. Sheet Metal: Pipe passing through interior walls, partitions, and floors, unless steel or brass sleeves are specified below. D. Pipe Passing Through Below Grade or Exterior Walls: 1. Anchored Sleeve - Zinc coated or cast iron pipe. 2. Provide watertight space with link rubber or modular seal between sleeve and pipe on both pipe ends. E. Clearances: 1. Provide allowance for insulated piping. 2. Wall, Floor, Floor, Partitions, and Beam Flanges: 1 inch greater than external; pipe diameter. 3. All Rated Openings: Caulked tight with fire stopping material conforming to ASTM E814-13A in accordance with Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. F. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. G. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Walls, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT H. Sealant: refer to Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection. 2.06 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. 2. NMP Corporation 3. Fernco 4. BWM 5. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. C. Provide NSF 61 certified assembly when used in potable water storage tank applications. 2.07 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. 2. B-Line Systems 3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division 4. Unistrut Corp. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 – General Requirements B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. C. Install backing and damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.] D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors. E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0529 - 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.03 INSTALLATION - INSERTS A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through- bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut [above] [flush with top of] [recessed into and grouted flush with] slab. 3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, or MSS SP 58. B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. C. All pipe hangers and supports shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines to support the piping based on final layout coordinated by the contractor. D. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. E. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. F. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. G. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. H. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. I. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. J. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. K. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. L. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. M. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. [Refer to Section 09 90 00.] Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. N. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 22 07 00 Provide supplemental angles, channels and formed steel supports to support piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. from building’s structure. Piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. shall not be supported from the roof deck. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0529 - 7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.05 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping padsof concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Refer to Division 01 B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members, formed steel channel.[or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. Refer to Section 21 05 48. 3.06 INSTALLATION - FLASHING A. Refer to Division 08 - Openings B. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. C. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash, and seal. D. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. E. Seal floors,showers, and mop sinkdrains watertight to adjacent materials. F. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. 3.07 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with stuffing,and firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. F. Install chrome plated steel,, or stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Division 01 - Quality Requirements and Execution and Closeout Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0529 - 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.09 CLEANING A. Refer to Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: 3.10 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Refer to Division 01 Execution and Closeout Requirements 3.11 SCHEDULES PIPE HANGER SPACING PIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches Brass 6 1/2 Cast Iron (All Sizes)5 5/8 Cast Iron (All Sizes) with 10 foot length of pipe 10 5/8 CPVC, 1 inch and smaller 3 1/2 CPVC, 1-1/4 inches and larger 4 1/2 Copper Tube and Pipe, 1-1/4 inches and smaller 6 1/2 Copper Tube and Pipe, 1-1/2 inches and larger 10 1/2 PEX 2 1/2 PVC 1 1/2 inch and smaller 3 3/8 PVC 2 inch and larger 4 3/8 Steel, 3 inches and smaller 12 1/2 Steel, 4 inches and larger 12 5/8 END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe markers. D. Underground pipe warning tape E. Ceiling grid markers 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 09 - Finishes: Identification painting. B. Division 22 – Plumbing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1.ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems B. American Society for Testing Materials 1.ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials C. National Fire Protection Association 1. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. D. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of medical gas piping systems and accessories. B. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Identification products shall be provided by the following manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Pipe Markers 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 4. Seton Identification Products 5. Substitutions: See Division 01 - General Requirements. B. All identification products shall be by a single manufacturer 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709. 2.03 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. B. Metal Tags: Brass [Aluminum] [Stainless Steel] with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame. 2.04 PIPE MARKERS A. Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.05 UNDERGROUND PIPE WARNING TAPE A. Detectable Underground Warning Tape: Bright colored continuously printed, 2 mil clear film laminated to ½ mil Aluminum Foil Center Core. Suitable for direct burial. Designed for detectability by non-ferrous locator. Minimum widths as follows: 1. 2” width for burial depths of up to 12” 2. 3” width for burial depth of 12” to 18” 3. 6” width for burial depth of 18” to 24” B. Provide with a continuous printed message similar to “Caution Water Line Buried Below”. 2.06 CEILING GRID MARKERS A. Description: 10 mil self-stick vinyl -7/8” diameter markers. Color coded. B. Color code as follows: 1. Plumbing Valves: Green. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Division 09 – Finishes, for stencil painting. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of testing and installation of coverings and painting. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion. C. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Install detectable underground warning tape 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. G. Install piping identification on medical gas systems. Refer to Section 22 60 13. 3.03 APPLICATIONS A. Identify water heaters, pumps, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. C. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. D. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with [plastic pipe markers] [plastic tape pipe markers]. [Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller.] 1. Identify service, and flow direction. 2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops. 4. For concealed piping identification shall be located not to exceed 10 feet. 5. Locate identification adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. E. Identify underground utilities with detectable underground warning tape. F. Provide ceiling grid markers to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 0700 - 1 PLUMBING INSULATION SECTION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories. 2. Plumbing equipment insulation, jackets and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 General Requirements 2. Division 07 - Firestopping 3. Division 09 – Finishes 4. Division 22 – Plumbing 1.02 REFERENCES (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless 2.ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 3.ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4.ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. 5.ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 6.ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 7.ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 8. ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging. 9.ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 10.ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 11.ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 12.ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 13.ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 14. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications 15.ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing. 16.ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. Consulting Engineering Services, Incorporated Revised September 22, 2021 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 00 - 2 17. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 18. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 19. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 20.ASTM C1410 - Standard Specification for Cellular Melamine Thermal and Sound-Absorbing Insulation. 21.ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 22. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 23.ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 24.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 25.ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 26.ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 27.ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1.UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 – General Requirements B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters. B. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. D. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. Consulting Engineering Services, Incorporated Revised September 22, 2021 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 00 - 3 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. Store all insulation materials in a clean, dry environment. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. 1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 1.09 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure and leak testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2.02 MANUFACTURER A. Pre-Molded Glass Fiber (PGF): 1. Johns Manville Corporation – Microlok HP Pipe Insulation 2. CertainTeed Corporation - Crimpwrap 3. Knauf Insulation – Earthwool 4. Owens Corning Corporation; SSL II w ASJ: 5. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) Pipe Insulation Products: 1. Armacell LLC - AP Armaflex 25/50 2. Aeroflex USA, Inc – Aerocel –SSPT w/SaniGuard 3. K-Flex USA LLC – Insul-tube 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 – General Requirements. Consulting Engineering Services, Incorporated Revised September 22, 2021 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 00 - 4 C. Manufacturers for PVC Jacketing (PVC): 1. Johns Manville - Zeston 2. P.I.C. Plastics Inc. 3. Proto Corporation 4. Substitutions: Division 01. D. Manufacturers for Aluminum Jacketing (ALM): 1. Johns Manville 2. ITW Insulation Systems 3. RPR Products – Insul-Mate 4. Substitutions: Division 01. 2.03 PIPE INSULATION A. Pre-Molded Glass Fiber (PGF) Pipe Insulation: 1.ASTM C547 and ASTM C795, rigid molded, noncombustible with jacket. 2. 'K' Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 5. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Outer film layer, kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 of 0.02 perm-inches. 6. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. B. Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) Pipe Insulation: 1. Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534 Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 2. 'K' Value: ASTM C177, between 0.21 and 0.27 at mean rating temperature of 75 degrees F 3. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F 4. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F 5. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 6. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 2.04 JACKETS A. Polyvinyl-chloride Plastic Pipe Jacket (PVC): 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 d. Thickness: 10 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. B. Aluminum Jacket (ALM): ASTM B209 formed aluminum sheet. 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel. Consulting Engineering Services, Incorporated Revised September 22, 2021 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 00 - 5 2.05 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness. D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: hydrous calcium silicate. Inserts length: not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation. E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single piece construction with self-adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation. F. Valve insulation Wraps: White, noncombustible, conforming to ASTM E 84. Match insulation thickness to pipe size. Valve covers shall be easily removable. 2.06 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Pre-Molded Glass Fiber (PGF) Equipment Insulation: 1. ASTM C553; glass fiber, flexible or semi-rigid, noncombustible. 2. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F 3. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 450 degrees F 4. Density: 3 pound per cubic foot B. Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) Equipment Insulation: 1. ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, sheet. 2. 'K' Value: ASTM C177, between 0.21 and 0.27 at mean rating temperature of 75 degrees F 3. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 220 degrees F 2.07 EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. D. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM C449/C449M. E. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. Refer to manufacturers’ installation manual. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Protect insulation from exposure to moisture prior to and after installation. All insulation other than flexible elastomeric that becomes wet shall be replaced at no cost to the project. B. Verify that piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials. Consulting Engineering Services, Incorporated Revised September 22, 2021 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 00 - 6 C. Verify that piping and equipment surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) National Insulation Standards. C. Piping and fittings exposed to view: Provide with PVC Plastic pipe jacketing and fittings for additional protection. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour. E. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. 2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory- applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. F. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers. G. Pre-molded Glass Fiber (PFG) insulated pipes conveying fluids above or below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self- sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with PVC fitting covers. H. For hot piping conveying fluids, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. . Refer to Section 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour. J. Buried Piping: Provide closed cell elastomeric insulation with all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap. K. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer and according to the heat trace manufacturer’s installation instructions. Verify required Consulting Engineering Services, Incorporated Revised September 22, 2021 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 00 - 7 thickness with heat trace manufacturer’s installation instructions. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom of horizontal piping. L. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert Material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. M. Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) Insulation: 1. Push insulation on to piping. 2. Miter joints at elbows. 3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive. 4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered. 5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. N. Prepare pipe insulation for finish painting. Refer to Division 09. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT A. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate. B. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement. D. Equipment Containing Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: 1. Insulate entire equipment surfaces. 2. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. 3. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory- applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 4. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. E. Equipment Containing all Fluids Above Ambient Temperature: 1. Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets. 2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor barrier. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive. 3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. F. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not cover with insulation. G. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and replacement without damage. Consulting Engineering Services, Incorporated Revised September 22, 2021 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 00 - 8 3.04 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Provide insulation materials and thicknesses scheduled for each system type and pressure/temperature range. If more than one material is listed for a system, selection from materials listed is Division 22 option. B. Insulation for pre-insulated piping shall meet all specified requirements. C. Insulation thickness shall be coordinated with heat trace manufacturers’ installation instructions. Listed sizes on schedule shall be used as minimum sizes only. Domestic Hot Water Supply and Recirculation Systems Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thicknes s (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket 1-1/4 inches and smaller Refer to schedule on drawings.Pre-Molded Glass Fiber (PFG) 1-1/2 inches and larger Refer to schedule on drawings. ASJ- SSL Indoor: PVC for exposed piping finished space and mechanical rooms. 1-1/4 inches and smaller Refer to schedule on drawings.Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) 1-1/2 inches and larger Refer to schedule on drawings. ASJ- SSL Indoor: PVC for exposed piping finished space and mechanical rooms. Consulting Engineering Services, Incorporated Revised September 22, 2021 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 00 - 9 Domestic Cold Water Supply Systems Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket 1-1/4 inches and smaller Refer to schedule on drawings. Pre-Molded Glass Fiber (PFG) 1-1/2 inches and larger Refer to schedule on drawings. ASJ-SSL Indoor: PVC for exposed piping finished space and mechanical rooms. 1-1/4 inches and smaller Refer to schedule on drawings.Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) 1-1/2 inches and larger Refer to schedule on drawings. ASJ-SSL Indoor: PVC for exposed piping finished space and mechanical rooms. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 3. Natural Gas. 4. Flanges, unions, and couplings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Division 08 – Openings. C. Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection D. Division 09 - Finishes. E. Division 22 – Plumbing. F. Division 26 – Electrical: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. G. Division 31 - Earthwork H. Division 33 - Utilities. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS – Most Currently adopted versions and amendments for the location of the project. A. American National Standards Institute 1.ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; and addenda A&B. 2.ANSI Z223.1 - National Fuel Gas Code. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers 1.ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 2.ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300. 3.ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250. 4.ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 5.ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings. 6.ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. 7.ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 8.ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. 9.ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 2 PLUMBING PIPING 10.ASME BPVC-IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers. 11.ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications. C. American Society of Sanitary Engineering 1.ASSE 1003 - Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems. D. American Society for Testing and Materials 1.ASTM A47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2.ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3.ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 4.ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5.ASTM A234 - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 6.ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 7.ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 8.ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. 9.ASTM B43 - Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes. 10.ASTM B68 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed. 11.ASTM B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. 12.ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 13.ASTM B302 - Standard Specification for Threadless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. 14.ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube. 15.ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings. 16.ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 17.ASTM C1053 - Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications. 18.ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 19.ASTM D2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR- PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. 20.ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure- Rated Pipe (SDR Series). 21.ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 22.ASTM D2513 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings. 23.ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 24.ASTM D2609 - Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe. 25.ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 26.ASTM D2680 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 3 PLUMBING PIPING 27.ASTM D2683 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing. 28.ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 29.ASTM D2846 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems. 30.ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer & Solvent Cement) Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets. 31.ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 32.ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 33.ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 34.ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 35.ASTM F441 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 36.ASTM F442 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). 37.ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 38.ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 39.ASTM F679 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large- Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 40.ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 41.ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 42.ASTM F877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems. 43.ASTM F1281 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene/Aluminum/Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX-AL-PEX) Pressure Pipe;. 44.ASTM F1282 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene/Aluminum/Polyethylene (PE-AL-PE) Composite Pressure Pipe. 45.ASTM F1960 - Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. E. American Welding Society 1.AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2011-AMD 1. 2.AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel;. F. American Water Works Association 1.AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 2.AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. 3.AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 4.AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 5.AWWA C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 6.AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 7.AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. 8.AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 In. Through 12 In., for Water Transmission and Distribution; 2016. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 4 PLUMBING PIPING 9.AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 In. Through 3 In., for Water Service. G. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 1.CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications. 2.CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. H. International Code Council 1.ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Element. 2.ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements. 3.ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. 4.ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. I. Manufacturers Standardization Society 1.MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation. 2.MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves. 3.MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 4.MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5.MSS SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 20DA. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 6.MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 7.MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. J. National Sanitation Foundation 1.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 2.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. K. National Fire Protection Association 1. NFPA 54 – Natural Gas Code 2. NFPA 58 – Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code. L. Plastic Pipe Institute 1.PPI TR-4 - PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS), Strength Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings For Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01- General Requirements B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C. Welder Certificate: Include welder’s certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 5 PLUMBING PIPING D. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for this project, with design calculations for loadings and spacings. E. Sustainable Design Documentation: For soldered copper joints, submit installer's certification that the specified installation method and materials were used. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Division 01 -General Requirements. 2. Valve Repacking Kits: One for each type and size of valve. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations. D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX. E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 10 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 6 PLUMBING PIPING 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. C. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper, or ASME B16.23, sovent. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder. D. Brass Pipe: ASTM B43, chrome plated. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, chrome plated. 2. Joints: Mechanical compression. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, using one of the following joint types: 1. Flanged Joints: ASME B16.1 cast iron fittings. 2. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.4 cast iron fittings. 3. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.3 malleable iron fittings. 4. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved pipe, fittings of same material, and mechanical couplings. 2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 10 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. 3. Joints: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP copper/silver braze. B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26, cast bronze. 2. Joints: Flared. C. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51. 1. Fittings: Ductile or gray iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter rods. D. PE Pipe: ASTM D2239. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2609, PE. 2. Joints: Mechanical with stainless steel clamp. E. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe: ASTM F876 or ASTM F877. 1. Manufacturers: a. Uponor, Inc. b. Viega c. Zurn FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 7 PLUMBING PIPING d. Sioux Chief (Mass approved manufacturer) e. Bow Plumbing Group (Mass approved manufacturer) f. Heatlink Group Inc (Mass approved manufacturer) g. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. 2.PPI TR-4 Pressure Design Basis: a. 160 psig at maximum 73 degrees F. b. 100 psig at maximum 180 degrees F. c. 80 psig at maximum 200 degrees F. 3. Fittings: Brass and copper. 4. Fittings: Brass and engineered polymer (EP) ASTM F1960. 5. Joints: Mechanical compression fittings. 6. Joints: ASTM F1960 cold-expansion fittings. 2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. 3. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings. 4. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved or certified, utilizing EPDM, non-toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements. a. Manufacturers: 1) Mueller Streamline Co (Mass approved manufacturer) 2) Oatey Company (Mass approved manufacturer) 3) Cambridge Lee Industries (Mass approved manufacturer) 4) JM Eagle (Mass approved manufacturer) 5) Viega LLC 6) Substitutions: Division 01- General Requirements. 2.06 NATURAL GAS / LPG GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26, cast bronze. 2. Joints: Flared. 2.07 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 8 PLUMBING PIPING C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket. 1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606. 2. Housing Material: Provide ASTM A47 malleable iron, ductile iron, or galvanized. 3. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. 4. Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber suitable for operating temperature range from minus 20 degrees F to 180 degrees F. 5. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel. 6. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools. 7. Manufacturers: a. Grinnell Products, a Tyco Business b. Bristol Metals (Mass approved manufacturer) c. Viega LLC (Mass approved Manufacturer). d. Victaulic Company (Mass approved manufacturer) e. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier are required where two dissimilar metal products are connected within a system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 22 0516. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 220700. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 9 PLUMBING PIPING G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. 1. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Division 08 Openings. H. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than the local area’s frost depth of cover. I. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly and a minimum of 25 feet from an air intake; refer to Division 08 Openings. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. L. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. 1. Painting of interior plumbing systems and components are specified in Division 09 - Finishes. 2. Painting of exterior plumbing systems and components are specified in Division 09 - Finishes. M. Excavate in accordance with Division 31- Earthwork requirements. N. Backfill in accordance with Division 31 – Earthwork requirements O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. P. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. Q. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372. R. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. S. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Sanitary Drainage Piping (except Massachusetts): slope to sanitary drain at minimum of 1/8 inch per foot. B. Sanitary Drainage Piping (in Massachusetts): slope to sanitary drain at minimum of 1/4” per foot for horizontal piping 3” and smaller. Slope sanitary drain 1/8” per foot for horizontal piping larger than 3 inches. C. Pressure test natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. D. Pressure test LPG piping in accordance with NFPA 58. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 10 PLUMBING PIPING 3.05 SYSTEM FLUSHING A. The following system flushing criteria shall apply to all domestic water piping systems inclusive of hot water, cold water and hot water recirculation. B. Upon completion of installation of piping, and prior to disinfection, flush the piping systems with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet. C. Remove strainers and flow restrictors from fixtures prior to flushing and reinstall after flushing is complete D. Mixing valves located at fixtures shall not be installed until after flushing is complete. Provide temporary bypass connections as required. E. Provide isolation and temporary bypass piping for water heaters, expansion tanks, and other equipment. F. Run fixtures simultaneously for a minimum of 30 minutes or until no debris is evident. G. Flushing shall be considered satisfactory when no debris is evident after running water through a number 80 mesh screen. H. Contractor to notify engineer and owner a minimum of 72 hours before performing flushing. I. Once system has been successfully flushed, contractor shall provide a report to engineer documenting flushing procedure and results. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure acidity (pH) of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 1005 - 11 PLUMBING PIPING END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to the following specifications sections, which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications. 1. Division 01 - General Requirements 2. Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection: Product requirements for calking between fixtures and building components for placement by this section. 3. Division 11 – Equipment. 4. Division 12 – Furnishings: “Plastic Laminate-Clad Countertops” 5. Division 12 – Furnishings: “Solid Surface Countertops” 6. Division 22 – Plumbing. 7. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections to sensor valves and faucets specified by this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following plumbing specialties: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Trench drains. 4. Hose bibs. 5. Plumbing traps. 6. Recessed valve boxes. 7. Oil interceptors 8. Trap primers. 9. Stops 1.3 REFERENCES A.ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES B. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI 61 - Drinking Water System Components 2. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains. 3. ANSI A112.21.2 - Roof Drains. 4. ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors. 5. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 6. ANSI Z124.1 - Plastic Bathtub Units. 7. ANSI Z124.2 - Plastic Shower Units. 8. ANSI Z358.1 - Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment. 9. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. 10. ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. C. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 1010 - Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.6.3 – Floor and Trench Drains 2. ASME A112.6.4 – Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains 3. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings. 4. ASME A112.18.1M – Plumbing Fixture Fittings. 5. ASME A112.18.2 – Plumbing Waste Fittings. 6.ASME A112.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron and Enameled Steel Plumbing Fixtures. 7.ASME A112.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures. 8. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures 9. ASME A112.19.4M - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures. 10.ASME A112.19.5 - Flush Valves and Spuds for Water Closets, Urinals, and Tanks. 11.ASME A112.19.14 - Six-Liter Water Closets Equipped with Dual Flushing Device. 12.ASME A112.19.15 - Bathtub/Whirlpool Bathtubs with Pressure Sealed Doors. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES 13. ASME A112.19.19 Vitreous China Non-water Urinals 14. ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. 15. ASME A112.36.2M – Cleanouts. E. American Society of Testing and Materials 1. ASTM A888-20 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications 2. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. ASTM C1613-17 - Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Grease Interceptor Tanks 4. ASTM F409 – Standard Specifications for Thermoplastic and Replaceable Plastic Tube and Tubular Fittings. 5. ASTM F2649-14 - Standard Specification for Corrugated High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Grease Interceptor Tanks 6. ASTM D-4101 - Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials F. American Society of Safety Engineers 1. ASSE 1012, Performance Requirements For Backflow Preventers With An Intermediate Atmospheric Vent 2.ASSE 1013, Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers 3. ASSE 1016/ASME A112.1016/CSA B125.16-11, Performance Requirements for Automatic Compensating Valves for Individual Showers and Tub/Shower Combinations 4. ASSE 1017, Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution Systems 5. ASSE 1062, Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Flow Reduction (TAFR) Valves for Individual Fixture Fittings 6. ASSE 1066, Performance Requirements for Individual Pressure Balancing In-Line Valves for Individual Fixture Fittings 7. ASSE 1069, Performance Requirements for Automatic Temperature Control Mixing Valves 8. ASSE 1070/ASME A112.1070/CSA B125.70-15, Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices 9. ASSE 1071, Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Plumbed Emergency Equipment FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES G. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers: 1.ASHRAE Std 18 - Methods of Testing for Rating Drinking Water Coolers with Self- Contained Mechanical Refrigeration. H. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials: 1. IAPMO IGC 187 – Roof Drains with Integral Overflow Drain. 2.IAPMO Z124 - Plastic Plumbing Fixtures. 3. IAPMO Z403-13 - Terrazzo, Concrete, and Natural Stone Plumbing Fixtures I. International Surface Fabricators Association 1. ISFA 2-01 – Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material J. National Sanitation Foundation: 1.NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 2.NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. K. Plumbing Drainage institute: 1. PDI WH-201 – Water Hammer Arresters. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Product Data: Submit catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. D. Samples: Submit two lavatory supply fittings fixtures for color matching. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation methods and procedures. Indicate assembly and support requirements F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit appropriate evidence that materials used in potable water systems comply with the specified requirements. H. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. I. Waterless Urinals: Submit recommended frequency of maintenance and parts replacement, methods of cleaning, sources of replacement supplies and parts. J. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 5 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the state standard. B. Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. C. Provide plumbing fixture fittings in accordance with ASME A112.18.1 that prevent backflow from fixture into water distribution system. D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.9 MOCKUP A. Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Construct mockup of typical bathroom group. C. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer. D. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work. 1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Accept products on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect installed fixtures and specialties from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and specialties, and prevent use. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 6 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.12 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for plumbing fixtures. 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Furnish two sets of faucet washers flush valve service kits lavatory supply fittings shower heads toilet seats. C. Provide two loose keys for hose bibs and wall hydrants. D. Furnish supply of chemicals for treatment and testing during warranty period of solar hot water system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. See schedule on drawings for additional requirements and accessories. B. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.2 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts. 2. Zurn. 3. Apollo Valves B. Substitutions: See Division 01 - General Requirements. C.ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent. D. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Josam. 2. J.R. Smith. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 7 PLUMBING FIXTURES 3. Zurn. 4. Watts. 5. Wade. 6. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. B. ASME A112.36.2M; Cleanouts: Cast iron body with adjustable scoriated nickel bronze top and vandal proof screws. C. Interior Finished Wall Cleanouts: Line type with cast iron body, round epoxy coated gasketed cover and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. D. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Caulked or threaded type. Provide stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. E. Cleanout plugs shall be screwed brass installed either in cast iron-caulked ferrules or directly into threaded drainage fittings. Above floor cleanouts on stacks may be "Dandy" cleanouts. F. Refer to other Sections of the Specification for access doors which may be used in lieu of covers specified below. G. Cleanouts are to be accessible and locations coordinated with cabinetry, shelving and other architectural details. DO NOT place cleanouts where they will not be readily accessible. H. 2.4 FLOOR DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Josam. 2. J.R. Smith 3. Watts. 4. Wade. 5. Zurn 6. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. B. ANSI A112.21.1, Round adjustable nickel-brass strainer, cast iron body, cast iron drainage flange, flashing clamp, and sediment bucket, provide with trap primer. C. ANSI A112.21.1. Square, cast iron, drainage flange with weep holes, and internal cast iron dome strainer: Provide trap primer. D. Drains shall have traps. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 8 PLUMBING FIXTURES 2.5 TRENCH DRAINS A. ASME A112.6.3; Trench drain system assembled from factory fabricated, polymer concrete castings in standard lengths and variable depths, with integral joint flanges and integral grating support rails; includes joint gaskets and grating. 2.6 HOSE BIBS A. Manufacturers: 1. Woodford. 2. Josam. 3. Wade. 4. Zurn. 5. Watts. 6. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. B. ANSI/ASSE 1011; Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange. 2.7 PLUMBING TRAPS A. Manufacturers: 1. McGuire Manufacturing Co. 2. Josam. 3. Wade. 4. Zurn. 5. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. B. ASTM A888-20; Fixture traps shall be 17 gauge or heavier material; other traps shall be of same size and material as pipe on which trap occurs. C. Provide cleanout for each trap. Running traps shall have double hubs for two cleanouts. D. Provide deep traps with 4” minimum seal, for floor drains. 2.8 RECESSED VALVE BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Woodford. 2. Josam. 3. Wade. Commented [DS1]: MFG? FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 9 PLUMBING FIXTURES 4. Zurn. 5. Watts. 6. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. B. ASME A112.18.1; C. Refrigerator: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass water control valve. D. Washing Machine: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass water control valve, socket for 2 inch waste, and cover. 2.9 OIL INTERCEPTOR A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts. 2. Zurn. 3. Thermaco. 4. Old Castle. 5. J.R. Smith. 6. Highland Tank 7. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. B. ASTM XXX C. Epoxy coated cast iron body and secured cover with removable stainless steel sediment bucket. 2.10 TRAP PRIMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Woodford. 2. Josam. 3. Wade. 4. Zurn. 5. Watts. 6. PPP. 7. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. Commented [DS2]: check FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 10 PLUMBING FIXTURES B. ASSE 1018; Corrosion resistant brass, temperature range –40 to 450 degrees, ½” male inlet and ½” female outlet, pressure operating range 35 to 75 psig. 2.11 STOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brass Craft. 2. Watts. 3. Nibco. 4. McGuire. 5. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. B. ASME A112.18.1; C. Chrome plated angle brass supply stop valve with full turn brass stem, lead free, inlet shall be 1/2-inch sweat, outlet shall be 3/8-inch compression. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - General Requirements B. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics. D. Confirm millwork is constructed with adequate provision for installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. B. Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install Work in accordance with State of Massachusetts standards. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 11 PLUMBING FIXTURES D. Provide chrome plated rigid supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons. E. Install components level and plumb. F. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. G. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, color to match fixture. H. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. I. For ADA accessible water closets, install flush valve with handle to wide side of stall. J. Refer to architectural drawing for required mounting heights of fixtures. K. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. L. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. M. Cleanouts shall be same size as the pipes served, up to 4 inches; 5 and 6 inch pipes shall have 4 inch cleanouts; 8 inch pipes shall have 6 inch cleanouts; 10 inch pipes and larger shall have 8 inch cleanouts. N. Install components level and plumb. O. Install water hammer arrestors with isolation valve in accessible locations. P. Trap primers shall be installed to serve all floor drains, provide distribution units as required for all drains. Q. Provide 1/2 grate cover on all floor sinks as required for discharge pipe into floor sink, cut inlet pipe on 45 degree angle. R. Trap primer connections shall be installed on cold water piping 1 inch diameter or less. 3.4 INTERCEPTORS A. Provide sediment interceptors for all art room sinks, maintain clearances as required by the manufacturer. 3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop-drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough in and installation. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 22 4000 - 12 PLUMBING FIXTURES 3.7 CLEANING A. Division 01 - General Requirements: Product Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Division 01 - General Requirements: Product Requirements: Protecting installed construction. B. Do not permit use of fixtures before final acceptance. 3.9 COMMISSIONING OF EQUIPMENT A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative, who is familiar with this project, to participate and assist, if necessary, in the functional performance testing of this equipment with the Commissioning Agent. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES SECTION 23 0400 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to all Divisions 23 Sections. B. This section applies to certain sections of Division 26, "Electrical," and this section applies to all sections of Division 23, "Mechanical" of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. C. The Drawings of other trades (Architectural, Food Service, Structural, Landscape, Civil, Mechanical, Fire Protection and Plumbing) shall be examined for coordination and familiarity of work with other Contractors. Any duplication or omission of provisions in this project should be brought to the attention of the Owners prior to Bidding. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are a part of this Division and are to be considered a part of this Contract. B. Where items of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are repeated in other Sections of the Specifications, it is merely intended to qualify or to call particular attention to them. It is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted if not repeated therein. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors supplying labor and/or equipment and/or materials as required under each Section of this Division. Where conflicts exist between the drawings and the specifications or between this section of the specifications and other sections, the more stringent or higher cost option shall apply. 1.03 INTENT A. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. Provide all parts necessary for the intended use, fully complete and operational, and installed in professional manner in accordance with the design intent. B. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on drawings but mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete and ready for operation as determined by good trade practice even if not particularly specified, shall be furnished, delivered and installed under their respective Divisions without any additional expense to the Owner. C. Minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary for proper installation and operation shall be included in the work as though they were hereinafter shown or specified. D. Work under each Section shall include giving written notice to the Owner and Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable; in violation of laws, FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; and any necessary items of work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually agreed that work under each Section includes the cost of all required items for the accepted, satisfactory functioning of the entire system without extra compensation. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. No Exceptions Taken – reviewed and determined to be in general conformance with contract documents. B. “Approved equal” mean any product which in the opinion of the Engineer is equal in quality, arrangement, appearance, and performance to the product specified. C. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Engineer," "requested by the Engineer," and similar phrases. D. “Finished” refers to all rooms and areas to be specified to receive architectural treatment as indicated on the drawings. All rooms and areas not covered, including underground tunnels and areas above ceilings shall be considered not finished, unless otherwise noted. E. “Furnish” or “supply” shall mean purchase, deliver to, and off-load at the job site, ready to be installed including where appropriate all necessary interim storage and protection. F. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended. G. “Install” shall mean set in place complete with all mounting facilities and connections as necessary ready for normal use or service. H. “Product” shall mean any item of equipment, material, fixture, apparatus, appliance or accessory installed under this Division. I. “Provide” shall mean furnish (or supply) and install as necessary. J. Regulation: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. K. Remove: The term “remove” means “to disconnect from its present position, remove from the premises and to dispose of in a legal manner.” L. Special Warranties: The term “Special Warranties” are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. M. Standard Product Warranties: The term “Standard Product Warranties” are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES N. “Subcontractor” means specifically the subcontractor working under this Division. Other Contractors are specifically designated “Plumbing Subcontractor”, “General Contractor” and so on. Note: Take care to ascertain limits of responsibility for connecting equipment which requires connections by two or more trades. O. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction proposed by the Contractor are considered requests for "substitutions." P. “Wiring” shall mean cable assembly, raceway, conductors, fittings and any other necessary accessories to make a complete wiring system. 1.05 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The two dimensional drawings govern the construction. They show the design intent and are part of the Contract Documents. BIM models are not part of contract documents. They are developed for convenience only. B. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the Contract. Consult the Architectural Drawings and Details for exact location of fixtures and equipment; where same are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect. (Do not scale the drawings) C. Work under each Section shall closely follow Drawings in layout of work; check Drawings of other Divisions to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom; where space conditions appear inadequate, Owner and Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with installations. D. The Owner may, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and/or for proper execution of the work. 1.06 DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS A. Where variances occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within either of the Documents, the item or arrangement of better quality, shall be included in the Contract price. The Owner and Engineer shall decide on the item and the manner in which the work shall be installed. B. Where Drawings or Specifications conflict or are unclear, submit clarification request in writing before Award of Contract. Otherwise, Architect's interpretation of Contract Documents shall be final, and no additional compensation shall be permitted due to discrepancies or un-clarities thus resolved. C. Where Drawings or Specifications do not coincide with manufacturers' recommendations or with applicable codes and standards, submit clarification request in form of an RFI before installation. Otherwise, make changes in installed work required for compliance with manufacturer instructions or codes and standards within Contract Price. D. Where insufficient information exists in the documents to precisely describe a certain component or subsystem, or the routing of a component or its coordination with other building elements, where notification required by Paragraph (B) above has not been submitted, provide the specific component or subsystem with all parts necessary for the intended use, fully complete and operational, and installed in professional manner either concealed or exposed in accordance with the design intent. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES E. Where discrepancies exist between the mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical drawings in regards to what trade owns disconnects or starters, the discrepancy shall be brought to the Architect’s attention in accordance with paragraph (B) above. If the scope is not resolved prior to the Award of Contract, Division 26 shall provide such items. 1.07 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Reference Standard Compliance 1. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. 2. Independent Testing Organization Certificate: In lieu of the label or listing indicated above, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Engineer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. B. Wherever Codes and/or Standards are mentioned in these Specifications, the latest applicable edition or revision of the local building or life safety code shall be followed. C. The following Standards shall be used where referenced by the following abbreviations: AABC Associated Air Balance Council ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists ADC Air Diffusion Council AGA American Gas Association AIA American Institute of Architects AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES CGA Compressed Gas Association CSA Canadian Standards Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturing Association EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual FSSC Federal Specification HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISO Insurance Services Office MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America NBS National Bureau of Standards NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NOFI National Oil Fuel Institute NSC National Safety Council NSF National Sanitation Foundation OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute SBI Steel Boiler Industry (Division of Hydronics Institute) SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association STI Steel Tank Institute UL Underwriters’ Laboratories D. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the NFPA, the requirements of the local utility companies, the recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction and the requirements of all Governmental departments having jurisdiction. E. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and Drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether shown on Drawings and/or specified or not. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES 1.08 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits; and pay all Government and State sales taxes and fees where applicable, and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with the work, file all necessary Drawings, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all Governmental and State departments having jurisdiction, obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work, and deliver a copy to the Owner and Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. 1.09 EQUIPMENT EQUIVALENTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Certain manufacturers of material, apparatus or appliances are indicated in the drawings and specifications for this project. These items have been used as the basis of design, and as a convenience in fixing the minimum standard of quality, finish and design that is required. If the Contractors uses an “approved equal” alternative to the basis of design, and if the features of that alternative have an impact on other components of the Project, the Contractor shall include the necessary adjustments in those components, whether for architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, fire protection, or any other elements, plus any adjustments for difference in performance. B. Where no specific make of material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be submitted for Architect and Engineer review. C. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item that is different from the basis of design in the Drawings and specifications, and that will require the redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other component of the mechanical, electrical, or architectural layout, the Contractor shall provide the necessary redesign of those components. D. Where the Contractor proposes to deviate (provide an equivalent or request for substitution) from the basis of design scheduled equipment or materials as hereinafter specified or shown on the drawings, they are required to submit a requested for substitution in writing. The Contractor shall state in their request whether it is a substitution, equivalent or a non approved equivalent to that specified and the amount of credit or extra cost involved. A copy of said request shall be included in the Base Bid with manufacturer’s equipment cuts. The Base Bid shall be based on using the materials and equipment as specified with no exceptions. E. If an alternative or substitute item results in a difference in quantity and arrangement of structure, piping, ductwork, valves, pumps, insulation, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and install any such additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner including any costs added to other trades due to the equivalent change from the basis of design detailed in the drawings or included within the specifications. F. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as a “substitution” shall meet the following requirements: G. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received in writing 14 days before the bid date. Requests received later than 14 days before the bid date may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Engineer/Owner. Once the Contractor submits a complete request for substitution as determined by the engineer, FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES the engineer reserves the right to request the time necessary to evaluate the request for substitution and review it with the Owner. H. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. h. Engineer's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the Engineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance of a product substitution will be in the form of an Addendum. i. Other Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Engineer when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Engineer; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1) The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 2) The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 3) A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 8 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES 1.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Provide Submittals in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and as indicated in the following. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1. Allow ten business days for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Engineer will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. 3. Allow ten business days for reprocessing each submittal. 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. D. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. Submittals shall be arranged in order of specification sections. 1. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Engineer. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number, title and paragraph of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. E. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Engineer using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 9 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES F. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, the Engineer will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. G. Action Stamp: The Engineer will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, to indicate the action taken. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit neatly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. The Contractor shall submit for review detailed shop drawings of all equipment and material specified in each section and coordinated ductwork layouts. No material or equipment may be delivered to the job site or installed until the Contractor has received shop drawings for the particular material or equipment which have been properly reviewed. Shop drawings shall be submitted within 60 days after award of Contract before any material or equipment is purchased. The Contractor shall submit for review all shop drawings to be incorporated in the Mechanical Contract. C. Provide shop drawings for all devices specified under equipment specifications for all systems. Shop drawings shall include manufacturers’ names, catalog numbers, cuts, diagrams, dimensions, identification of products and materials included, compliance with specified standards, notation of coordination requirements, notation of dimensions established by field measurement and other such descriptive data as may be required to identify and accept the equipment. A complete list in each category (example: all fixtures), of all shop drawings, catalog cuts, material lists, etc., shall be submitted to the Engineer at one time. No consideration will be given to a partial shop drawing submittal. D. When a submittal could involve more than one trade, e.g., valves, piping, etc., the submitted shall be separated by traded involved, ie. HVAC, plumbing, fire protection, etc. E. Where multiple quantities or types of equipment are being submitted, provide a cover sheet (with a list of contents) on the submittal identifying the equipment or material being submitted. F. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary templates, patterns, etc., for installation work and for the purpose of making adjoining work conform; furnish setting plans and shop details to other trades as required. G. “No Exception Taken” rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, review does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Verify available space prior to submitting shop drawings. Review of shop drawings shall not apply to quantity of material. H. After shop drawings have been reviewed, with no exceptions taken, no further changes will be allowed without the written consent of the Engineer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES I. Shop drawing submittal sheets which may show items that are not being furnished shall have those items crossed off to clearly indicate which items will be furnished. J. Bidders shall not rely on any verbal clarification of the Drawings and/or Specifications. Any questions shall be referred to the Engineer in writing at least five (5) working days prior to Bidding to allow for issuance of an Addendum. K. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. L. All submittals shall be made in electronic PDF format with searchable OCR (Optical Character Recognition) format. This excludes scanned and faxed materials. 1.12 COORDINATION DRAWINGS AND BIM MODEL A. Coordination drawings are required for all mechanical and electrical trades. The content and procedures described in Division 01 shall be followed, with the additional requirements specifically for the mechanical and electrical trades as described in this Section. If a BIM model is not used on this project, the below requirements shall be accomplished in CAD. B. Prepare coordination drawings accordance with Division 1, at 1 to 1 (full) scale prepared at ¼” = 1’ -0” detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. The Contractor shall indicate the proposed locations of piping, conduit, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the following: a. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. b. Equipment connections and support details. c. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. d. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. e. Sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases. C. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. D. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. E. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling- mounted items. F. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall sign and date each coordination drawing prior to submission. G. Work shall not be performed until coordination drawings have been approved by the architect and engineer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 11 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES H. Electronic copies of the MEP floor plans and/or BIM model are available to use as a basis for preparing coordination drawings and can be provided by the Engineer. If the Contractor elects to obtain the Engineers electronic files an Electronic Drawing File Release Form must be submitted. This form must be signed by the Contractor, Owner, and Architect. Upon receipt of a signed copy of the Electronic Drawing File Release Form, the Engineer will provide copies of the electronic files for the Contractor’s use. A copy of the Electronic Drawing File Release Form is appended to the end of this specification section I. Review by Engineer of coordination drawings is limited to confirming that requirements for coordination and preparation of plans have been complied with by the Contractor and shall not diminish responsibility under this Contract for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical and other related work. 1.13 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS A. All work shall be carried out in conjunction with other trades and full cooperation shall be given in order that all work may proceed with a minimum of delay and interference. Particular emphasis is placed on timely installation of major apparatus and furnishing other Contractors, especially the Contractor or Construction Manager, with information as to openings, chases, sleeves, bases, inserts, equipment locations, panels, etc., required by other trades. B. The Contractors are required to examine all of the Project Drawings and mutually arrange work so as to avoid interference with the work of other trades. In general, ductwork, HVAC piping, sprinkler piping and drainage lines take precedence over water, gas and electrical conduits. The Engineer shall make final decisions regarding the arrangement of work which cannot be agreed upon by the Contractors. C. Where the work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to or will interfere with work of other trades, the Contractors will cooperate in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. D. If the work under a Section is installed before coordinating with other Divisions or Sections or so as to cause interference with work of other Sections, the necessary changes to correct the condition shall be made by the Contractor causing the interference without extra charge to the Owner. E. The two dimensional drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate general arrangements of mechanical systems and other work, and are intended to convey sufficient information for skilled contractors and tradespeople to furnish and install complete systems. They are not intended to be absolutely precise; they are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, and component. The purpose of the drawings is to indicate a systems concept, the main components of the systems, and the approximate geometrical relationships. Based on the systems concept, the main components, and the approximate geometrical relationships, provide all other components and materials to make the systems fully complete, coordinated with other systems and the structure and space available, and operational. Similarly, the drawings do not show all offsets required for coordination nor do they show the exact routings and locations needed to coordinate with structure and other trades in order to avoid interferences and to meet ceiling heights and other Architectural requirements. Establish and provide offsets, changes in direction, and exact routings to coordinate all systems. Where conflicts or potential conflicts exist and engineering guidance is desired, submit a “Request for Information” (RFI). FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 12 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES F. Controls contractor shall coordinate and sequences of operation with all other trades as necessary to provide a complete and functioning system. 1.14 QUALITY CONTROL A. Service Support: The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. B. Modification of References: In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. C. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work together with all skilled tradespeople, fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers and laborers required to unload, transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test each system. D. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, all equipment and materials shall be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer and in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends. E. All labor for installation of mechanical systems shall be performed by experienced, skilled tradespeople under the supervision of a licensed journeyman foreman. All work shall be of a quality consistent with good trade practice and shall be installed in a neat, professional manner. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any work which, in their opinion, has been installed in a substandard, dangerous or unserviceable manner. The Contractor shall replace said work in a satisfactory manner at no extra cost to the Owner. 1.15 SHUTDOWNS A. When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existing operating system, the connection of the new system shall be performed at such time as designated by the Owner. B. The Engineer and the Owner shall be notified in writing of the estimated duration of the shutdown period at least ten (10) days in advance of the date the work is to be performed. C. Work shall be arranged for continuous performance whenever possible. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, including overtime if required, to assure that existing operating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make necessary connections. 1.16 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General: Provide new materials and equipment; if acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. C. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. D. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A" fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures. E. Utilities: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where the company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the company's recommendations. 1. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Engineer, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. F. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. G. Temporary Heat-Cool-Dehumidification: Provide temporary services required by construction activities, for curing or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate temporary services to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. The building’s permanent HVAC systems shall not be used for these purposes. H. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. I. Termination and Removal: Unless the Engineer requires that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. 1.17 Equipment Access A. Appliances, controls devices, heat exchangers and HVAC system components that utilize energy shall be accessible for inspection, service, repair and replacement without disabling the function of a fire-resistance-rated assembly or removing permanent construction, other appliances, venting systems or any other piping or ducts not connected to the appliance being inspected, serviced, repaired or replaced. A level working space not less than 30 inches deep and 30 inches wide (762 mm by 762 mm) shall be provided in front of the control side to service an appliance. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 14 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES 1.18 BUILDING FLUSH-OUT A. Building flush-out shall begin after construction ends and finishes are installed but prior to building occupancy. Prior to building flush-out, HVAC systems shall be balanced per Specification Section 23 05 93. Flush-out shall not occur until contractor receives permission to proceed from the Owner or Owner’s representative.. B. Building flush-out procedures shall include continuously operating all the building’s new ventilation systems at maximum design outside air flow rates. For constant volume HVAC systems, ventilation systems shall operate at maximum design supply air flow rates. G. LEED REQUIREMENTS 1. Path 1. Before occupancy a. Install new filtration media and perform a building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of gross floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60°F and no higher than 80°F and relative humidity no higher than 60%. Controls contractor to modify sequence of operations to allow for these conditions as needed. 2. Path 2. During occupancy a. If occupancy is desired before the flush-out is completed, the space may be occupied only after delivery of a minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot (1 066 260 liters of outdoor air per square meter) of gross floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60°F (15°C) and no higher than 80°F (27°C) and relative humidity no higher than 60%. Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cubic foot per minute (cfm) per square foot of outdoor air (1.5 liters per second per square meter of outdoor air) or the design minimum outdoor air rate determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, whichever is greater. During each day of the flush-out period, ventilation must begin at least three hours before occupancy and continue during occupancy. These conditions must be maintained until a total of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outdoor air (4 267 140 liters of outdoor air per square meter) has been delivered to the space. H. Contractor shall include hourly trend log and record during duration of building flush out. I. Log to include hours, airflow, temperature, and RH% of space and be summarized to confirm performance. J. Install new filtration media at end of flush-out and reset controls sequence of operation as needed. K. CT HIGH PERFORMANCE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS 1. After construction ends and with all interior finishes installed but prior to building occupancy, flush the building continuously for at least ten days with outside air while maintaining an internal temperature between 60°F and 78°F and relative humidity no higher than 60%. Do not ―bake out‖ the building by increasing the temperature of the space. Alternatively, use the following strategy: Flush out each space separately until 3,500 cubic feet of outside air per square foot of floor space has been delivered to that space. The space shall then be ventilated at the rate of 0.3 cubic feet per minute per square foot of floor space or the design FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 15 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater. This shall be performed for a minimum of three hours prior to occupancy and then during occupancy until a total of 14,000 cubic feet of outside air per square foot of floor area has been delivered to that space. a. Compliance Assistance for Optional Strategy: Perform a building flush- out by supplying outside air continuously for ten days while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60˚F but no warmer than 78°Fand relative humidity no higher than 60%. b. Alternative Compliance Pathway for Optional Strategy: Flush out each space separately with outside air until 3,500 cubic feet of outside air has been delivered for each square foot of floor area. Then ventilate the area at the rate of 0.3 cubic feet of outside air per square foot of floor space or the design outside air rate, whichever is greater, at least three hours prior to occupancy. Maintain that ventilation rate until a total of 14,000 cubic feet of outside air per square foot of floor areas has been delivered to the space. L. Contractor shall include hourly log and record during duration of building flush out. M. Log to include hours, airflow, temperature, and RH% of space and be summarized to confirm performance. N. Install new filtration media at end of flush-out and reset controls sequence of operation as needed. 1.19 PROJECT PHASING A. Work under each Section shall include all necessary temporary connections, equipment, piping, heating, temperature control work, fire stopping, water heaters, labor, and material as necessary to accommodate the phasing of Construction as developed by the General Contractor or Construction Manager and approved by the Owner. All existing systems that pass-thru an area of the building shall remain operational during all phases of construction. No extra compensation shall be granted the Contractor for work required to maintain existing systems operational or to accommodate the construction phasing of the project. 1.20 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workpeople and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until the facility has been accepted by the Owner. Protect work against theft, injury or damage and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place and completely connecting equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 16 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt and/or damage by tradespeople or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.21 ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. After all the equipment and accessories to be furnished are in place, they shall be put in final adjustment and subjected to such operating tests so as to assure the Engineer that they are in proper adjustment and in satisfactory, permanent operating condition. B. Where requested by the Engineer, a factory-trained service representative shall inspect the installation and assist in the initial startup and adjustment to the equipment. The period of these services shall be for such time as necessary to secure proper installation and adjustments. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation, the service representative shall supervise the initial operation of the equipment and instruct personnel responsible for operation and maintenance of the equipment. The service representative shall notify the Contractor in writing that the equipment was installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations and is operating as intended by the manufacturer. 1.22 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts and equipment of all foreign substances, oils, burrs, solder, flux, etc., inside and out before being placed in operation. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and/or remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired or replaced when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped in an acceptable manner to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. E. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 17 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES F. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove and dispose of ALL waste materials, packaging material, skids etc. from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner in accordance with municipal, state and federal regulations. G. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. 1.23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE A. Upon completion of all work and tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating his system and equipment for a period specified under each applicable Section of this Division. During this period, the contractor shall fully instruct the Owner or the Owner’s representative in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The Contractor shall give at least seven (7) days notice to the Owner and the Engineer in advance of this period. B. The Contractor shall include the maintenance schedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this Division. C. The Contractor shall physically demonstrate procedures for all routine maintenance of all equipment furnished under each respective Section to assure accessibility to all devices. D. An authorized manufacturer’s representative shall attest in writing that the equipment has been properly installed prior to startup of any major equipment. The following equipment will require this inspection: pumps; air conditioning equipment, controls, air handling equipment, compressors, boilers etc. These letters shall be bound into the operating and maintenance books. E. Refer to individual trade Sections for any other particular requirements related to operating instructions. F. Demonstration shall be recorded on USB Flash drive turned over to the Owner. Video recording shall be done in a professional manner with quality video (1080p resolution) and clear audible sound. 1.24 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and as follows. The Contractor shall prepare up to six (6) copies of a complete maintenance and operating instructions manual, bound in booklet form. Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information and designation partitions with identification tabs. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. B. Manual shall include the following: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 18 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing and operating instructions including lubrication charts and schedules. 5. Emergency and safety instructions. 6. Spare parts list. 7. Copies of warranties. 8. Wiring diagrams. 9. Recommended "turn around" cycles. 10. Inspection procedures. 11. Approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. 12. Equipment Start-up Reports. 13. Temperature control diagrams and written sequences of operations. 14. Balance reports. C. Include in the manual, a tabulated equipment schedule for all equipment. Schedule shall include pertinent data such as: make, model number, serial number, voltage, normal operating current, belt size, filter quantities and sizes, bearing number, etc. Schedule shall include maintenance to be done and frequency. D. Maintenance and instruction manuals shall be submitted to the Owner at the same time as the seven (7) day notice is given prior to the instruction period. 1.25 ACCEPTANCES A. The equipment, materials, quality, design and arrangement of all work installed under the Mechanical Sections shall be subject to the review of the Engineer. B. Within 30 days after the awarding of a Contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for review, a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the work under the Mechanical Sections. The intent to use the exact manufacturers and models specified does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of submitting such a list. C. If extensive or unacceptable delivery time is expected on a particular item of equipment specified, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer, in writing, within 30 days of award of the Contract. In such instances, equipment substitutions may be made pending acceptance by the Engineer or the Owner’s representative. D. Where any specific material, process or method of construction or manufactured article is specified by reference to the catalog number of a manufacturer, the Specifications are to be used as a guide and are not intended to take precedence over the basic duty and performance specified or noted on the Drawings. In all cases, the Mechanical Contractor shall verify the duty specified with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review. Equipment characteristics are to be used as mandatory requirements where the Contractor proposes to use an acceptable equivalent. E. If material or equipment is installed before it is reviewed and/or approved, the Contractor shall be liable for its removal and replacement at no extra charge to the Owner if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material or equipment does not meet the intent of, or standard of quality implied by, the Drawings and Specifications. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 19 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES F. Failure on the part of the Engineer to reject shop drawings or to reject work in progress shall not be interpreted as acceptance of work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications. Work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications shall be corrected whenever it is discovered. 1.26 RECORD DRAWINGS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Engineer's reference during normal working hours. B. Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Items to be indicated include but are not limited to: 1. Dimensional change 2. Revision to drawing detail 3. Location and depth of underground utility 4. Revision to pipe routing 5. Revision to electrical circuitry 6. Actual equipment location 7. Duct size and routing 8. Location of concealed internal utility 9. Changes made by Change Order 10. Details not on original Contract Drawing 11. Information on concealed elements which would be difficult to identify or measure later C. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. D. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. E. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. F. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. G. Final record documents shall be prepared in the latest electronic version and on USB Flash drive of all drawings and a clean set of reproducible paper copies shall be turned over to the Owner at the completion of the work. 1.27 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. The following general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties are to be included: 1. General close-out requirements included in Division 1. 2. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installation that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -50. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 20 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES 3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. C. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime Contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own Contract. 1.28 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, right and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. E. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. F. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. G. Submit written warranties to the Engineer prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Engineer's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Engineer. H. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Engineer within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 21 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES I. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Engineer for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -50 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. J. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. K. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS," the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. 3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. 1.29 GUARANTEES A. The Contractor shall guarantee all material and installation quality under these Specifications and the Contract for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by Owner. During this guarantee period, all defects developing through faulty equipment, materials or installation quality shall be corrected or replaced immediately by this Contractor without expense to the Owner. Such repairs or replace- ments shall be made to the Engineer's satisfaction. B. Contractor shall provide name, address, and phone number of all contractors and subcontractors and associated equipment they provided. 1.30 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Submit specific warranties, quality bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents in accordance with Division 1. B. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. C. Complete start-up testing of systems, including measuring and documenting all required startup checklist requirements documented in installation and maintenance instructions by the equipment manufacturer, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. D. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 22 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES E. Field Observation Procedures: On receipt of a request for an Engineers Field Observation, the Engineer will advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Engineer will advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. Contractor shall submit written response to each corrective item including specific photos prior to final Engineering inspection. 1. The Engineer will repeat the Field Observation when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed list of unfulfilled items will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0400 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TRADES Electronic Drawing File Release Form DELIVERY OF FILES FOR: Project Name In accepting and utilizing any drawings or other data on any form of electronic media generated and provided by the Design Professional, the Client covenants and agrees that all such drawings and data are instruments of service of the Design Professional, who shall be deemed the author of the drawings and data, and shall retain all common law, statutory law and other rights, including copyrights. The Client further agrees not to use these drawings and data, in whole or in part, for any purpose or project other than the project which is the subject of this Agreement. The Client agrees to waive all claims against the Design Professional resulting in any way from any unauthorized changes or reuse of the drawings and data for any other project by anyone other than the Design Professional. In addition, the Client agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to indemnify and hold the Design Professional harmless from any damage, liability or cost, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs of defense, arising from any changes made by anyone other than the Design Professional or from any reuse of the drawings and data without the prior written consent of the Design Professional. Under no circumstances shall transfer of the drawings and other instruments of service on electronic media for use by the Client be deemed a sale by the Design Professional, and the Design Professional makes no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. _____________________________________________ ________________________ Client’s Signature Date _____________________________________________ Company - Title _____________________________________________ ________________________ Architects’ Signature Date _____________________________________________ Firm - Title _____________________________________________ ________________________ Owner’s Signature Date _____________________________________________ Company - Title FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe hangers and supports. B. Duct hangers and supports C. Hanger rods. D. Inserts. E. Flashing. F. Formed steel channel. G. Equipment bases and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. 3. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. F. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall design supports for multiple pipes and/or ducts, including pipe and duct stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and fluid. B. Contractor shall design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, and pipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers. B. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. C. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. D. Welding certificates. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc. 2. National Pipe Hanger Corporation 3. Empire Industries, Inc. 4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products Inc. 5. Michigan Hanger Co. 6. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.02 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Shall be in accordance with SMACNA's 2005 "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" except non-engineered wire hangers are not permitted. Engineered cable support systems may be used if they meet SMACNA, Ductmate or approved equal. B. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. C. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. D. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's 2005 "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct. E. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT F. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. G. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. H. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. I. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. 2.04 THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. Insert shall be capable of supporting weight of pipe, insulations and fluid without crushing. B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.05 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Empire Industries, Inc. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. ITW Ramset/Red Head. 5. MKT Fastening, LLC. 6. Powers Fasteners. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. B. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping. C. Equipment Supports: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes. D. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. E. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 2.07 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. 2. B-Line Systems 3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division 4. Unistrut Corp. B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system specific sections, install the following types: 1. MSS Type 1 - Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers: For suspension of non- insulated or insulated stationary pipes, 2 inch to 30 inch size. 2. MSS Type 2 - Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps: For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, 4 inch to 16 inch size, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. MSS Type 3 - Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps: For suspension of pipes, 3/4 inch to 24 inch size, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. MSS Type 4 - Steel Pipe Clamps: For suspension of cold and hot pipes, 1/2 inch to 24 inch size, if little or no insulation is required. 5. MSS Type 5 - Pipe Hangers: For suspension of pipes, 1/2 inch to 4 inch size, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. MSS Type 12 - Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps: For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, 3/8 inch to 3 inch size. 7. MSS Type 24 - U-Bolts: For support of heavy pipes, 1/2 inch to 30 inch. 8. MSS Type 26 - Clips: For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 9. MSS Type 36 - Pipe Saddle Supports: For support of pipes, 4 inch to 36 inch size, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 10. MSS Type 37 - Pipe Stanchion Saddles: For support of pipes, 4 inch to 36 inch size, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U- bolt to retain pipe. 11. MSS Type 38 - Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports: For stanchion-type support for pipes, 2-1/2 inch to 36 inch size, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 12. MSS Type 41 - Single Pipe Rolls: For suspension of pipes, 1 inch to 30 inch size, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 13. MSS Type 43 - Adjustable Roller Hangers: For suspension of pipes, 2-1/2 inch to 20 inch size, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 14. MSS Type 44 - Complete Pipe Rolls: For support of pipes, 2 inch to 42 inch size, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 15. MSS Type 45 - Pipe Roll and Plate Units: For support of pipes, 2 inch to 24 inch, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 16. MSS Type 46 - Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units: For support of pipes, 2 inch to 30 inch size, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. MSS Type 13 - Steel Turnbuckles: For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. MSS Type 14 - Steel Clevises: For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. MSS Type 15 - Swivel Turnbuckles: For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. MSS Type 16 - Malleable-Iron Sockets: For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. MSS Type 17 - Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. MSS Type 18 - Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts: For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. MSS Type 19 - Top-Beam C-Clamps: For use under roof installations with bar- joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. MSS Type 20 - Side-Beam or Channel Clamps: For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. MSS Type 21 - Center-Beam Clamps: For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. MSS Type 22 - Welded Beam Attachments: For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. MSS Type 23 - C-Clamps: For structural shapes. 7. MSS Type 25 - Top-Beam Clamps: For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. MSS Type 27 - Side-Beam Clamps: For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. MSS Type 28 - Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts: For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. MSS Type 29 - Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts: For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. MSS Type 30 - Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces: For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. MSS Type 34 - Side-Beam Brackets: For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. MSS Type 57 - Plate Lugs: For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. MSS Type 58 - Horizontal Travelers: For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. MSS Type 39 - Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles: To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. MSS Type 40 - Protection Shields: Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. J. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. K. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. 3.02 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System for Multiple Hangers: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs. 3. Floor Support: concrete pier or steel support. G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 9 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. N. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. O. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 23 07 00 Provide supplemental angles, channels and formed steel supports to support piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. from building’s structure. Piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. shall not be supported from the roof deck. 3.03 DUCT HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's 2005 "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's 2005 "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5- 2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03 30 00. B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. Fabricate supports from welded-structural steel shapes. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. Refer to Section 21 05 48. 3.05 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PIPE SIZE Inches COPPER TUBING MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet STEEL PIPE MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet COPPER TUBING HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches STEEL PIPE HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches 1/2 5 7 3/8 3/8 3/4 5 7 3/8 3/8 1 6 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/4 7 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/2 8 9 3/8 3/8 2 8 10 3/8 3/8 2-1/2 (Note 2) 9 11 1/2 1/2 3 10 12 1/2 1/2 4 12 14 1/2 5/8 5 13 16 1/2 5/8 6 14 17 5/8 3/4 8 16 19 3/4 3/4 10 18 22 3/4 7/8 12 19 23 3/4 7/8 14 22 25 7/8 1 16 23 27 7/8 1 18 25 28 1 1 20 27 30 1 1-1/4 24 28 32 1-1/4 1-1/4 B. Plastic and Ductile Iron Pipe Hanger Spacing: PIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches ABS (All sizes) 4 3/8 FRP (All Sizes) 4 3/8 Ductile Iron (Note 2) PVC (All Sizes) 4 3/8 FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0529 - 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C. Note 1: Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for grooved end piping systems. D. Note 2: 20 feet maximum spacing, minimum of one hanger for each pipe section close to joint behind bell. Provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch connection. For pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller, subjected to loadings other than weight of pipe and contents, limit span to maximum spacing for water service steel pipe. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Equipment support bases. B. Vibration isolators. C. Roof curbs. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. Division 03 - Concrete. C. Section 23 0400 – General Conditions for Mechanical Trades. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A.ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. B.ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications. C.FEMA 412 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Mechanical Equipment. D.FEMA 413 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment. E.FEMA 414 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Duct and Pipe. F.FEMA E-74 - Reducing the Risks of Nonstructural Earthquake Damage. G.IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc. H.SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide manufacturer's product literature documenting compliance with PART 2 PRODUCTS. 2. Include seismic rating documentation for each isolator and restraint component accounting for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0548 - 2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2. Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for vibration isolation bases, member sizes, attachments to isolators, and supported equipment. 3. Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies of any calculations. 4. Include the calculations that indicate compliance with the applicable building code for seismic controls and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting dimensions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes. B. Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and registered and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1. Member of Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers Association (VISCMA). D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. 1. See Division 01 – General Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mason Industries. B. Novia Associates (Seismic Control Products) C. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc. D. Vibro-Accoustics Ltd 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflection and stability requirements under all operating loads. 2. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading. 3. Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection curve over deflection range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection. 4. Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio to not exceed 0.08 with spring deflection at minimum 75 percent of specified deflection. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0548 - 3 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 5. All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating clearance of 2 inches between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted otherwise. 2.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES A. Structural Bases: 1. Construction: Engineered, structural steel frames with welded brackets for side mounting of the isolators. 2. Frames: Square, rectangular or T-shaped. 3. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers. 4. Applications: Adjustable motor slide rails for centrifugal fans. 2.04 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads: 1. Configuration: Flat or molded. 2. Thickness: 0.25 inch minimum. 3. Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal separation plate between each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface. B. Elastomeric Mounts: 1. Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds. 2. Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with anchor hole bolted to supporting structure. C. Elastomeric Hangers: 1. Housing: Steel construction containing elastomeric isolation element to prevent rod contact with housing and short-circuiting of isolating function. 2. Incorporate steel load distribution plate sandwiching elastomeric element to housing. D. Spring Hanger: 1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric element preventing metal to metal contact. 2. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment. E. Combination Elastomeric-Spring Hanger: 1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring with elastomeric element in series isolating upper connection of hanger box to building structure. 2. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment. 2.05 ROOF CURBS A. Curb: 1. Location: Between structure and rooftop equipment. 2. Construction: Galvanized steel or Aluminum. 3. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0548 - 4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Equipment Isolation Schedule. 1. Direct Fired Air Units. a. Isolator Type: Open spring isolators. b. Isolator Deflection: 0.75 inches. 2. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units. a. Isolator Type: Open spring isolators. b. Isolator Deflection: 0.75 inches. 3. Condensing Units a. Isolator Type: Elastomeric Pad END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Duct Markers. D. Pipe markers. E. Warning Signs and Labels F. Warning Tags 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. Division 09- Finishes. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A.ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. B.ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. E. Project Record Documents: 1. Equipment Schedules: For each item of equipment to be labeled. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Graphic Engraving, LLC 2. Brimar Industries, Inc; Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 3. Seton Identification Products B. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch, Stainless steel, 0.025-inch, Aluminum, 0.032-inchor anodized aluminum, 0.032-inchminimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inchfor viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Conform to ASTM D709. Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, minimum 1/16 inchthick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inchfor name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inchfor viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. D. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number. 2.02 TAGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Graphic Engraving 2. Brady Corporation 3. Brimar Industries, Inc 4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co 5. Seton Identification Products, a Tricor Company 6. Substitutions: See Division 01-General Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Metal Tags: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. Brass wire-link, beaded chain or S-hook fasteners. Minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. 2.03 DUCT MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brimar Industries, Inc 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co 3. Seton Identification Products B. General Requirements for Manufactured Duct Labels: Preprinted self-adhesive, premium grade vinyl, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. C. Material: High gloss acrylic adhesive-backed vinyl film 0.0032 inch printed with UV and chemical resistant inks. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. F. Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1, at least 1- 1/2 incheshigh. 2.04 PIPE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation 2. Brimar Industries, Inc 3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co 4. MIFAB, Inc 5. Seton Identification Products B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. E. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. F. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1, at least 1- 1/2 incheshigh. 2.05 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inchthick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White. C. Background Color: Red. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inchfor name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.06 WARNING TAGS A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches. 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Red, white, black. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0553 - 5 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.02 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment, including all scheduled equipment on the drawings, air terminal units, automatic control devices, control panels, instruments, relays and major control components. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and readable from the floor. C. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. 3.03 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. D. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Potable, Cooling, Heating and Other Water Piping: a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White. E. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. 3.04 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0553 - 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.05 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0593 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic, steam, and refrigerating systems. C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. D. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions. E. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A.AABC (NSTSB) - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance B.ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems. C.NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems;. D.SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing;. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Installer Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. 1. Submit to Architect. 2. Submit to the Commissioning Authority. 3. Submit to Engineer of Record. 4. Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work. 5. Include certification that the plan developer has reviewed the contract documents, the equipment and systems, and the control system with the Architect and other installers to sufficiently understand the design intent for each system. 6. Include at least the following in the plan: a. Preface: An explanation of the intended use of the control system. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0593 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC b. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. c. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. d. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent calibration date. e. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process. f. Final test report forms to be used. g. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including: 1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type). 2) Diffuser proportioning. 3) Branch/submain proportioning. 4) Total flow calculations. 5) Rechecking. 6) Diversity issues. h. Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and sensors; analogous explanations for the water side. i. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example: 1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood readings of all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations. 2) Water: Pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc. j. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at the lowest possible pressures and methods to verify this. k. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions. l. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and set and for what level (total building, zone, etc.). m. Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capacity. n. Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if specified. o. Time schedule for TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.). p. Description of TAB work for areas to be built out later, if any. q. Time schedule for deferred or seasonal TAB work, if specified. r. False loading of systems to complete TAB work, if specified. s. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure differentials. t. Interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements and calculations, if specified. u. differential pressure measurements and calculations between the building and its exterior. v. Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequency). w. Procedures for formal progress reports, including scope and frequency. x. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0593 - 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC C. Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installer all setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB that affect, or could affect, the control system setup and operation. D. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – General Conditions. 2. Submit to the Commissioning Authority within two weeks after completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing. 3. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 4. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and Engineer of Record and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 5. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 6. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 7. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 8. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) units. 9. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Project altitude. j. Report date. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and rough setting. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1.AABC (NSTSB), AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2.ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 4.SMACNA (TAB)Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0593 - 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction. D. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. 2. Having minimum of three years documented experience. 3. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Pumps and fans are rotating correctly. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. 1. Require attendance by all installers and control providers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0593 - 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1. Running log of events and issues. 2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. 3. Contract interpretation requests. 4. Lists of completed tests. B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C. Permanently mark settings of dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the final report. E. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. H. Check and adjust systems approximately two seasons after final acceptance and submit report. 3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Work with Control vendor to establish minimum setpoints necessary to satisfy contract documents. Iterative testing to determine these minimum setpoints will be expected to be in the submittals. B. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. C. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. D. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. E. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. F. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0593 - 6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC G. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. 3.07 SCOPE A. Test, adjust, and balance the following: 1. Plumbing Pumps. 2. Furnaces 3. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers. 4. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units. 5. Air Coils. 6. Dedicated Outdoor Air Units. 7. Fans. 8. Air Filters. 9. Air Inlets and Outlets. 3.08 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer. 2. Model/Frame. 3. HP/BHP. 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load. 5. RPM. 6. Service factor. 7. Starter size, rating, heater elements. 8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore. 9. VFD Setpoints. 10. ECM Setpoints. B. Combustion Equipment: 1. Furnace manufacturer. 2. Model number. 3. Serial number. 4. Firing rate. 5. Overfire draft. 6. Gas meter timing dial size. 7. Gas meter time per revolution. 8. Gas pressure at meter outlet. 9. Gas flow rate. 10. Heat input. 11. Burner manifold gas pressure. 12. Percent carbon monoxide (CO). 13. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2). FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0593 - 7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 14. Percent oxygen (O2). 15. Percent excess air. 16. Flue gas temperature at outlet. 17. Ambient temperature. 18. Net stack temperature. 19. Percent stack loss. 20. Percent combustion efficiency. 21. Heat output. C. Air Cooled Condensers: 1. Identification/number. 2. Location. 3. Manufacturer. 4. Model number. 5. Serial number. 6. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual. 7. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual. 8. Number of compressors. D. Cooling Coils: 1. Identification/number. 2. Location. 3. Service. 4. Manufacturer. 5. Air flow, design and actual. 6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual. 7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual. 8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual. 9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual. 10. Water flow, design and actual. 11. Water pressure drop, design and actual. 12. Entering water temperature, design and actual. 13. Leaving water temperature, design and actual. 14. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual. 15. Air pressure drop, design and actual. E. Heating Coils: 1. Identification/number. 2. Location. 3. Service. 4. Manufacturer. 5. Air flow, design and actual. 6. Water flow, design and actual. 7. Water pressure drop, design and actual. 8. Entering water temperature, design and actual. 9. Leaving water temperature, design and actual. 10. Entering air temperature, design and actual. 11. Leaving air temperature, design and actual. 12. Air pressure drop, design and actual. F. Air Moving Equipment: 1. Location. 2. Manufacturer. 3. Model number. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0593 - 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 4. Serial number. 5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge. 6. Air flow, specified and actual. 7. Return air flow, specified and actual. 8. Outside air flow, specified and actual. 9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual. 10. Inlet pressure. 11. Discharge pressure. 12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore. 13. Number of Belts/Make/Size. 14. Fan RPM. G. Return Air/Outside Air: 1. Identification/location. 2. Design air flow. 3. Actual air flow. 4. Design return air flow. 5. Actual return air flow. 6. Design outside air flow. 7. Actual outside air flow. 8. Return air temperature. 9. Outside air temperature. 10. Required mixed air temperature. 11. Actual mixed air temperature. 12. Design outside/return air ratio. 13. Actual outside/return air ratio. H. Exhaust Fans: 1. Location. 2. Manufacturer. 3. Model number. 4. Serial number. 5. Air flow, specified and actual. 6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual. 7. Inlet pressure. 8. Discharge pressure. 9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore. 10. Number of Belts/Make/Size. 11. Fan RPM. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 1 HVAC INSULATION SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. HVAC piping insulation, jackets and accessories. 2. HVAC equipment insulation, jackets and accessories. 3. HVAC ductwork insulation, jackets, and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01- General Requirements 2. Division 07 – Firestopping 3. Division 09- Finishes 4. Section 23 0553- Identification of HVAC Piping and Equipment 5. Section 23 3100- HVAC ducts and casings 6. Section 23 2113 – Hydronic Piping 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 3. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 4. ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging. 5. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 6. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 7. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 8. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 9. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 10. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). 11. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 12. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel. 14. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 15. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material). FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 2 HVAC INSULATION 16. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 17. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 18. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 19. ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane. 20. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 21. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 1978 - Standard for Safety for Grease Ducts. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01- General Requirements B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters. C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450. D. Duct insulation, Coverings, and Linings: Maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, using specimen procedures and mounting procedures of ASTM E 2231. E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. F. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum three years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 3 HVAC INSULATION B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. Store all insulation materials in a clean, dry environment. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 1.10 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure and leak testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less. 2.02 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturers for Flexible Glass Fiber (FGF), Pre-Molded Glass Fiber (PGF) and Rigid Glass Fiber (RGF) Insulation Products: 1. Knauf Insulation 2. Johns Manville Corporation 3. Owens-Corning. 4. Substitutions: Division 01. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 4 HVAC INSULATION B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) Insulation Products: 1. Aeroflex. USA, Inc. 2. Armacell, LLC (Interior- ArmaFlex, Exterior- ArmaTuff) 3. K-Flex USA LLC 4. Substitutions: Division 01. C. Manufacturers for Fire Rated (FR) Insulation Products: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+. 2. Morgan Theramal Ceramics Pyroscat DuctWrap XL. 3. Unifrax FyreWrap Elite 1.5. 4. Substitutions: Division 01. D. Manufacturers for Jacketing (PVC): 1. Johns Manville 2. P.I.C. Plastics Inc. 3. Proto Corporation 4. Substitutions: Division 01. E. Manufacturers for Jacketing (ALM): 1. Childers Brand 2. ITW Insulation Systems 3. RPR Products 4. Substitutions: Division 01. F. Manufacturers for exterior pipe/ duct waterproof jacketing (WJ): 1.Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60. 2. Venture Tape Corporation; VentureClad Plus. 3. MFM Building Products Corp: Flex Clad 400 4. Substitutions: Division 01. 2.03 PIPE INSULATION A. Pre-Molded Glass Fiber (PGF) Insulation: 1.ASTM C547 and ASTM C795, rigid molded, noncombustible. 2. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75°F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 850°F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 5. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; self-sealing lap, moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches (ASJ-SSL). B. Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) Insulation: 1. Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40°F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 220°F. 4. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 2.04 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS A. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC): Plastic Pipe Jacket. 1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. 2. Thickness: 10 mil. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 5 HVAC INSULATION 3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. B. Aluminum (ALM): Self-Adhesive Waterproofing Jacket. Minimum 12 mil thick, vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; UV resistant, zero permeability with textured aluminum-foil facing, impact and tear resistant. 2.05 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness. D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: hydrous calcium silicate. Inserts length: not less than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation. E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single piece construction with self-adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation. F. Valve insulation Wraps: White, noncombustible, conforming to ASTM E 84. Match insulation thickness to pipe size. Valve covers shall be easily removable. 2.06 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) Insulation: 1. Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M Grade 3, in sheet form. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40°F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 220°F. 4. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. B. PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket: 1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, sheet material, off-white color. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40°F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 150°F. 4. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms. 5. Thickness: 10 mil. 6. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape. C. Aluminum Equipment Jacket: 1. ASTM B209 2. Thickness: 0.020 inch thick sheet. 3. Finish: Smooth. 4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 5. Fittings: 0.02 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.02 inch thick aluminum. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 6 HVAC INSULATION 2.07 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Flexible Glass Fiber (FGF) Insulation: ASTM C553 Type I, II, or III, ASTM C1290 Type III, in accordance to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B for duct coverings, with ASTM C1136 foil scrim kraft (FSK). 1. Thermal performance: 1.0 lb/ft3, 7.4 ft2 hr °F/btu minimum R-value for 2” thick at 75°F mean temperature per ASTM C177 and ASTM C518. 2. Operating temperature range: 40°F to 250°F. 3. Water vapor permeance: 0.02 perms maximum per ASTM E96. 4. Water vapor sorption: 5% by weight maximum per ASTM C1104. 5. Corrosiveness: Does not accelerate per ASTM C665. 6. Fungi growth: No fungi growth per ASTM C1338. B. Rigid Glass Fiber (RGF) Insulation: Glass fiber board, ASTM C 612 Type 1A or 1B, in accordance to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B for duct coverings, with ASTM C 1136 foil scrim kraft (FSK). 1. Thermal performance: 8.7 ft2 hr °F/btu minimum R-value for 2” thick at 75°F mean temperature per ASTM C177 and ASTM C518. 2. Operating temperature range: 0°F to 450°F. 3. Water vapor permeance: 0.02 perms maximum per ASTM E96. 4. Water vapor sorption: 5% by weight maximum per ASTM C1104. 5. Corrosiveness: Does not accelerate per ASTM C665. 6. Fungi growth: No fungi growth per ASTM C1338. C. Closed Cell Elastomertic (CCE) Insulation: 1. Thermal performance: 8.0 ft2 hr °F/btu minimum R-value for 2” thick at 75°F mean temperature per ASTM C177 and ASTM C518. 2. Operating temperature range: -40°F to 220°F. 3. Water absorption: 0.2% by volume per ASTM C 209 or ASTM C1763. 4. Water vapor permeability: 0.08 perm-in per ASTM E 96. 5. Ultraviolet (UV) resistance: Excellent per ASTM G 53 or ASTM G 90. 6. Weatherability: Excellent per ASTM D 471. 2.08 DUCTWORK JACKETS A. Self-Adhesive Waterproofing Jacket: Minimum 12 mil thick, vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; UV resistant, zero permeability with textured aluminum-foil facing, impact and tear resistant. 2.09 DUCTWORK INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. B. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. C. Adhesive: Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type. D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with head. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 7 HVAC INSULATION F. Lagging Adhesive: Fire retardant type with maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. G. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad. H. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. I. Membrane Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Protect insulation from exposure to moisture prior to and after installation. All insulation other than flexible elastomeric that becomes wet shall be replaced at no cost to the project. B. Verify piping and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. C. Verify piping and ductwork surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces Provide with PVC Plastic pipe jacketing for additional protection. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Piping Exposed to view in mechanical spaces. Provide with PVC Plastic pipe jacketing for additional protection. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. E. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour. F. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: 1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. 2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory- applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 8 HVAC INSULATION 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field- applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert Material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. I. Insulation Terminating Points: 1. Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water piping at union upstream of the coil control valve. 2. Chilled Water Coil Branch Piping: Insulate chilled water piping and associated components up to coil connection. 3. Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent condensation. J. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. 3.03 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK SYSTEMS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Protect insulation from exposure to moisture prior to and after installation. All insulation other than flexible elastomeric that becomes wet shall be replaced at no cost to the project. D. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are finished inside dimensions. E. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. F. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 9 HVAC INSULATION 3.04 DUCTWORK SCHEDULES A. Items Not Insulated: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 3. Stair pressurization supply ductwork. B. Provide insulation materials and thicknesses identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct location, selection from materials listed is Division 23 option. Heating and Cooling Supply Ducts Description Minimum As- Installed R-Value Insulation Type Minimum Thickness (inches) Jacketing Within thermal envelope of building R-6.0 Flexible Glass Fiber (FGF) 2.0 FSK Unconditioned Outside Air Intake Ducts and Exhaust/Relief Duct Inside Building Envelope Description Minimum As- Installed R-Value Insulation Type Minimum Thickness (inches) Jacketing Flexible Glass Fiber (FGF) 3.0 FSKFor ERV outside air intakes, all ductwork between the building envelope and the unit inlet. R-12.0 For MAU outside air intakes, all ductwork between the building envelope and the unit inlet. R-12.0 Rigid Glass Fiber (RGF) 3.0 Self-Adhesive Waterproofing Jacket Flexible Glass Fiber (FGF) 3.0 FSK For exhaust/relief ducts, all ductwork between the building envelope and first system isolation damper. R-12.0 Rigid Glass Fiber (RGF) 3.0 FSK 3.05 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Provide insulation materials and thicknesses scheduled for each system type and pressure/temperature range. If more than one material is listed for a system, selection from materials listed is Division 23 option. B. For dual temperature systems (heating and cooling), provide thickness equal to greater of heating or cooling scheduled value. Dual temperature piping shall also meet all vapor barrier requirements for cooling insulation (perm rating). C. Insulation for pre-insulated piping shall meet all specified requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 0700 - 10 HVAC INSULATION D. Insulate piping operating at temperatures below 40°F and systems operating between 40°F to 65°F in accordance with NAIMA Guide to Insulating Chilled Water Piping Systems with Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. Comply with all recommendations including but not limited to the requirement for vapor dams every fourth section of insulation. Cooling Coil Condensate Piping and Equipment Drain Piping: All Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket E. Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) All Sizes 0.75 2.0 N/A Indoor (CCE): N/A Outdoor (CCE): ALM Refrigerant Piping Insulation Type Pipe Size (inch) Indoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Outdoor - Minimum Thickness (inch) Factory Applied Jacket Field Applied Jacket Closed Cell Elastomeric (CCE) Less than 3 1.0 1.0 N/A Indoor: N/A Outdoor: ALM END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 2113 - 1 HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coil condensate drain piping 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 4. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 4. ASTM B75 – Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. 5. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 6. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 7. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 8. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 9. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR- PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter. 10. ASTM D2464 - Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 11. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 12. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 13. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 14. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 15. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 2113 - 2 HYDRONIC PIPING 16. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 17. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 18. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 19. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 20. ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing. 21. ASTM F877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot-and Cold-Water Distribution Systems. 22. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems. B. Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, and Grooved coupling couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes. 1. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals, and be specifically identified with the applicable Grooved coupling style or series number. B. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information. C. Test Reports: Indicate results of piping system pressure test. D. Welders’ Certificates. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves equipment and accessories. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 2113 - 3 HYDRONIC PIPING B. Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. C. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved piping systems, all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the grooved components. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. Prime joints with a contrasting color. a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less. b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less. B. Plastic-to-metal transition fittings: One-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one solvent-cement-joint end of material and wall thickness to match plastic pipe material. 2.02 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. PVC Piping: PVC. 2. Plastic-to-metal transition unions: Brass or copper end, solvent-cement-joint end of material and wall thickness to match plastic pipe material, rubber gasket, and threaded union. B. PVC Pipe Materials: For connections to equipment and valves with threaded connections, furnish solvent-weld socket to screwed joint adapters and unions, or ASTM D2464, Schedule 80, threaded, PVC pipe. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 2113 - 4 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M (or PVC for non-plenum applications), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel or groove plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install Work in accordance with Owner’s guidelines. B. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 23 05 29. F. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. G. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 23 05 53. H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. I. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors. J. Slope hydronic piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. L. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 23 07 00. 3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 2113 - 5 HYDRONIC PIPING B. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. C. Press connections: Copper and copper alloy press connections shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s) recommended by the manufacturer. Contractor shall be trained on the use and installation of the system by manufacturer’s representative. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. PIPE SIZE Inches COPPER TUBING MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet STEEL PIPE MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet COPPER TUBING HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches STEEL PIPE HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches 1/2 5 7 3/8 3/8 3/4 5 7 3/8 3/8 1 6 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/4 7 7 3/8 3/8 1-1/2 8 9 3/8 3/8 FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 2113 - 6 HYDRONIC PIPING 2 8 10 3/8 3/8 C. Plastic and Ductile Iron Pipe Hanger Spacing: PIPE HANGER SPACING PIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches ABS (All sizes) 4 3/8 FRP (All Sizes) 4 3/8 Ductile Iron (Note 2) PVC (All Sizes) 4 3/8 D. Note 1: Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for grooved end piping systems. E. Note 2: 20 feet maximum spacing, minimum of one hanger for each pipe section close to joint behind bell. Provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch connection. For pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller, subjected to loadings other than weight of pipe and contents, limit span to maximum spacing for water service steel pipe. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022- A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3100 - 1 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS SECTION 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Duct Materials. B. Non-Insulated Flexible ducts. C. Insulated flexible ducts. D. Transverse duct connection system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A90/A90M - Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings. 3. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 4. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 5. ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High- Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for. 6. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 7. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 8. A1011/A1011M-07 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength 9. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 10. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe. 11. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets. 12. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. National Fire Protection Association: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022- A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3100 - 2 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 3. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards. 2. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 3. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" beef up duct hanger and support in this section. C. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit duct fabrication drawings, drawn to scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot, on drawing sheets same size as Contract Documents, indicating: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For exhaust duct systems, indicate classification of materials handled as defined in this section. 3. Fittings. 4. Reinforcing details and spacing. 5. Seam and joint construction details. 6. Penetrations through fire rated and other walls. 7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. 8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, and duct attachment. B. Product Data: Submit data for duct materials, duct liner, duct connectors . C. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022- A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3100 - 3 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and flexible. B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B and NFPA 96 standards as applicable. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G90 (zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M. B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.02 NON-INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thermaflex Technaflex 2. Tuttle + Bailey 3. Flexmaster B. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helical-wound spring steel wire. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. 2. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022- A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3100 - 4 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 3. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. 2.03 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thermaflex 2. Technaflex 3. Tuttle + Bailey 4. Flexmaster B. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helical wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. 2. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. 4. Thermal Resistance: 6square feet-hour-degree F per BTU. 5. Vapor Barrier Permeance: 0.05 perm per ASRM E96, Procedure A 2.04 SEALANTS AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke- developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. General: Brush-on, water-resistant, mold and mildew resistant, indoor and outdoor use, compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 5. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2.05 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible . Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Construction FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022- A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3100 - 5 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Standards). Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. C. TDC connections on all ductwork where any dimension exceeds 12 inches. Slip and drive connection acceptable on duct sizes less than 12” x 12”. D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide [airfoil] turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. E. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. F. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections. G. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams with welds, gaskets, mastic adhesives, mastic plus embedded fabric systems. 1. Sealants, Mastics: Conform to UL 181A. Provide products bearing appropriate UL 181A markings. 2. Do not provide sealing products not bearing UL approval markings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. 2. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 3. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 4. Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings for joining round duct sizes 8inch and smaller. 5. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29. 6. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 7. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. 8. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. 9. Do not route ducts through transformer vaults or electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. 10. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022- A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3100 - 6 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. 11. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23, Air Duct Accessories for fire and smoke dampers. B. Flexible ductwork 1. When located above ceilings, support flexible duct from above; flexible duct shall not touch the ceiling. 2. Minimize kinks and sags 3. Flexible duct shall be located only where concealed and accessible. 4. Non-insulated flexible ductwork: Provide when the metal ductwork connected to is not insulated. 5. Insulated flexible ductwork: Provide when the metal ductwork connected to is insulated. R-value of flexible ductwork insulation shall meet or exceed the R- value of the metal ductwork insulation. 6. Elbow supports: Provide above flexible ductwork connections to ceiling diffusers. Use cable ties as indicated in the manufacturer’s installation instructions. 7. Connections to rigid ductwork: Provide both a drawband and two layers of duct tape lapped approximately 25% at each connection of flexible ductwork to rigid ductwork. Drawbands shall be the non-metallic type listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181B. Duct tape shall be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181B. 3.03 DUCT SEALING A. Duct Seal Level Description Seal Level Sealing Requirements* A All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant, unless it has been certified to comply with UL-181A or UL0181B by an independent testing laboratory and the tape is used in accordance with that certification B All transverse joints, longitudinal seams. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant, unless it has been certified to comply with UL-181A or UL0181B by an independent testing laboratory and the tape is used in accordance with that certification. C Transverse joints only. Notes: Longitudinal seams are joints oriented in the direction of flow. Transverse joints are connections of two duct sections oriented perpendicular to airflow. Duct wall penetrations are openings made by any screw fastener, pipe, rod, or wire. Spiral lock seams in a round or flat oval duct need not be sealed. All other connections are considered transverse joints, including but not limited to spin-ins, taps, and other branch connections, access door frames and jambs, duct connections to equipment, etc. B. Minimum Duct Seal Levels Duct Type SupplyDuct Location 2-in. or less Greater than Exhaust Return FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022- A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3100 - 7 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS (1)2-in. (1) Outdoor A A C A Unconditioned Space (2)B A C B Conditioned Space C B B C Notes: Duct design static pressure classification Includes indirectly conditioned spaces such as return air plenums 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Install pitot tube openings for testing of systems. Install pitot tube complete with metal can with spring device or screw to prevent air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside metal ring. B. Connect air terminal units to supply ducts directly or with five foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. 3.05 CLEANING A. Duct cleaning is required if test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." do not meet the following criteria: 1. Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air flow, clean one half of system completely before proceeding to other half. Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. C. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Install access openings into ductwork for cleaning purposes. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022- A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3100 - 8 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Ductwork Material Schedule: AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Supply (Heating Systems)Galvanized Steel, Aluminum, Supply (System with Cooling Coils)Galvanized Steel, Aluminum, Return and Relief Galvanized Steel, Aluminum General Exhaust Galvanized Steel, Aluminum Outside Air Intake Galvanized Steel Combustion Air Galvanized Steel B. Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule: AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS All 1.5x maximum anticipated system pressure END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3300 - 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Back-draft dampers. B. Duct access doors. C. Volume control dampers. D. Flexible duct connections. E. Duct test holes. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. Section 23 05 19 – Meters and Gauges C. Section 23 04 00 – General Conditions for Mechanical Trades D. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Execution and Product requirements for connection and control of Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers for placement by this section. E. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts: Requirements for duct construction and pressure classifications. F. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for connection of electrical Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers specified by this section. 1.03 REFERENCES (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 92A - Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems. D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3300 - 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 555 - Standard for Safety for Fire Dampers. 2. UL 555C - Standard for Safety for Ceiling Dampers. 3. UL 555S - Standard for Safety for Smoke Dampers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers, duct access doors and duct test holes. B. Product Data: Submit data for shop fabricated assemblies and hardware used. C. Product Data: Submit for the following. Include where applicable electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1. Fire dampers including locations and ratings. 2. Backdraft dampers. 3. Flexible duct connections. 4. Volume control dampers. 5. Duct access doors. 6. Duct test holes. D. Product Data: For fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers submit the following: 1. Include UL ratings, dynamic ratings, leakage, pressure drop and maximum pressure data. 2. Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details. 3. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for Fire and Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors test holes and dampers. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements. B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 500. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3300 - 3 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. B. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. C. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage. D. Handling: Handle and lift dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Furnish five-year manufacturer warranty for duct accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin CB series 2. Price BDD Series 3. Greenheck EM Series B. Product Description: Multi-Blade, back-draft dampers: Parallel-action, gravity-balanced, extruded aluminum. Blades, maximum 6 inch width, center pivoted, with flexible vinyl sealed edges. Blades linked together in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin. Furnish dampers with adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.02 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin 2. Nailor 3. Greenheck 4. Flexmaster 5. McGill Airflow 6. Nailor 7. Pottorff B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3300 - 4 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES C. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in both dimensions, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 3/8 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. 4. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 12 x 48 inch. D. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized frame channel with suitable hardware. E. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, furnish oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. Furnish closed end bearings on ducts having pressure classification over 2 inches wg.. F. Quadrants: 1. Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches furnish regulator at both ends. 2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ventfabrics Inc. Ventglas 2. United McGill 3. Elgen 4. DuroDyne 5. Ventfabrics 6. Ductmate Industries B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. C. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. D. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. E. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of galvanized or aluminum sheet steel. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. F. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inchin the warp and 360 lbf/inchin the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Dwyer FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3300 - 5 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 2. Flow Kinetics 3. Air Balance 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Furnish extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.05 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1.Pottorff. 2.Ventfabrics, Inc. 3.Young Regulator Company. B. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment. C. Tubing: Brass, Copper or Aluminum. D. Cable: Stainless steel. E. Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed. F. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Painted steel. 2.06 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: 1.Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2.Duro Dyne Inc. 3.Elgen Manufacturing. 4.METALAIRE, Inc. 5.SEMCO Incorporated. 6.Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." D. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation. B. Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3300 - 6 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES C. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. 3.02 INSTALLATION. A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Install dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated on Drawings. C. Install temporary duct test holes and required for testing and balancing purposes. Cut or drill in ducts. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3400 - 1 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS SECTION 23 3400 HVAC FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceiling exhaust fans. B. Downblast roof exhausters C. Fan accessories. D. HVLS (High Volume Low Speed) Fans E. Energy Recovery Ventilators 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. C. Section 23 0700 - HVAC Insulation. D. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Dampers. E. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. F. REFERENCE STANDARDS (follow the most currently adopted amended version)ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. G.ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. H.AMCA (DIR) - (Directory of) Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program. I.AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. J.AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating. K.AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. L.AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data;. M.NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. N.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible. O. UL-705 – Standard for Safety for Power Ventilators FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3400 - 2 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include complete installation instructions. D. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish for Owner's use in maintenance of project. F. Extra Materials: 1. Fan Belts: One set for each individual fan. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Energy Recovery Unit Energy Transfer Rating: Meet ARI 1060. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Permanent fans may not be used for ventilation during construction. B. Permanent fans may be used for ventilation during construction only after ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The following list of manufacturers applies to all fans unless otherwise noted in sections below. 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation 2. Loren Cook Company 3. PennBarry 4. Twin City Fan & Blower FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3400 - 3 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 2.02 STARTERS, DRIVES & DISCONNECTS A. Provide starters and disconnect switches for all fans not scheduled to be controlled by a variable frequency drive. B. Provide direct drive fans as indicated on project schedules. C. Disconnect Switches: 1. Factory mounted and wired. 2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Provide manufacturer's standard, factory applied gray, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Positive electrical shutoff. 5. Wired from fan motor to junction box installed within motor compartment. 2.03 ROOF CURBS A. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted fans and ventilators unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Self-flashing of galvanized steel with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strips, insulation and curb bottom, curb bottom, factory installed nailer strip. Provide pitched roof curb where architectural roof plans indicate sloped roof. C. Curb Height: 24 inches for intakes and 14 inches for exhausts. 2.04 CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Manufacturers, Starters, Drives, Disconnects, and Roof Curbs 1. Refer to Section 2.1. B. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with acoustic insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge. C. Grille: Molded white plastic. 2.05 DOWNBLAST ROOF EXHAUSTERS A. Manufacturers, Starters, Drives, Disconnects, and Roof Curbs 1. Refer to Section 2.1. 2. Housing: a. Construct of heavy gage aluminum including curb cap, windband, and motor compartment. b. Rigid internal support structure. c. One-piece fabricated or fully welded curb-cap base to windband for leak proof construction. d. Construct drive frame assembly of heavy gage steel, mounted on vibration isolators. e. Provide breather tube for fresh air motor cooling and wiring. B. Shafts and Bearings: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3400 - 4 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 1. Fan Shaft: a. Ground and polished steel with anti-corrosive coating. b. First critical speed at least 25 percent over maximum cataloged operating speed. 2. Bearings: a. Permanently sealed or pillow block type. b. Minimum L10 life in excess of 100,000 hours (equivalent to L50 average life of 500,000 hours), at maximum cataloged operating speed. c. 100 percent factory tested. C. Drain Trough: Allows for single-point drainage of water and other residues. D. Accessories: 1. Automatic Belt Tensioner: Automatic device that adjusts for correct belt tension for single drives. 2. Birdscreen: a. Provide galvanized steel construction. b. Protects fan discharge. 3. Dampers: Provide motorized type. 4. Finishes: Factory primed. 5. Hinge Kit: a. Aluminum hinges. b. Hinges and restraint cables mounted to base (sleeve). c. Allows fan to tilt away for access to wheel and ductwork for inspection and cleaning. 6. Heat Baffle: Prevents heat from radiating into motor compartment. 7. Tie-down Points: Four brackets located on windband secures fan in heavy wind applications. 8. External motor speed controllers for field mounting. 2.06 HVLS (HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED) FANS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hunter Industrial 2. MacroAir Fans 3. Big Ass Fans B. Fans shall be supported from structure, direct drive permanent split capacitor type; with rolled edge design fan blade set. C. Provide with accessories as shown on plans. D. Provide with (1) wall mounted controller to control (4) fans. Furnish and install control panel with fire alarm relay. E. Color selected by architect. 2.07 INDOOR ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATORS (ERV-1, ERV-2) A. Manufacturers: 1. American Aldes 2. Renewaire 3. Greenheck 4. Fantech FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3400 - 5 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS B. Unit Casing: Constructed of galvanized steel with bolted construction using corrosion resistant fasteners. Furnish with inlet and outlet duct collars. Top side and interior panels insulated with 1-1/2 inch, 3 pound per cubic foot density glass fiber insulation. Side panels hinged and removable for access to internal components. Energy wheel mounted in sliding tack for access and cleaning. Fans and motor assembly mounted in sliding track for access. C. Enthalpy Heat Exchanger: Constructed of synthetic fiber-based media impregnated with non-migrating water selective 4 angstrom molecular sieve desiccant. D. Fans: Individual supply and exhaust fans; direct drive, single width, single inlet, forward curved, centrifugal blower with resilient mounted motor. E. Motors: Open drip proof with permanently lubricated sealed type bearings with ABMA 9 life at 200,000 hours. F. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position. G. Filter: 2 inch thick 30 percent efficient pleated type located in both supply and exhaust air streams. H. Electrical: Components factory wired for single point power connection. Control panel UL listed with access door. I. Accessories: 1. Fan speed controller. 2. CO2 sensor and controls PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 23 0548. C. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork; refer to Section 23 0548. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. D. Install fan restraining snubbers; refer to Section 23 0548. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating. E. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. F. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain. G. Provide motorized dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated; refer to Section 23 3100. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3400 - 6 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS H. Provide floor mounted axial fans with reinforced legs. Provide ceiling suspended units with support brackets bolted to casing flange. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3500 - 1 VEHICLE EXHAUST DETECTION SYSTEM SECTION 23 3500 VEHICLE EXHAUST DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vehicle Exhaust Detection System 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.03 GENERAL A. Provide fully functioning carbon monoxide and nitrogen dioxide detection system. B. Vehicle exhaust detection system shall be comprised of carbon monoxide to voltage transducers, nitrogen dioxide to voltage transducers, system controllers, control wiring and conduit, alarms and all accessories required for a fully functioning carbon monoxide detection system. C. Provide electrical/controls work complying with requirements of Division-26 sections: 1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices and unit control panel. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturing of gas monitoring detection system equipment, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in active service for a minimum of ten (10) continuous years. B. Provide services of manufactures technical service personnel to supervise installation and instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, maintenance and field testing. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and drawings for the following items per the provisions of Division 1 and this Division’s General Provisions. 1. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s literature and data sheets indicating all accessories, electrical requirements, and wiring diagrams. 2. Drawings: Location and sizes of field mounted components. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment 24 months (2-years) from date of Manufacturer or Manufacturer's Representative's final report to the A/E. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operation Data: Include instructions for system operation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3500 - 2 VEHICLE EXHAUST DETECTION SYSTEM B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for maintaining system, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers shall have local representation experienced with carbon monoxide/nitrogen dioxide detection systems and a minimum of ten (10) continuous years of active service. A local supply of spare parts and authorized factory repair service shall be available. 1. List of manufacturers: a. Toxalert, Inc. b. MSA, Inc. c. Macurco d. Honeywell B. Materials and Equipment 1. General: Provide gas monitoring detection products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of Sensor, control panels and other components as required for a complete installation. Provide gas monitoring detection system with the following functional and construction features as indicated. The Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) sensors shall be housed in a combination NEMA 1 removable hinged cover cabinet with a keyed lock to prevent tampering. An aluminum splash/dust shield on the face of sensor to protect sensing element. A combination CO/NO2 sensor is acceptable such that the following criteria is met: 2. Carbon Monoxide Sensors: a. The CO sensor shall output a linear 4 to 20mA analog signal proportional to the CO gas levels detected and shall have a normal operation range of -20°F to 122°F. The sensor shall have a range of 0 to 400 PPM, with an accuracy of ±5% of reading. The sensor shall be microprocessor based with 12 bits analog/digital resolution and periodically recalibrate itself. b. The CO sensors shall have a solid state-sensing element for life of 10 years and shall be microprocessor based and be self-monitoring for proper operation. The temperature thermistor will automatically compensate the output signal for changes in ambient temperature and relative humidity. c. The CO sensor shall have a LED to indicate: 1) Power On; 2) Automatic calibration; 3) Operating properly; 4) Sensor Failure d. The sensor enclosure shall be a NEMA 1 removable hinged cover cabinet with a keyed lock to prevent tampering. An aluminum splash/dust shield on the face of sensor to protect sensing element. e. The sensor shall be powered by 24 VAC, 4 wire, 18 AWG shielded. 3. Nitrogen Dioxide Sensors: a. The NO2 sensor shall output a linear 4 to 20 mA analog signal proportional to the NO2 gas levels detected and shall have a normal operation range of 4° F to 122° F and 15 to 90% R.H. non-condensing. The sensor shall have a range of 0 to 20 PPM with a response time of 30 seconds to 90% indication. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3500 - 3 VEHICLE EXHAUST DETECTION SYSTEM b. The NO2 sensor shall have an electro-chemical element, microprocessor based. c. The sensor shall be powered by 24 VDC, 3 wire, 18 gauge. 4. System Controller/Annunciator: a. Provide a controller to monitor each carbon monoxide and each nitrogen dioxide sensor. The controller shall be designed to be wall mounted, for visual and audible alarm indication. The controller shall be microprocessor based and use non-volatile (EEPROM) memory to ensure system programs are not lost during power interruption, have two (2) stages of operation and continuously monitor sensor signal output. Power input to the control panel shall be 120V/1PH/60Hz. b. The controller shall be mounted as show on drawing(s) and in accordance with the manufacturer. c. Provide clearly labeled indicators on the face of the annuciator panel to indicate warning level, alarm level and sensor malfunction for each sensor. d. Provide clearly labeled indicator for system power on, on the face of the annunciator. e. The controller shall have auxiliary relay contacts for control of ventilation fans f. Provide a clearly labeled red alarm indicator on the face of the controller panel to indicate system alarm. g. Provide an audible alarm with a minimum of 85db sound level on the face of the controller panel. Also provide a momentary push button to silence the audible alarm. The alarm indicator shall remain lighted as long as the alarm condition persists even though the audible signal has silenced. h. The controller shall have adjustable “warning and alarm level” set points. i. The controller shall have all the necessary power supplies and transformers to supply power to CO and NO2 sensors. j. Inputs-software selectable as analog or digital with standard and custom ranges. k. Output-software selectable as analog or digital with standard and custom ranges. l. Programmable delay on times and minimum fan run times per sensor to minimize false alarms and short cycling of ventilation fans. m. Power-fail with auto restart capabilities. C. Display: A series of colored LED lights on the panel shall provide a continuous display of all system operations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mount the carbon monoxide and nitrogen dioxide sensors where shown on the drawings five feet above the finished floor. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3500 - 4 VEHICLE EXHAUST DETECTION SYSTEM B. The contractor is responsible for providing all low voltage control wiring and installation of sensors and central control panel. Conform to division 23 and 26 for installation requirements. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Calibrating and Adjusting: 1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated. 4. After all equipment calibration is complete submit a calibration report compliant with ASHREA 90.1 B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 6. Test software and hardware interlocks. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. The contractor shall provide the following training services: 1. Provide forty hours of training by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the specific installation details of the project. The training at minimum shall consist of 16 hours of on site software and hardware review, 24 hours for a detailed walk through the sequencing and operations of the entire system. 3.06 COMMISSIONING A. The contractor is responsible for commissioning of the manufacture’s packaged control systems. 1. Field I/O Calibration and Commissioning a. Prior to system program commissioning, verify that each control panel has been installed according to plans, specifications and approved shop FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3500 - 5 VEHICLE EXHAUST DETECTION SYSTEM drawings. Test, calibrate and bring on line each control sensor and device. Commissioning to include, but not be limited to: 1) Sensor accuracy at 10, 50 and 90% of range. 2) Sensor range. 3) Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting. 4) Point value reporting. 2. Record calibration and test data on commissioning data sheets. Sufficient space should be provided near each point name for sign off. 3.07 Acceptance Testing A. Submit for approval, a detailed acceptance test procedure designed to demonstrate compliance with contractual requirements. This Acceptance test procedure will take place after the commissioning procedure but before final acceptance, to verify that sensors and control devices maintain specified accuracies and the system performance does not degrade over time. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3700 - 1 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. C. Louvers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. Division 09: Painting C. Section 23 04 00 – General Conditions for Mechanical Trades D. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A.AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating B.AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices. C.AMCA 540 – Debris Impact Resistance D.AMCA 550 - Test Method for High Velocity Wind Driven Rain Resistant Louvers. E.ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets. F.ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. G.ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric). H.SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. I.SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3700 - 2 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all air outlets and inlets. C. Project Record Documents: Once the final Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Report is approved, record all typed airflow values on the as-built drawings. D. Test Reports: Rating of air outlet and inlet performance. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L. C.AMCA 540 – Debris Impact Resistance D.AMCA 550 - Test Method for High Velocity Wind Driven Rain Resistant Louvers; 2015. E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. F. Maintain two copies of each document on site. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for air outlets and inlets. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish one of each type and size extra air outlets and inlets. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The following list of manufacturers applies to all air terminal units unless otherwise noted in sections below. 1. Price Industries 2. Titus 3. Krueger 4. Nailor Industries 5. Anemostat FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3700 - 3 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 2.02 ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Round, adjustable pattern, stamped or spun, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with directional baffles where indicated. Diffuser collar shall project not more than 1 inch above ceiling. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster ring and ceiling plaque. B. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish. C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. D. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.03 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Provide square, stamped, multi-core, square, adjustable pattern, stamped, multi- core, square and rectangular, multi-louvered, square and rectangular, adjustable pattern, multi-louvered, and diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree, one way, two way, three way, four way, and pattern with directional baffles where indicated. B. Connections: Round. C. Frame: Provide surface mount, snap-in, inverted T-bar, spline type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish. E. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. F. Accessories: Refer to schedule. 2.04 PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Perforated face with fully adjustable pattern and removable face. B. Frame: Surface mount type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. C. Fabrication: Steel with steel frame and baked enamel finish. D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. E. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.05 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille, one-way deflection. B. Frame: Refer to schedule. C. Construction: Made of aluminum extrusions with factory enamel finish. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3700 - 4 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS D. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.06 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Frame: Refer to schedule. B. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. C. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans. E. Gymnasiums: Provide front pivoted or welded in place blades, securely fastened to be immobile. 2.07 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES A. Type: Refer to schedule. B. Fabrication: Refer to schedule. C. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. D. Frame: Refer to schedule. E. Frame: Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings. F. Accessories: Refer to schedule. 2.08 LOUVERS A. Type: 4 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope with center baffle and return bend, heavy channel frame, 1/2 inch square mesh screen over exhaust and 1/2 inch square mesh screen over intake. B. Fabrication: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish. C. Color: As shown on the drawings. D. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. E. Fabrication: 12 gage, 0.1046 inch thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish. F. Color: As shown on the drawings. G. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 3700 - 5 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS H. Mounting: Furnish with interior flat flange for installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Division 1 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify inlet and outlet locations. C. Verify ceiling, wall systems are ready for installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Comply with SMACNA (ASMM) for flashing/counter-flashing of roof penetrations and supports for roof curbs and roof mounted equipment. C. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. D. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. Refer to Section 23 33 00. F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Division 09. 3.03 AIR OUTLET AND INLET SCHEDULE A. Refer to contract drawings/plans. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 5400 - 1 FURNACES SECTION 23 5400 FURNACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Forced air furnaces. B. Controls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Section 23 0400 – General Conditions for Mechanical Trades. C. Section 23 1123 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping. D. Section 23 1126 - Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping. E. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Water supply for humidifier. F. Section 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Additional requirements for fan motors. G. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. H. Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation: Duct liner. I. Section 23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC: Thermostats, humidistats, time clocks. J. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. K. Section 23 5100 - Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks: Flue or stack. L. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections and installation and wiring of thermostats and other controls components. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A.AHRI 610 (I-P) - Performance Rating Of Central System Humidifiers for Residential Applications. B.AHRI 611 (SI) - Performance Rating Of Central System Humidifiers for Residential Applications. C.ANSI Z21.47 - American National Standard for Gas-Fired Central Furnaces. D.ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 5400 - 2 FURNACES E.ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. F.ASHRAE Std 90.2 - Energy-Efficient Design of Low-Rise Residential Buildings. G.ASHRAE Std 103 - Methods of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers. H.NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. I.NFPA 31 - Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment;. J.NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code;. K.NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;. L.NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; . M.NFPA 211 - Guide for Smoke and Heat Venting;. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Division 01 - General Requirements 2. Extra Filters: One for each furnace. 3. Extra Pilot Thermocouples: One. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience and approved by manufacturer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 5400 - 3 FURNACES 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide three year manufacturer’s warranty for solid state ignition modules. B. Provide five year manufacturer’s warranty for heat exchangers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier Corp. B. Lennox International C. McQuay International D. Rheem Manufacturing E. The Trane Company F. Daikin 2.02 GAS FIRED FURNACES A. Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency (AFUE): 0.80 ("non-condensing"). B. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heating element, controls, air filter, and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer. 1. Safety certified by CSA in accordance with ANSI Z21.47. 2. Venting System: Direct. 3. Combustion: Sealed. 4. Air Flow Configuration: Horizontal. 5. Heating: Natural gas fired. 6. Accessories: a. Condensate drain. b. Wall termination kit. c. Concentric wall termination kit. C. Performance: 1. Refer to Furnace Schedule. Gas heating capacities are sea level ratings. D. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner. If not certified for combustible flooring, please provide additional steel base. E. Primary Heat Exchanger: 1. Material: Hot-rolled steel. 2. Coating: Aluminized FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 5400 - 4 FURNACES 3. Shape: Tubular type. F. Gas Burner: 1. Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply. 2. Gas valve, two stage provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining pressure regulation, safety pilot, manual set (On-Off), pilot filtration, automatic electric valve. 3. Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark igniter. 4. Combustion air damper with synchronous spring return damper motor. 5. Non-corrosive combustion air blower with permanently lubricated motor. G. Gas Burner Safety Controls: 1. Thermocouple sensor: Prevents opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame rollout switch: Installed on burner box and prevents operation. 3. Vent safety shutoff sensor: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and prevents operation, manual reset. 4. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de-energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature, automatic resets. H. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct drive with adjustable variable pitch motor pulley. I. Motor: As per schedule on plans J. Air Filters: 1 inch thick urethane, washable type arranged for easy replacement. K. Operating Controls: See sequence of operation L. Flue: Flue shall be CPVC or meet manufacturer’s requirements 2.03 THERMOSTATS A. Room Thermostat: Low voltage, controlling heat and fan to maintain temperature setting; with system selector switch (heat-off) and fan control switch (auto-off). B. Room Thermostat: Low voltage, electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat with remote sensor: 1. System selector switch (heat-off) and fan control switch (auto-on). 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from setpoint. 3. Set-up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one hour to 31 days. 5. Short cycle protection. 6. Programming based on weekdays, Saturday and Sunday. 7. Selection features including degree F or degree C display, 12 or 24 hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat Display: a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 5400 - 5 FURNACES g. System Mode Indication: heating, cooling, fan auto, off, and on, auto or on, off. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply is available and located correctly. C. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A. C. Install gas fired furnaces in accordance with NFPA 54. D. Provide venting and combustion air to outside in accordance with manufacturer. Provide vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 7423 - 1 PACKAGED MAKEUP-AIR UNITS SECTION 23 7423 PACKAGED MAKEUP – AIR UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All of the Contract Documents, including General, Bidding Documents, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract, and Division 01 – General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all Sections of the Specifications for the requirements and provisions affecting the work of this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged outdoor makeup-air units with direct natural-gas heating 1.03 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 2. NFPA 58 - Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code. 3. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Weights. 4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements. 5. Duct connections. 6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 7. Sound performance data 8. Controls. 9. Accessories. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 7423 - 2 PACKAGED MAKEUP-AIR UNITS 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Entire unit shall be ETL Certified per ANSI Z83.4 or ANSI Z83.18 and bear an ETL mark. B. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270. C. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. D. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Test in accordance with AMCA 500. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept units on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect units from damage by storing off roof until roof mounting curbs are in place. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs with roof structure, roof deck and roof membrane installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer’s warranty for burner. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish one set of filters for each unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Reznor 3. Captive Aire 4. Carrier 5. Daikin 6. The Trane Company 7. York International FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 7423 - 3 PACKAGED MAKEUP-AIR UNITS B. Product Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and wired, consisting of roof curb, cabinet, supply fan, gas-fired heating section, air filters, motorized outside air damper, controls, and accessories. C. Configuration: horizontal air delivery. D. Cabinet: 1. Outside Casing: Minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel with baked enamel finish meeting salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117. 2. Furnish hinged access doors 3. Insulation: Factory applied to exposed vertical and horizontal panels. 1 inch thick aluminum foil faced glass fiber with edges protected from erosion. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411. E. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with direct drive high efficiency motor. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. unit shall have factory installed variable speed drive (VSD) for modulation of the blower motor. The VSDs shall be factory-programmed for unit-specific requirements and shall not require additional field programming to operate. F. Gas-Fired Heating Section: 1. Fuel: Natural gas 2. Gas Burner: Electronic modulating, integral blower with adjustable combustion air supply, pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shut-off, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame sensing device, and automatic 100 percent shut-off pilot. Require unit fan operation before allowing gas valve to open. 3. Fault sensors: to provide fault conditions to optional digital controller or building controls. 4. Weather-tight metal housing: with intake air vents, metal lift-off or hinged door to provide easy access to the enclosed vest plate, control circuitry, gas train, burner assembly and exhaust blower. G. Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames. H. Stand-Alone Controls: Provide stand-alone heating and cooling operation by factory- supplied, thermostats and sensors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions are as shown on shop drawings 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Connect units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. B. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. C. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 7423 - 4 PACKAGED MAKEUP-AIR UNITS D. Install control wiring between unit and field installed accessories. 3.03 INSTALLATION - NATURAL GAS HEATING SECTION A. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. B. Connect natural gas piping to unit, full size of unit gas train inlet. Arrange piping with clearances for burner service. C. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. 1. Strainer. 2. Pressure gage. 3. Shutoff valve. 4. Pressure reducing valve. D. Install natural gas piping accessories above roof. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout. 3.05 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. B. Install temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at Substantial Completion. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain the entire unit. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8123 - 1 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR- CONDITIONERS SECTION 23 8123 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes air conditioning units, controls and control panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 04 00 – General Conditions for Mechanical Trades 2. Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Product requirements for motors for placement by this section. 3. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for water, glycol, and drain piping specified by this section. 4. Section 23 21 16 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product requirements for hydronic piping specialties at unit connections. 5. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate Heating Piping: Execution requirements for steam supply and steam condensate return piping specified by this section. 6. Section 23 22 16 - Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties: Product requirements for steam piping specialties at unit connections. 7. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Execution requirements for refrigerant piping specified by this section. 8. Section 23 40 00 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices: Product requirements for filters for placement by this section. 9. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section. C. Allowances: Include under provisions of Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures: Allowances. Allowance includes purchase and delivery of 2 ceiling mounted computer room air conditioning units of 3 nominal tons each. Installation is included in this section and is part of Contract Sum/Price. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute 1. ARI 210/240 - Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. ARI 340/360 - Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air- Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8123 - 2 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR- CONDITIONERS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature and data indicating water, drain, refrigeration, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit procedures for rigging and making service connections. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate conditions at initial start-up including date, and initial set points. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when used in combination with compressors and evaporator coils when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept computer room units on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage. B. Protect units from damage by storing away from computer room until floor and ceiling are installed. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish five year manufacturer’s warranty for refrigeration compressors. 1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8123 - 3 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR- CONDITIONERS B. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of unit, and controls checkout and adjustments. Repair or replace parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment. C. Perform work without removing units from service during building normal occupied hours. D. Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this maintenance period. E. Maintain locally, near Place of the Work, adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes. Have personnel available to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance service, without unreasonable loss of time. F. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under supervision and in direct employ of manufacturer or original installer. G. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish one set of filters for each unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING MOUNTED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Dataaire 2. Leibert 3. Stulz 4. Substitutions: Not Permitted. B. Product Description: Self-contained air cooled, factory assembled, pre-wired and pre- piped unit, consisting of cabinet, fan, filters, controls. C. Cabinet: The frame shall be constructed of 14 gauge welded steel and be coated with a heavy corrosion inhibiting finish for long life. It shall be braced for rigidity and support. The outer side panels shall be of galvanized steel and are removable for servicing. The cabinet shall be insulated with one-quarter inch (1/4") thick, closed cell insulation for protection and sound attenuation. The electrical panel shall be hinged and swing out for servicing. A stainless steel drain pan shall be provided integral to the unit. D. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved centrifugal, belt driven. E. Compressor: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, internal motor overload protection, low pressure switch, manual reset high-pressure switch. F. Evaporator Coil: Direct expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins, with thermal expansion valve with external equalizer, liquid line filter-drier, FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8123 - 4 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR- CONDITIONERS service shut-off valves and charging valves. Mount coil assembly in stainless steel drain pan. G. Remote Air Cooled Condenser: Integral copper tube aluminum fin coil sized for rated capacity at 95 degrees F. H. Filter: 1 inch thick disposable glass fiber media. I. Remote Air Cooled Condenser: Corrosion resistant cabinet, copper tube aluminum fin coils arranged for two circuits, multiple direct drive propeller fans with permanently lubricated ball bearing. Furnish capacity control by cycling fans and modulating one fan. J. Control System: 1. Unit Mounted: Main fan contactor, compressor contactor, compressor start capacitor, controls transformer with circuit breaker, solid state temperature and humidity control modules, humidity contactor, time delay relay, reheat contactor, and high temperature thermostat. 2. Solid state wall mounted with start/stop switch, adjustable humidity setpoint, adjustable temperature setpoint. K. Performance: 1. Refer to schedules. 2.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to schedules. B. Motors: In accordance with Section 23 05 13. C. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount on equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify ceiling system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installation of computer room air conditioning units with computer room raised floor. B. Coordinate installation of air conditioning unit with computer room ceiling. C. Install drainage piping connections for condensate. Refer to Section 23 21 13. D. Install refrigerant piping connections to air-cooled condensing units. Refer to Section 23 23 00. E. Install accessories furnished loose for field mounting. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8123 - 5 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR- CONDITIONERS F. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. G. Install control wiring between control panel and field mounted control devices. H. Provide connection to electrical service. Refer to Section 26 05 03. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Test and record for maintenance of room conditions over continuous 24-hour period. C. Adjust and balance and repeat test when necessary to demonstrate compliance with performance. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers’ field services. B. Furnish services of factory trained representative for minimum of three days to start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation and maintenance. C. Set initial temperature and humidity set points. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training. B. Demonstrate system operations and verify specified performance. C. Demonstrate alarm conditions. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Refer to schedules on drawings. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8126 - 1 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS SECTION 23 8126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Condensing unit. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for concrete foundations specified by this section. 2. Section 23 04 00 – General Conditions for Mechanical Trades 3. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Vibration isolators. 4. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC: Controls remote from unit. 5. Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls: Sequences of operation applying to units in this section. 6. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for connection to hot water and drain piping specified by this section. 7. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate Heating Piping: Execution requirements for connection to steam supply and steam condensate return piping specified by this section. 8. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Execution requirements for connection to refrigerant piping specified by this section. 9. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Flexible connections. 10. Section 25 50 00 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls: Control systems remote from unit. 11. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Electrical connection to units. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 3. ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. 4. ARI 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Condensing Units. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. 2. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. E. National Fire Protection Association: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8126 - 2 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Weights. 4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements. 5. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 6. Controls. 7. Accessories. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. C. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when used in combination with compressors and evaporator coils when tested in accordance with ARI 210/240. B. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240. C. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270. D. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years of experience approved by manufacturer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8126 - 3 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units. C. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of condensing units with concrete pad 1.09 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer’s warranty for compressors. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. Include maintenance items as shown in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including filter replacements, fan belt replacement, and controls checkout and adjustments. B. Furnish 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions for this maintenance period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corp. 2. Lennox International 3. McQuay International 4. Rheem Manufacturing 5. The Trane Company 6. Daikin B. Product Description: Split system consisting of condensing unit including compressor, refrigeration circuit, condenser, controls, condensing unit accessories, and refrigeration specialties. 2.02 CONDENSING UNIT A. General: Factory assembled and tested air cooled condensing units, consisting of casing, compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. B. Unit Casings: Exposed casing surfaces constructed of galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. Designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for components and controls, and complete with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8126 - 4 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS C. Compressor: Dual refrigeration circuit with rotary or hermetic reciprocating type compressors, resiliently mounted, with positive lubrication, and internal motor overload protection. D. Condenser Coil: Constructed of copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum or copper fins, factory leak and pressure tested. E. Controls: Furnish operating and safety controls including high and low pressure cutouts. Control transformer. Furnish magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors. F. Condenser Fans and Drives: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced. Wired to operate with compressor. Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motors with built-in thermal overload protection. Furnish high efficiency fan motors. G. Condensing Unit Accessories: Furnish the following accessories: 1. Time delay relay. 2. Anti-short cycle timer. 3. Disconnect switch. 4. Vibration isolators. 5. Coil with corrosion resistant coating capable of withstanding salt spray test of 1000 hours in accordance with ASTM B117. 6. Condenser Coil Guard: Condenser fan openings furnished with PVC coated steel wire safety guards. 7. Suction and discharge pressure gauges. H. Refrigerant Piping 1. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn or annealed. a. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. b. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. I. Refrigeration specialties: Furnish the following: 1. Charge of compressor oil. 2. Holding charge of refrigerant. 3. Replaceable core type filter drier. 4. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator. 5. Shut-off valves on suction and liquid piping. 6. Liquid line solenoid valve. 7. Charging valve. 8. Oil level sight glass. 9. Pressure relief device. J. Refrigerant: Furnish charge of refrigerant R-410A. 2.03 CONTROLS A. Thermostat: Provide programmable wall-mounted space thermostat. PART 3 ECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify concrete pad for condensing unit is ready for unit installation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8126 - 5 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR- CONDITIONERS 3.02 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT A. Install refrigerant piping from cooling coil to condensing unit. B. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant. C. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. D. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout. 3.04 CLEANING A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. B. Install new throwaway filters in units at Substantial Completion. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate air handling unit operation and maintenance. B. Demonstrate starting, maintenance, and operation of condensing unit. C. Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8 hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of units. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 days notice to Architect/Engineer of training date. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not operate air handling units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8200 - 1 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS SECTION 23 8200 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Air coils. 2. Electric baseboard radiation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 04 00 – General Conditions for Mechanical Trades 2. Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Product requirements for motors for placement by this section. 3. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation: Execution requirements for insulation specified by this section. 4. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for connection of chilled water, hot water, and drain piping to units specified by this section. 5. Section 23 21 16 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product requirements for hydronic piping specialties for placement by this section. 6. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate Heating Piping: Execution requirements for connection of steam supply and steam condensate return piping to units specified by this section. 7. Section 23 22 16 - Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties: Product requirements for steam piping specialties for placement by this section. 8. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Execution requirements for connection of refrigerant piping to units specified by this section. 9. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Execution requirements for ducts specified by this section. 10. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connection to units specified by this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cross sections of cabinets, grilles, bracing and reinforcing, and typical elevations. Indicate schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number of pieces of element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers. C. Product Data: Submit coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections, and rough-in dimensions. Submit mechanical and electrical service locations, capacities and accessories or optional items. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8200 - 2 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and locations of access doors in radiation cabinets required for access to valves. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturers descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept units on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage. Store under roof. B. Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and by storing indoors. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs. 1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR COILS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corp. 2. Lennox International 3. McQuay International 4. Rheem Manufacturing 5. The Trane Company 6. Daikin B. Fabrication: 1. Tubes: 3/8 inch OD seamless copper arranged in parallel or staggered pattern, expanded into fins, brazed joints. 2. Fins: Aluminum or copper continuous plate type with full fin collars or individual helical spiral finned tube type wound under tension. 3. Casing: Die formed channel frame of 16 gage galvanized steel with 3/8 inch mounting holes on 6 inch centers. Furnish intermediate center tube supports for plate fin coils longer than 40 inches. Furnish intermediate tube supports for spiral fin coils at manufacturer’s recommended intervals to eliminate sagging during operation. C. Refrigerant Cooling Coils: 1. Headers: Seamless copper tubes with silver brazed joints. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8200 - 3 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 2. Liquid Distributors: Brass or copper venturi or orifice type or removable nozzle type distributor with seamless copper distributor tubes, minimum 1/4 inch OD for refrigerant R-410A. 3. Leak testing: Air test under water at 300 psig for working pressure of 300 psig; dehydrate, and seal with dry air or nitrogen charge. 4. Configuration: Self-draining, down feed with bottom non-oil trapping connection. 5. Fin Spacing: 14 fins per inch. 2.02 ELECTRIC BASEBOARD A. Manufacturers: 1. QMark 2. Vulcan 3. ElectroMode B. Assembly: UL listed and labeled with terminal box and cover, and built-in controls. C. Heating Elements: Enclosed copper tube, aluminum finned element of coiled nickel- chrome resistance wire centered in tubes and embedded in refractory material. D. Enclosure: Minimum 0.080 inch thick aluminum with 4 inch high back and top of one piece; front panel, end panel, end caps, corners, and joiner pieces to snap together, and front panel easily removable. Furnish full-length damper. E. Control: Built-in bi-metal heating thermostat, factory wired. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. For recessed units, verify recess dimensions are correct size. B. Verify wall construction is ready for installation. C. Verify ductwork is ready for installation. D. Verify concealed blocking and supports are in place and connections are correctly located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install air coils in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00. B. Support air coil sections independent of piping on steel channel or double angle frames and secure to casings. Furnish frames for maximum three coil sections. Arrange supports to avoid piercing drain pans. Install with airtight seal between coil and duct or casing. C. Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins. D. Install coils level. E. Make connections to coils with unions and flanges. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 23 8200 - 4 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS F. For cooling coils where air velocity exceeds 550 ft/min, install three break moisture eliminators of 24 gage galvanized steel. G. Install insulation air coil casings. Refer to Section 23 07 00. H. Install drain pan and drain piping connection for cooling coils. Fabricate drain pan from 20 gage galvanized steel. Extend 3 inches from face of coil entering air side, 6 inches from face of coil leaving air side and 4 inches from face of eliminators. Pipe drain pans to janitor sink. Refer to Section 23 21 13. I. On refrigerant coils, install sight glass in liquid piping within 12 inches of coil. Refer to Section 23 23 00. J. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceilings are finished and painted. Avoid damage. K. Protection: Install finished cabinet units with protective covers during remainder of construction. L. Install electric heating equipment including devices furnished by manufacturer but not factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal. Install electrical wiring in accordance with manufacturer's submittals and Section 26 05 03. 3.03 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets. C. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. D. Install new filters. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES SECTION 26 0400 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This section applies to certain sections of Division 08 “Openings”, Division 11 “Equipment”, Division 12 “Furnishings”, Division 21“Fire Protection, Division 22 “Plumbing”, Division 23 "Mechanical, Division 28 “Electronic Safety and Security” and this section applies to all sections of Division 26, "Electrical" of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. C. The Drawings of other trades Architectural, Structural, Landscape, Civil, Mechanical, Fire Protection and Plumbing, and Electronic Safety and Security shall be examined for coordination and familiarity of work with other Contractors. Any duplication or omission of provisions in this project should be brought to the attention of the Owners prior to Bidding. D. The drawings of equipment suppliers shall be examined for coordination and familiarity of work with Owner’s equipment suppliers. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are a part of this Division and are to be considered a part of this Contract. B. Where items of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are repeated in other Sections of the Specifications, it is merely intended to qualify or to call particular attention to them. It is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted if not repeated therein. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors supplying labor and/or equipment and/or materials as required under each Section of this Division. Where conflicts exist between the drawings and the specifications or between this section of the specifications and other sections, the more stringent or higher cost option shall apply. C. It is the intent of this Section of the Specifications to establish a standard of quality and performance characteristics for basic materials and installation methods used in building electrical (communications and electronic safety and security) systems. 1.03 INTENT A. This contract is for all labor, materials and equipment required for installation. The system shall be complete and finished in all respects, tested and ready for operation. Work shall include calibration of equipment with factory settings. All materials, equipment and apparatus shall be new and of first class quality. B. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on drawings but mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES complete and perfect in all respects and ready for operation as determined by good trade practice even if not particularly specified, shall be furnished, delivered and installed under their respective Divisions without any additional expense to the Owner. C. Minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary for proper installation and operation shall be included in the work as though they were hereinafter shown or specified. D. Work under each Section shall include giving written notice to the Owner and Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable; in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; and any necessary items of work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually agreed that work under each Section has included the cost of all required items for the accepted, satisfactory functioning of the entire system without extra compensation. E. Location of all existing systems and equipment shown on floor plans is based on the best available information. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and locations of existing systems and equipment in the field and adjust as necessary. F. Certain items of existing equipment may be indicated for removal or relocation. Items noted for removal shall be disconnected and turned over to the Owner or disposed of by the Contractor if the Owner so requests. If instructed to dispose of items, the Contractor shall remove the items from the premises and dispose of them in a safe, legal and responsible manner and location. Items noted for relocation are intended for reuse in another location as designated on the Drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to remove the material from its present location, store the material in a safe place and reinstall the material in its new location. Questions regarding the suitability of the material or equipment shall be brought to the attention of the Owner and Engineer in writing. G. Wherever a particular piece of equipment, device, or material is specifically indicated on the Drawings by model number, type, series or other means, that specification shall take precedence over equipment or materials specified herein. For example, if a particular switch is specified on the Drawings, its specification takes precedence over switch specified herein. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Word “Subcontractor” means specifically the subcontractor working under this Division. Other Contractors are specifically designated “Plumbing Subcontractor”, “General Contractor” and so on. Note: Take care to ascertain limits of responsibility for connecting equipment, which requires connections by two or more trades. B. Word “install” shall mean set in place complete with all mounting facilities and connections as necessary ready for normal use or service. C. Words “furnish” or “supply” shall mean purchase, deliver to, and off-load at the job site, all ready to be installed including where appropriate all necessary interim storage and protection. D. Word “provide” shall mean furnish (or supply) and install as necessary. E. Word “finished” refers to all rooms and areas scheduled to be painted in Room Finish Schedule on the drawings. All rooms and areas not covered in the Schedule, including FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES underground tunnels and areas above ceilings shall be considered not finished, unless otherwise noted. F. No Exceptions Taken – reviewed and determined to be in general conformance with contract documents. G. Words “approved equal” mean any product, which in the opinion of the Engineer is equal in quality, arrangement, appearance, and performance to the product specified. H. Word “wiring” shall mean cable assembly, raceway, conductors, fittings and any other necessary accessories to make a complete wiring system. I. Word “product” shall mean any item of equipment, material, fixture, apparatus, appliance or accessory installed under this Division. J. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." K. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended. L. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Engineer," "requested by the Engineer," and similar phrases. M. Approve: The term "approved," where used in conjunction with the Engineer's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in General and Supplementary Conditions. N. Regulation: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. O. Remove: The term “remove” means “to disconnect from its present position, remove from the premises and to dispose of in a legal manner.” P. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. Q. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1.05 DRAWINGS A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the Contract. Consult the Architectural Drawings and Details for exact location of fixtures and equipment; where same are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect. (Do not scale the drawings) FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES B. Work under each Section shall closely follow Drawings in layout of work; check Drawings of other Divisions to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom; where space conditions appear inadequate, Owner and Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with installations. C. The Owner may, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and/or for proper execution of the work. D. Where variances occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within either of the Documents, the item or arrangement of better quality, higher rating, or higher value shall be included in the Contract price. The Owner and Engineer shall decide on the item and the manner in which the work shall be installed. 1.06 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS A. Before submitting his Bid, the Contractors shall visit the site and become thoroughly familiar with all existing conditions under which his work will be installed. This Contract includes all modifications of existing systems required for the installation of new equipment. This Contract includes all necessary offsets, transitions and modifications required to install all new equipment in existing spaces. All new and existing equipment and systems shall be fully operational under this Contract before the job is considered complete. The Contractors shall be held responsible for any assumptions he makes, any omissions or errors he makes as a result of his failure to become fully familiar with the existing conditions at the site and the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at the site and check the correctness of same as related to the work. C. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancies between actual measurements and those indicated which prevent following good practice or which interfere with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, the Engineer will be notified and work will not proceed until instructions from the Engineer are received. 1.07 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Reference Standard Compliance 1. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations such as American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. 2. Independent Testing Organization Certificate: In lieu of the label or listing, indicated above submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the engineer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES B. The Following Codes and Standards for the state and local jurisdiction where the project is located as listed below apply to all electrical work. Wherever Codes and/or Standards are mentioned in these Specifications, the latest applicable edition or revision shall be followed: Massachusetts State Building Code Including all Supplements Massachusetts State Fire Safety Code Including all Supplements The International Building Code The International Mechanical Code The International Plumbing Code NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code Model Energy Code NECA - 1 Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction ASHRAE 90.1 and International Energy Conservation Code C. The following Standards shall be used where referenced by the following abbreviations: AIA American Institute of Architects ANSI American National Standards Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual FSSC Federal Specification IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers NBS National Bureau of Standards NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NSC National Safety Council OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration UL Underwriters’ Laboratories FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES D. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and recommendations of the NFPA, the requirements of the local utility companies, the recommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction and the requirements of all Governmental departments having jurisdiction. E. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and Drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether shown on Drawings and/or specified or not. 1.08 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits; and pay all Government and State sales taxes and fees where applicable, and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with the work, file all necessary Drawings, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of all Governmental and State departments having jurisdiction, obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work, and deliver a copy to the Owner and Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. 1.09 EQUIPMENT EQUIVALENTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Certain manufacturers of material, apparatus or appliances are indicated in the drawings and specifications for this project. These items have been used as the basis of design, and as a convenience in fixing the minimum standard of workmanship, finish and design that is required. If the Contractors uses an “approved equal” alternative to the basis of design, and if the features of that alternative have an impact on other components of the Project, the Contractor shall include the necessary adjustments in those components, whether for architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, fire protection, or any other elements, plus any adjustments for difference in performance. B. Where one name only is used and is followed by the words “or approved equal”, the Contractor must use the item named or he is required to apply for a substitution. Where one name only is used, the Contractor must use that item named. C. Where no specific make of material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be submitted for Architect and Engineer review. D. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item that is different from the basis of design in the Drawings and specifications, and that will require the redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other component of the mechanical, electrical, or architectural layout, the Contractor shall provide the necessary redesign of those components. E. Where the Contractor proposes to deviate (provide an equivalent or request for substitution) from the basis of design scheduled equipment or materials as hereinafter specified or shown on the drawings, they are required to submit a requested for substitution in writing. The Contractor shall state in their request whether it is a substitution, equivalent or a non approved equivalent to that specified and the amount of credit or extra cost involved. A copy of said request shall be included in the Base Bid with manufacturer’s equipment cuts. The Base Bid shall be based on using the materials and equipment as specified with no exceptions. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES F. If an alternative or substitute item results in a difference in quantity and arrangement of piping, ductwork, valves, pumps, insulation, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and install any such additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner including any costs added to other trades due to the equivalent change from the basis of design detailed in the drawings or included within the specifications. G. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as an “equivalent” shall meet the following requirements: 1. The equivalent shall have the same construction features such as, but not limited to: a. Material thickness, gauge, weight, density, etc. b. Welded, riveted, bolted, etc., construction c. Finish, undercoating, corrosion protection 2. The equivalent shall perform with the same or better operating efficiency. 3. The equivalent shall be locally represented by the manufacturer for service, parts and technical information. 4. The equivalent shall bear the same labels of performance certification as is applicable to the specified item, such as UL or NEMA labels. H. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as a “substitution” shall meet the following requirements: 1. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received in writing 14 days before the bid date. Requests received later than 14 days before the bid date may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Engineer/Owner. Once the Contractor submits a complete request for substitution as determined by the engineer, the engineer reserves the right to request the time necessary to evaluate the request for substitution and review it with the Owner. 2. Submit three (3) copies of each request for substitution for consideration. 3. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 8 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. h. Engineer's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the Engineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance of a product substitution will be in the form of an Addendum. i. Other Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Engineer when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Engineer; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1) The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 2) The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 3) A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. 1.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Provide Submittals in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and as indicated in the following. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 9 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1. Allow two weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Engineer will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. 3. Allow two weeks for reprocessing each submittal. 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. D. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Engineer. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. E. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Engineer using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. F. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Engineer will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. G. Action Stamp: The Engineer will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, to indicate the action taken. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. The Contractor shall submit for review detailed shop drawings of all equipment and material specified in each section and coordinated ductwork layouts. No material or equipment may be delivered to the job site or installed until the Contractor has received shop drawings for the particular material or equipment which have been properly reviewed. Shop drawings shall be submitted within 60 days after award of Contract before any material or equipment is purchased. The Contractor shall submit for review copies of all shop drawings to be incorporated in the Electrical Contract. Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions for the quantity of copies required for submission. Where quantities are not specified, provide seven (7) copies for review. C. Provide shop drawings for all devices specified under equipment specifications for all systems including fire alarm, switchgear, clock, lighting, etc., or where called for elsewhere in the Specifications, or where scheduled on the drawings, or where called out on the drawings. Shop drawings shall include manufacturers’ names, catalog numbers, cuts, diagrams, dimensions, identification of products and materials included, compliance with specified standards, notation of coordination requirements, notation of dimensions established by field measurement and other such descriptive data as may be required to identify and accept the equipment. A complete list in each category (example: all fixtures) of all shop drawings, performance cuts, material lists, etc., shall be submitted to the Engineer at one time. No consideration will be given to a partial shop drawing submittal. D. Submittals shall be marked with the trade involved, i.e., Electrical, HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, etc. when the submittal could involve more than one trade. E. Where multiple quantities or types of equipment are being submitted, provide a cover sheet (with a list of contents) on the submittal identifying the equipment or material being submitted. F. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for review shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract time. No claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed, nor shall the Contractor be entitled to purchase, furnish and/or install equipment which has not been reviewed by the Engineer. G. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary templates, patterns, etc., for installation work and for the purpose of making adjoining work conform; furnish setting plans and shop details to other trades as required. H. Acceptance rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, review does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Verify available space prior to submitting shop drawings. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 11 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES I. Acceptance of shop drawings shall not apply to quantity nor relieve Contractor of his responsibility to comply with intent of Drawings and Specifications. J. Acceptance of shop drawings is final and no further changes will be allowed without the written consent of the Engineer. K. Acceptance of shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor from submitting, coordinating and implementing schedules, forms, worksheets and similar as required for owner/operator input and approval as specified herein and required for proper system operation. L. Shop drawing submittal sheets which may show items that are not being furnished shall have those items crossed off to clearly indicate which items will be furnished. M. Bidders shall not rely on any verbal clarification of the Drawings and/or Specifications. Any questions shall be referred to the Engineer in writing at least five (5) working days prior to Bidding to allow for issuance of an Addendum. N. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. 1.12 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 01 Section "PROJECT COORDINATION," to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of light fixtures, panelboards, conduits, cabinets, etc. Include the following: 2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. 3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including NEC requirements and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. 4. Equipment connections and support details. 5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. 6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. 7. Sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases. B. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. C. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 12 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES D. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling- mounted items. E. Electronic copies of the MEP floor plans are available to use as a basis for preparing coordination drawings and can be provided by the Engineer. If the Contractor elects to obtain the Engineer’s electronic files an Electronic File Release Form must be submitted. This form must be signed by the Contractor, Owner, and Architect. Upon receipt of a signed copy of the Electronic File Release Form, the Engineer will provide copies of the electronic files for the Contractor’s use. A copy of the Electronic File Release Form is appended to the end of this specification section 1.13 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS A. All work shall be carried out in conjunction with other trades and full cooperation shall be given in order that all work may proceed with a minimum of delay and interference. Particular emphasis is placed on timely installation of major apparatus and furnishing other Contractors, especially the Contractor or Construction Manager, with information as to openings, chases, sleeves, bases, inserts, equipment locations, panels, etc., required by other trades. B. The Contractors are required to examine all of the Project Drawings and mutually arrange work so as to avoid interference with the work of other trades. In general, ductwork, heating, condenser, chilled water piping, sprinkler piping and drainage lines take precedence over water, gas and electrical conduits. The Engineer shall make final decisions regarding the arrangement of work which cannot be agreed upon by the Contractors. C. Where the work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to or will interfere with work of other trades, the Contractors will cooperate in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. D. If the work under a Section is installed before coordinating with other Divisions or Sections or so as to cause interference with work of other Sections, the necessary changes to correct the condition shall be made by the Contractor causing the interference without extra charge to the Owner. E. Where work is installed prior to preparation and approval of the Coordination Drawings or in conflict with the approved Coordination drawings and if so directed in other Sections, the Contractor indicated shall prepare composite working drawings and sections clearly showing how the work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades, at no extra charge to the Owner. 1.14 WORKMANSHIP A. Service Support: The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. B. Modification of References: In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES C. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of the installation of the work together with all skilled workmen, journeymen, electricians, helpers and laborers required to unload, transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test each system. D. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, all equipment and materials shall be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer and in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends. E. All labor for installation of electrical systems shall be performed by experienced, skilled tradesmen under the supervision of a licensed journeyman foreman. All work shall be of a quality consistent with good trade practice and shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any work which, in his opinion, has been installed in a substandard, dangerous or unserviceable manner. The Contractor shall replace said work in a satisfactory manner at no extra cost to the Owner. 1.15 SHUTDOWNS A. When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existing operating system, the connection of the new system shall be performed at such time as designated by the Owner. B. The Engineer and the Owner shall be notified in writing of the estimated duration of the shutdown period at least ten (10) days in advance of the date the work is to be performed. C. Work shall be arranged for continuous performance whenever possible. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, including overtime if required, to assure that existing operating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to make necessary connections. 1.16 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General: Provide new materials and equipment; if acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. C. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. D. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A" fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for the exposures. E. Provide temporary lighting in all areas, throughout construction activities. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 14 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES 1. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Engineer, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. 2. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear. a. Except where overhead service must be used, install electric power service underground. b. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead, and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, AC 20 ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance. 3. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout the construction period. F. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. G. Termination and Removal: Unless the Engineer requires that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. 1.17 PROJECT PHASING A. Work under each Section shall include all necessary temporary connections, equipment, conduit, wiring, fire alarm equipment and testing, lighting and emergency lighting, fire stopping, connection of necessary mechanical equipment, labor, and material as necessary to accommodate the phasing of Construction as developed by the General Contractor or Construction Manager and approved by the Owner. All existing systems that pass-thru an area of the building or are required to be maintained in a phased fashion during construction shall remain operational during all phases of construction. No extra compensation shall be granted the Contractor for work required to maintain existing systems operational or to accommodate the construction phasing of the project. 1.18 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen and shall include making good all damage thus caused. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 15 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until the facility has been accepted by the Owner. Protect work against theft, injury or damage and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place and completely connecting equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged. D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. 1.19 ADJUSTING AND TESTING A. After all the equipment and accessories to be furnished are in place, they shall be put in final adjustment and subjected to such operating tests so as to assure the Engineer that they are in proper adjustment and in satisfactory, permanent operating condition. B. Where requested by the Engineer or specified in the contract documents, a factory- trained service representative shall inspect the installation and assist in the initial startup and adjustment to the equipment. The period of these services shall be for such time as necessary to secure proper installation and adjustments. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation, the service representative shall supervise the initial operation of the equipment and instruct the personnel responsible for operation and maintenance of the equipment. The service representative shall notify the Contractor in writing that the equipment was installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations and is operating as intended by the manufacturer. Factory start-up reports shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals under the appropriate equipment section. 1.20 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment of all foreign substances, oils, dust, dirt, etc., inside and out before final acceptance by the Engineer. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and/or remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired or replaced when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all conduits shall be capped in an acceptable manner to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris and excess materials left over from his work. E. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 16 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces and panelboard interiors. 4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean light fixtures and lamps. F. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove and dispose of ALL waste materials, packaging material, skids etc. from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner in accordance with municipal, state and federal regulations. G. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. 1.21 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE A. Upon completion of all work and tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating his system and equipment for a period specified under each applicable Section of this Division. During this period, he shall fully instruct the Owner or the Owner’s representative in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The Contractor shall give at least seven (7) day notice to the Owner and the Engineer in advance of this period. B. The Contractor shall include the maintenance schedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this Division. C. The Contractor shall physically demonstrate procedures for all routine maintenance of all equipment furnished under each respective Section to assure accessibility to all devices. D. An authorized manufacturer’s representative shall attest in writing that the equipment has been properly installed prior to startup of any major equipment. At a minimum, the following equipment will require this inspection: emergency generator, fire alarm system, nurse call system, paging systems, etc. These letters will be bound into the operating and maintenance books. E. Refer to individual trade Sections for any other particular requirements related to operating instructions. F. Demonstration shall be recorded on flash drives with two (2) drives turned over to the Owner. 1.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and as follows. The Contractor shall prepare six (6) copies of a complete FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 17 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES maintenance and operating instructions manual, bound in booklet form. Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. B. Manual shall include the following: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturers printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 5. Emergency instructions. 6. Spare parts list. 7. Copies of warranties. 8. Wiring diagrams. 9. Recommended "turn around" cycles. 10. Inspection procedures. 11. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 12. Equipment start-up reports. C. Include in the manual, a tabulated equipment schedule for all equipment. Schedule shall include pertinent data such as: make, model number, serial number, voltage, normal operating current, belt size, filter quantities and sizes, bearing number, etc. Schedule shall include maintenance to be done and frequency. D. Maintenance and instruction manuals shall be submitted to the Owner at the same time as the seven (7) day notice is given prior to the instruction period. 1.23 ACCEPTANCES A. The equipment, materials, workmanship, design and arrangement of all work installed under the Electrical Sections shall be subject to the review of the Engineer. B. Within 30 days after the awarding of a Contract, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for review, a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the work FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 18 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES under the Electrical Sections. The intent to use the exact makes specified does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of submitting such a list. C. If extensive or unacceptable delivery time is expected on a particular item of equipment specified, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer, in writing, within 30 days of the awarding of the Contract. In such instances, deviations may be made pending acceptance by the Engineer or the Owner’s representative. D. Where any specific material, process or method of construction or manufactured article is specified by reference to the catalog number of a manufacturer, the Specifications are to be used as a guide and are not intended to take precedence over the basic duty and performance specified or noted on the Drawings. In all cases, the Electrical Contractor shall verify the duty specified with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review. Equipment characteristics are to be used as mandatory requirements where the Contractor proposes to use an acceptable equivalent. E. If material or equipment is installed before it is reviewed and/or approved, the Contractor shall be liable for its removal and replacement at no extra charge to the Owner if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material or equipment does not meet the intent of, or standard of quality implied by, the Drawings and Specifications. F. Failure on the part of the Engineer to reject shop drawings or to reject work in progress shall not be interpreted as acceptance of work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications. Work not in conformance with the Drawings and/or Specifications shall be corrected whenever it is discovered. 1.24 RECORD DRAWINGS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Engineer's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 19 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES 5. Final record documents shall be prepared in the latest Revit version and digital media for all drawings and a clean set of reproducible paper copies shall be turned over to the Owner at the completion of the work. 1.25 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. The following general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties are to be included: 1. General close-out requirements included in Section "Project Close-out." 2. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installation that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 02 through 50. 3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. C. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime Contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own Contract. 1.26 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, right and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. E. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 20 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES F. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. G. Submit written warranties to the Engineer prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Engineer's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Engineer. H. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Engineer within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. I. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Engineer for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 02 through 50 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. J. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion, compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. K. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS," the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. 3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. 1.27 GUARANTEES A. The Contractor shall guarantee all material and workmanship under these Specifications and the Contract for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by Owner. During this guarantee period, all defects developing through faulty equipment, materials or workmanship shall be corrected or replaced immediately by this Contractor without expense to the Owner. Such repairs or replacements shall be made to the Engineers satisfaction. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 21 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES B. Contractor shall provide name, address, and phone number of all contractors and subcontractors and associated equipment they provided 1.28 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Contractor shall submit annual maintenance proposal to the Architect/Engineer for review and approval as part of the close out documents. B. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. C. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. D. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. E. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. F. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Engineer will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. The Engineer will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0400 - 22 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TRADES Electronic File Release Form DELIVERY OF ELECTRONIC FILES FOR: Project Name In accepting and utilizing any drawings or other data on any form of electronic media generated and provided by the Design Professional, the Client covenants and agrees that all such drawings and data are instruments of service of the Design Professional, who shall be deemed the author of the drawings and data, and shall retain all common law, statutory law and other rights, including copyrights. The Client further agrees not to use these drawings and data, in whole or in part, for any purpose or project other than the project which is the subject of this Agreement. The Client agrees to waive all claims against the Design Professional resulting in any way from any unauthorized changes or reuse of the drawings and data for any other project by anyone other than the Design Professional. In addition, the Client agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to indemnify and hold the Design Professional harmless from any damage, liability or cost, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs of defense, arising from any changes made by anyone other than the Design Professional or from any reuse of the drawings and data without the prior written consent of the Design Professional. Under no circumstances shall transfer of the drawings and other instruments of service on electronic media for use by the Client be deemed a sale by the Design Professional, and the Design Professional makes no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. _____________________________________________ ________________________ Client’s Signature Date _____________________________________________ Company - Title _____________________________________________ ________________________ Architects’ Signature Date _____________________________________________ Firm - Title _____________________________________________ ________________________ Owner’s Signature Date _____________________________________________ Company - Title FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 1 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single conductor building wire. B. Metal-clad cable. C. Wiring connectors. D. Electrical tape. E. Heat shrink tubing. F. Wire pulling lubricant. G. Cable ties. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection. C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors. D. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. E. Section 283100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm system conductors and cables. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013. B.ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011. C.ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014). D.ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010. E.ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 2 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES F.FS A-A-59544 - Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation); Federal Specification; Revision A, 2008. G.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. H.NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); 2012. I.NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; 2009. J.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2013. K.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. L.UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M.UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N.UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O.UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P.UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q.UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R.UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid conflicts with piping or other potential conflicts. 3. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 3 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding. C. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on conductor and cable showing compliance with specified lead content requirements. D. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors substituted for copper conductors. Include proposed modifications to raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. to accommodate substituted conductors. E. Field Quality Control Test Reports. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for underground circuits. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding with work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 4 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted, unless noted otherwise. D. Service entrance cable is not permitted, unless noted otherwise. E. Armored cable is not permitted. F. Metal-clad cable is permitted as follows: 1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used: a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to luminaires. 1) Maximum Length: 6 feet. b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raised floors for branch circuits up to 20 A. 1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun from first outlet to panelboard. 2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used: a. Life Safety or Critical Power. b. Homeruns from first device, such as lighting fixture, MEP equipment, wiring device to panelboards. c. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction. d. Where exposed to view. e. Where exposed to damage. f. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations. g. For isolated ground circuits, unless provided with an additional isolated/insulated grounding conductor. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Provide conductors and cables with lead content less than 300 parts per million. D. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 5 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. F. Comply with NEMA WC 70. G. Comply with FS A-A-59544 where applicable. H. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. I. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. J. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526. K. Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and labeled as sunlight resistant. L. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only where specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in return air plenums. M. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors except where aluminum conductors are specifically indicated or permitted for substitution. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper unless specifically indicated as aluminum. Conductors designated with the abbreviation "AL" indicate aluminum. a. Substitution of aluminum conductors for copper is permitted, when approved by Engineer, Owner and authority having jurisdiction, only for the following: 1) Services: Copper conductors size 1/0 AWG and larger. 2) Feeders: Copper conductors size 1/0 AWG and larger. b. Where aluminum conductors are substituted for copper, comply with the following: 1) Size aluminum conductors to provide, when compared to copper sizes indicated, equivalent or greater ampacity and equivalent or less voltage drop. 2) Increase size of raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. as required to accommodate aluminum conductors. 3) Provide aluminum equipment grounding conductor sized according to NFPA 70. 4) Equip electrical distribution equipment with compression lugs for terminating aluminum conductors. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 6 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, or ASTM B8unless otherwise indicated. 3. Aluminum Conductors (only where specifically indicated): AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors recognized by ASTM B800 and compact stranded in accordance with ASTM B801 unless otherwise indicated. N. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. a. Exceptions: 1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet 10 AWG minimum, and sized for voltage drop. 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet 8 AWG minimum, and sized for voltage drop. 3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG minimum, and sized for voltage drop. 2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG. O. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. P. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape. 3. Color Code: a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray. b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 7 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded: White. c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. d. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink. e. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction. f. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code. 2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Copper Building Wire: a. Cerro Wire LLC. b. Southwire Company c. General Cable Technologies d. Substitutions: See Section 01 - Product Requirements. 2. Aluminum Building Wire (only where specifically indicated): a. Encore Wire Corporation b. Southwire Company c. Stabiloy, a brand of General Cable Technologies Corporation d. Substitutions: See Section 01 - Product Requirements. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. 2. Control Circuits: Stranded. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 8 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES E. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. a. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2. 2. Aluminum Building Wire (only where specifically indicated): Type XHHW-2. 2.04 METAL-CLAD CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems Inc. 2. Encore Wire Corporation 3. Southwire Company 4. General Cable Technologies 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Conductor Stranding: 1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. 2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. E. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2. F. Provide oversized neutral conductors where indicated or required. G. Provide dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor where indicated or required. H. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor. 1. Provide additional isolated/insulated grounding conductor where indicated or required. I. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape. J. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of installed location. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable. B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 260526. C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper conductors 10 AWG and smaller: Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps 2. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG: Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers 3. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and larger: Install pressure connectors or split bolt connectors. 4. Connectors for Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors. D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs. 2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified. 3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device. 4. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate disconnection. 5. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required. 6. Aluminum Conductors: Use compression connectors for all connections. 7. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connections to terminal screws. 8. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections. E. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors without stripping insulation. F. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 10 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES G. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M b. Ideal Industries, Inc. c. NSI Industries LLC. d. Ilsco e. Erico f. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. H. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy LLC. b. Ilsco c. Thomas & Betts Corporation d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. I. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy LLC. b. Ilsco c. Thomas & Betts Corporation d. Erico e. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. J. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection to be made. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy LLC. b. Ilsco c. Thomas & Betts Corporation FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 11 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. 2.06 WIRING ACCESSORIES A. Electrical Tape: 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M b. Plymouth Rubber Europa c. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. 2. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F . 3. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. 4. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service. B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M b. Burndy LLC. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M b. American Polywater Corporation c. Ideal Industries, Inc. d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 12 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy LLC. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 - Product Requirements. 2. Provide plenum rated cable ties. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING WORK A. Remove exposed abandoned wire and cable, including abandoned wire and cable above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces where removed cables pass through building finishes. B. Disconnect abandoned circuits and remove circuit wire and cable. Remove abandoned boxes when wire and cable servicing boxes is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes not removed. C. Provide access to existing wiring connections remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or install access panel. D. Extend existing circuits using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. E. Clean and repair existing wire and cable remaining or wire and cable to be reinstalled. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 13 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. 5. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70. 6. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted where indicated: a. Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors. b. Increase size of conductors as required accounting for ampacity derating. c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors. 7. Common Neutrals: Not allowed. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). D. Install aluminum conductors in accordance with NECA 104. E. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120. F. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. G. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. H. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 14 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles. 2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits. I. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. 1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC): a. Use listed fittings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. c. Do not use direct-bearing set-screw type fittings for cables with aluminum armor. d. Secure at maximum interval of 5 ft. e. Install parallel and perpendicular to building lines. f. Bundle cables in common routes back to panelboards. g. Secure from structure using suitable J-hooks or plenum rated cable ties. J. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet. K. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack. L. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. M. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70. N. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 3. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 4. Connections for Aluminum Conductors: Fill connectors with oxide inhibiting compound where not pre-filled by manufacturer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 15 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. O. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. 1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape. b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering, including motor leads, first apply varnished cambric electrical tape, followed by adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape. 2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. 3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing. P. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. Q. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible. R. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 0553. S. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07. T. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0519 - 16 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required. 1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding requirements. B. Conductors for grounding and bonding. C. Connectors for grounding and bonding. D. Ground rod electrodes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 – General Requirements B. Division 03– Concrete. C. Division 09 - Finishes. D. Section 260519 - Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color-coding. E. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A.IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System. B.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction. C.NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings. D.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems. E.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F.UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding system components. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0526 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate proposed arrangement for signal reference grids. Include locations of items to be bonded and methods of connection. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Field quality control test reports. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and connections. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. E. Grounding System Resistance: 1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0526 - 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method. 3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, System Neutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using "point-to-point" methods. F. Grounding Electrode System: 1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system. a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint. b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper. G. Separately Derived System Grounding: 1. Separately derived systems include, but are not limited to: a. Transformers (except autotransformers such as buck-boost transformers). 2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest effectively grounded metal building frame. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in source enclosure. 3. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest metal building frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived system, where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection. 4. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipment ground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect. 5. Where the source and first disconnecting means are in separate enclosures, provide supply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means. H. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0526 - 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. 3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus. 6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement. 7. Provide bonding for metal building frame. 8. Provide bonding for metal siding not effectively bonded through attachment to metal building frame. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260519: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth. 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway). 2. Factory Pre-fabricated Bonding Jumpers: Furnished with factory-installed ferrules; size braided cables to provide equivalent gage of specified conductors. C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0526 - 5 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS a. Exceptions: 1) Use mechanical connectors for connections to electrodes at ground access wells. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. a. Exceptions: 1) Use exothermic welded connections for connections to metal building frame. 4. Manufacturers - Mechanical and Compression Connectors: a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT) b. Burndy LLC. c. Harger Lightning & Grounding d. Thomas & Betts Corporation e. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. 5. Manufacturers - Exothermic Welded Connections: a. Burndy LLC. b. Cadweld, a brand of Erico International Corporation c. ThermOweld, a brand of Continental Industries, Inc. d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. D. Ground Rod Electrodes: 1. Comply with NEMA GR 1. 2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel. 3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Where rod lengths of greater than 10 feet are indicated or otherwise required, sectionalized ground rods may be used. 5. Manufacturers: a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT) b. Erico International Corporation c. Galvan Industries, Inc. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0526 - 6 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS d. Harger Lightning & Grounding e. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed. B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, surface contaminants at connection points. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provide ground plates. 1. Indoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with 4 inches of top of rod exposed. D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. 3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. E. Install in accordance with IEEE 142. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0526 - 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS F. Install rod electrodes at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install additional rod electrodes to achieve specified resistance to ground. G. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view. H. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Install separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. I. Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including service equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment. J. Accomplish grounding of electrical system by using insulated grounding conductor installed with feeders and branch circuit conductors in conduits. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to ground bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes or metal enclosures of service equipment. Ground conduits by means of grounding bushings on terminations at panelboards with installed number 12 conductor to grounding bus. K. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment. L. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 260553. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13. D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements. F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and attachment components for electrical equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 – General Requirements B. Section 260533 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits. C. Section 265100 - Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior luminaires. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. B.ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. C.ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2015. D.MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004. E.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. F.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G.UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. See Division 01: General Requirements. B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components being installed. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades and provide additional framing and materials required for installation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations. 4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. C. Sequencing: 1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured in accordance with Division 03. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel (strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors. C. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution. D. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with latest adopted version of applicable building code, including any addendum or supplements. C. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Certified by fastener system manufacturer with current operator's license. D. Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding: As specified in Section 260400 General Requirements for Electrical Trades. E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable. 3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted. 6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed. a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, fiberglass or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; zinc plated steel. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. 3. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation b. Erico International Corporation c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation d. Thomas & Betts Corporation FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS e. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation b. Erico International Corporation c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation d. Thomas & Betts Corporation e. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field- assembly of supports. 1. Comply with MFMA-4. 2. Channel Material: a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use galvanized steel. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel. 3. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch. 4. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height. 5. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation b. Thomas & Betts Corporation c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc. d. Substitutions: See Division 01- Product Requirements. e. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware produced by a single manufacturer. E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. 1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter. b. Busway Supports: 1/2 inch diameter. c. Single Conduit up to 1 inch trade size: 1/4 inch diameter. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS d. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch trade size: 3/8 inch diameter. e. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter. f. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter. g. Luminaires: 1/4 inch diameter. F. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors. 3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts. 5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts. 6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs. 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood: Use wood screws. 9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted. 10. Powder-actuated fasteners may be used with: a. Permission by Architect. b. Permission by Structural Engineer. c. Use only threaded studs; do not use pins. 11. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. a. Comply with MFMA-4. b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel. c. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch minimum base metal thickness. d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system. 12. Manufacturers - Mechanical Anchors: a. Hilti, Inc. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0529 - 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS b. ITW Red Head, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c. Powers Fasteners, Inc. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. e. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. 13. Manufacturers - Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. Powers Fasteners, Inc. c. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc. d. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. D. Unless specifically indicated, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. E. Unless specifically indicated, do not provide support from roof deck. F. Do not penetrate, notch, or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. G. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface- mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull- out. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0529 - 7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. H. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 260533. I. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 260533. J. Transformer Supports: Also comply with Section 262200. K. Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 265100. L. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour. M. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. N. Remove temporary supports. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Division 01 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 1 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit Applications 2. General Requirements 3. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). 4. Flexible metal conduit (FMC). 5. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). 6. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 7. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit. 8. Surface metal raceway 9. Wireway 10. Boxes 11. Accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260519 – Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 2. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT-S); C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 2 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; F. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; G. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; H. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). I. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q.UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 3 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for all conduits and fittings outlined in Part 2. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within or under structural concrete slabs, where permitted. 2. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits embedded within concrete slabs (where permitted), and conduits 2 inch trade size and larger. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures. G. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets and enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures. H. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Division 01 – General Requirements. 2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 4 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Division 01 – General Requirements B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. D. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 COORDINATION A. See Division 01 – General Requirements B. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 260503. C. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. C. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications listed below. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 1. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). Provide flush mounted boxes rated for masonry applications. 2. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or MC cable (where allowed).Provide flush mounted sheet-metal boxes. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 5 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or MC cable (where allowed). 4. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations Provide: a. Rigid steel conduit. b. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with compression fittings. c. Provide cast metal junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. 5. Exposed, Interior dry locations: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) 6. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. a. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: 1) Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets. 2) Where exposed below 20 feet in warehouse areas. 7. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit 8. Connections to Luminaires above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. a. Maximum Length: 6 feet. 9. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: a. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit or MC Cable. b. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. c. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated. d. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to: 1) Transformers. 2) Motors. 3) Pumps. 4) Fans. 10. Exposed Dry Finished Locations: Provide surface metal raceway and fittings. Unless specified on drawings, requires design team approval for use of surface metal raceway in finished locations. Coordinate all vertical runs of surface raceway with the architect prior to installation. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 6 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also, comply with Section 260526. B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch trade size. 3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch trade size. 4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/4 inch trade size. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube and Conduit. 2. Western Tube and Conduit. 3. Wheatland Tube Company. 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC, galvanized, rigid steel conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed, and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc. b. O-Z/Gedney. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation. d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 7 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Allied Tube and Conduit. 3. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation c. Thomas & Betts Corporation d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel. a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. 2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Allied Tube and Conduit. 3. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 8 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation c. Thomas & Betts Corporation d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings. 2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube and Conduit. 2. Western Tube and Conduit. 3. Wheatland Tube Company. 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation c. Thomas & Betts Corporation d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression or set screw type. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 9 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.07 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Cantex Inc 2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation 3. JM Eagle 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit. 2.08 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Wiring Devices. 2. Thomas & Betts Corp. 3. The Wiremold Co. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway. C. General: 1. System: Provide surface raceway systems for branch circuit and data network voice, video and other low-voltage wiring. Surface raceway system shall consist of raceway bases, covers, pre-divided raceway bases, dual covers, appropriate fittings and device mounting plates necessary for a complete installation. 2. Configuration: Raceways shall be one- or two-piece design with base and snap on cover, or three-piece design with base and two snap on covers, which snap side by side on a common base. Base shall be dividable with a fixed barrier for up to 4 compartments. Raceway shall be available in widths of 3/4" to 10" and depths of 17/32" to 5" Provide raceways from a company that can provide custom sizes if required. Raceway covers shall be available in tamper-resistant form with screws on access plates and covers of fittings, but not on standard FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 10 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS cover lengths. Raceways shall be multi-piece design with metal base and snap on metal covers. Assembled base and cover is 5-3/4" wide by 2-1/8" high with a cross section area of 10.06 sq. in. Base shall have (2) wiring channels, separated by (1) integral divider, large enough to accept standard power and communication devices without restricting capacity of the adjacent channel. The raceway base shall accept (2) covers that allow separation of services. The cover shall slightly curve and form the raceway sidewall. Provide the base with scored lines to facilitate sectioning of the raceway in 4" increments and include mounting holes, and tunnel knockouts in the divider wall that will facilitate the crossing over of services. 3. Fittings: Fittings shall include flat, internal and external elbows, couplings for joining raceway sections, wire clips, blank end fittings, and device mounting brackets and plates as applicable. Where required, provide tamper-resistant form, dividable with barriers and matching the size of the accompanying raceway base. Provide full capacity corner elbows and tee fittings to maintain a controlled 2" cable bend radius, meeting the specification for Fiber Optic and UTP cabling and exceeding the TIA/EIA-569-A requirements for communications pathways. 4. Device Brackets and Plates: Provide in sizes to match raceway width and with mounting holes located to ensure proper mounting of devices in up to 4 compartments. Device plates shall be available in any length from 6" to 60", with cutouts to accommodate various combinations of power and communications devices in up to 4 compartments. Provide 6" and 12" long device plates with a flange to overlap the joint of adjacent cover as applicable. 5. Communications Devices and Accessories: Raceway shall accommodate a complete line of connectivity outlets and modular inserts for UTP (including Category 5, 5e, 6) STP (150 ohm) fiber optic, coaxial, and other cabling types with matching faceplates and bezels to facilitate mounting. Where indicated, provide connectivity outlets and modular inserts by Ortronics or approved equal. D. Classification: 1. Raceway and system components shall be UL and CUL listed. 2. Surface raceways shall be suitable for use in dry interior locations only, as covered in Article 386 (Surface Metal Raceways) 388 (Surface Nonmetallic Raceways) of the National Electrical Code. 3. Surface metal raceways and fittings shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories under File Number E4376, Listing and Classification Number RJBT, and File Number E41751, Listing and Classification Number RJPR, respectively. 4. Systems shall comply with UL Standard UL5 for Surface Metal Raceways. 5. Larger 2 and 3 channel non-metallic raceways shall be UL Listed under File Nos. E90378 Guide RJTX and E90377 Guide RJYT, respectively. E. Surface Mounted Metal Raceways: V700 One-Piece Metal Raceway, G4000 Series Multi-Channel Steel Raceway, V2100 Single-Channel Metal Raceway by The Wiremold Company or approved equal. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, minimum thickness 0.040". FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 11 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2. Finish: Factory-applied polyester topcoat applied over ivory base suitable for field-applied topcoat, color by Architect. 3. Steel Device Brackets and Plates: Steel overlap device plate for horizontal installation of devices. Plate shall overlap cover to conceal seam. 4. Plastic Overlapping Cover Bracket and Faceplate: Plastic device mounting bracket and trim plate for horizontal installation of devices. Plate shall overlap cover to conceal seam. Faceplate shall accept a variety of power and data/communication devices. Plastic shall be compatible with UL 94 for Plastic. 5. Adjustable Length Raceway Couplings: Provide raceway base sections with adjustable couplings. Each pair of couplings works in conjunction with the raceway bases scored lines to allow less accurate field cuts. The coupling shall accommodate 4" of lateral movement and facilitate the ability of the raceway to maintain coordination with the wall framing as required. Each coupling shall provide a means of adding supplemental ground screws. 6. Fittings: Fittings shall include flat, internal and external elbows, tees, entrance fittings, wire clips, cover clips, couplings, support clips, and end caps. Covers for fittings shall overlap adjoining raceway covers a minimum of 3/8". Fittings shall be color matched to the raceway. Supply fittings with a base where applicable to eliminate mitering. Provide fittings with adjustable couplings that integrate with the raceway base. Provide a take-off fitting supporting dual services to adapt to existing flush wall boxes and other series of metallic raceways. Fittings shall have provisions to accept tamper resistant fasteners to fully secure the raceway. a. Fiber Optic/UTP/STP Fittings: Corner elbows, tees, and entrance end fittings as required to maintain a controlled 2" nominal cable bend radius that meets the specifications for Fiber Optic and UTP/STP cabling and exceeds TIA 569 requirements for communications pathways. b. Obstacle Avoidance and Offset Fittings: Provide fittings as required to bypass large and small obstacles and small offsets in supporting wall. Small obstacle avoidance fitting capable of being converted into a takeoff fitting to transition to other metallic raceways. 7. Device Brackets and Plates: a. Forward Fittings: Provide device brackets to install single-gang devices horizontally in either channel within the raceway. Provide horizontal device brackets with a single gang face plate. Horizontal device mounting brackets shall be a single piece with integral auxiliary grounding points. Device brackets and activation face plates shall allow the electrical or communications devices to face forward from the sidewall of the raceway. b. Communications Devices and Accessories: Raceway shall accommodate a complete line of connectivity outlets and modular inserts for UTP (including Category 5, 5e, 6) STP (150 ohm) fiber optic, coaxial, and other cabling types with matching faceplates and bezels to facilitate mounting. Provide with complete line of preprinted station and port identification labels. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 12 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS F. Finish: Architect to select from manufacturers standard color palette. 2.09 WIREWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Thomas & Betts Corp. 3. Hoffman. 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements B. Product Description: General purpose type wireway. C. Knockouts: Manufacturers standard. D. Cover: Screw cover with full gaskets. E. Connector: Flanged. F. Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws. G. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish. 2.10 BOXES A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 13 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products d. Leviton e. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation f. Thomas & Betts Corporation g. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements 2. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. 4. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes with threaded hubs where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit is used. 5. Use nonmetallic boxes where exposed rigid PVC conduit is used. 6. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. 7. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 8. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. 9. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. 10. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs. 11. Nonmetallic Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2, and list and label as complying with UL 514C. 12. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. 13. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes. 14. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep trade size. b. Communications Systems Outlets: 1) Minimum 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch trade size. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 14 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2) Provide with single-gang drywall ring. 3) Comply with Section 27 0533. c. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep trade size. 15. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches : 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. 2.NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel. 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches : a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. b. Boxes 6 square feet and Larger: Provide sectionalized screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures. 4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes: a. Provide lockable, hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable. c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for purpose indicated, with 25 percent spare terminal capacity. d. Provide with grounding stud. e. Provide with document pocket in cover. 5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. 6. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation b. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiegmann Products FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 15 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements D. Boxes for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 1203 for the classification of the installed location. 1. Manufacturers: a. Appleton, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation b. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation c. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Products d. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements 2. Provide outlet boxes and sealing fittings that comply with Article 501 of the NEC based on the classification of the area. 2.11 ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. B. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed. C. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound- force (890 N). D. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed. E. Mechanical Sleeve Seals F. Manufacturers: 1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. 2. NMP Corporation. 3. PSI Link-Seal. 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 – Product Requirements G. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. H. Use: Provide for all penetrations through foundation walls. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 16 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in. C. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 EXISTING WORK A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source. C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed. D. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel. E. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations or as specified. F. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 260526. B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 260529. C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 260553. D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. E. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). G. Conduit Routing: 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 17 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. 4. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed: a. Across floors. b. Across roofs. c. Across top of parapet walls. d. Across building exterior surfaces. e. Interior finished spaces. 5. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. 6. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points. 7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points. 8. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems. 11. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and surfaces exceeding 104 degrees F. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Heaters. b. Hot water piping. c. Flues. 12. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. H. Conduit Support: 1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 18 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Installation above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. 4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. 5. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface. 6. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits. 7. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. 8. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. 9. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only where approved). 10. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted. 11. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. I. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. 4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs 6” above finished floor. 7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. J. Penetrations: 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 19 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 6. Provide suitable mechanical sleeve seals where conduits penetrate exterior wall below grade. 7. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. 8. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals. 9. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view. 10. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Division 07. K. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. 2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. L. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. 2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. 3. Where conduits penetrate coolers or freezers. M. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 20 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS N. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526. O. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 260553. P. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. Q. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. 3.04 INSTALLATION – BOXES A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted. G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted. H. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. I. Box Locations: 1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Division 08 as required where approved by the Architect. 2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. 3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others. a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 262726. 4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. 5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints. 6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 21 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated. 8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation. 9. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced. a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to- back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual non-communicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads. b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of wall area. 10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 260534. J. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system. 4. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. 5. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. K. Install boxes plumb and level. L. Flush-Mounted Boxes: 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface. 2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0533 - 22 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS M. Floor-Mounted Cabinets: Mount on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Division 03. N. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. O. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Division 07. Q. Close unused box openings. R. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. S. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526. T. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 260553. 3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. B. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. See Division 01 – General Requirements Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. 3.07 CLEANING A. See Division 01 – General Requirements B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Identification nameplates and labels. C. Wire and cable markers. D. Voltage markers. E. Floor marking tape. F. Warning signs and labels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements B. Division 09 - Finishes. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS (follow the most currently adopted amended version) A.ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs. B.ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels. C.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D.NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace E.UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until identification products have been installed. 2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01- General Requirements B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product. C. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed designations, materials, legends, and formats. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Division 01 – General Requirements B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature and humidity is lower than recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are not already identified in accordance with specified requirements. B. Identification for Equipment: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a. Panelboards: 1) Identify panel name. 2) Identify ampere rating. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3) Identify voltage and phase. 4) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 5) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate. 6) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door, including spares and spaces b. Transformers: 1) Identify kVA rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment. c. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers: 1) Identify voltage and phase. 2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment. d. Enclosed Contactors: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify configuration, e.g., E.O.E.H. (electrically operated, electrically held) or E.O.M.H. (electrically operated, mechanically held). 4) Identify coil voltage. 5) Identify load(s) and associated circuits controlled. Include location. 2. Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of electrical equipment. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote disconnecting means. 5. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size. 6. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each motor controller to identify nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, voltage, and phase of motor(s) controlled. 7. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving fire alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT". 8. Use field-painted floor markings, floor marking tape, or warning labels to identify required equipment working clearances where indicated or where required by the authority having jurisdiction. a. Field-Painted Floor Markings: Alternating black and white stripes, 3 inches wide, painted in accordance with Division 09. 9. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation by NFPA 70, including but not limited to the following. a. Service equipment. b. Industrial control panels. c. Elevator control panels. d. Industrial machinery. 10. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches. b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE requirements" or approved equivalent. c. Service Equipment: Include the following information in accordance with NFPA 70. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 5 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1) Nominal system voltage. 2) Available fault current. 3) Clearing time of service overcurrent protective device(s). 4) Date label applied. 11. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent. 12. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all buildings, vaults, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT". 13. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment, compartments, and enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT". 14. Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment where multiple power sources are present with the word message "DANGER; Hazardous voltage; Multiple power sources may be present; Disconnect all electric power including remote disconnects before servicing" or approved equivalent. C. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 260519. 2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. 3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations: a. At each source and load connection. b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present. c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure. 4. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for grounding electrode conductors. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS D. Identification for Raceways: 1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet. 2. Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal power system for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet. a. Color-Coded Bands: Use field-painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape to mark bands 3 inches wide. 1) Color Code: a) Fire Alarm System: Red. 2) Field-Painting: Comply with Division 09. 3) Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 260519. 3. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify circuits enclosed for accessible conduits at wall penetrations, at floor penetrations, at roof penetrations, and at equipment terminations when source is not within sight. 4. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify spare conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location. 5. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways. 6. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for wireways at maximum intervals of 20 feet. E. Identification for Boxes: 1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present. 2. Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal power system. a. Color-Coded Boxes: Field-painted in accordance with Division 09 per the same color code used for raceways. 1) Fire Alarm System: Red. b. For exposed boxes in public areas, do not color code. 3. Use identification labels or handwritten text using indelible marker to identify circuits enclosed. a. For exposed boxes in public areas, use only identification labels. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 7 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for boxes containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT". F. Identification for Devices: 1. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 262726. 2. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices. a. For devices concealed above suspended ceilings, provide additional identification on ceiling tile below device location. 3. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles. a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide identification on inside surface of wallplate. 4. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall- mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location. 5. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection, where permitted. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brimar Industries, Inc. b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. c. Seton Identification Products d. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. 2. Materials: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use. 3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater than 4 inches. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. B. Identification Labels: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady Corporation b. Brother International Corporation c. Panduit Corp. d. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. 2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant. a. Use only for indoor locations. 3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. C. Format for Equipment Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches. 2. Legend: a. System designation where applicable: 1) Equipment Branch: Identify with text "EQUIPMENT" 2) Fire Alarm System: Identify with text "FIRE ALARM". b. Equipment designation or other approved description. c. Other information as indicated. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: a. System Designation: 1 inch. b. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch. c. Other Information: 1/4 inch. d. Exception: Provide minimum text height of 1 inch for equipment located more than 10 feet above floor or working platform. 5. Color: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS a. Normal Power System: White text on black background. b. Fire Alarm System: White text on red background. D. Format for General Information and Operating Instructions: 1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches. 2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and maintenance. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch. 5. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions: 1) Provide white text on red background for general information or operational instructions for fire alarm systems. E. Format for Caution and Warning Messages: 1. Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches. 2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and maintenance. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch. 5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated. F. Format for Receptacle Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches. 2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. a. Include voltage and phase for other than 120 V, single phase circuits. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch. 5. Color: Black text on clear background. G. Format for Control Device Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2. Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch. 5. Color: Black text on clear background. H. Format for Fire Alarm Device Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches. 2. Legend: Designation indicated and device zone or address. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch. 5. Color: Red text on white background. 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation 2. HellermannTyton 3. Panduit Corp. 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap- around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip- on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. C. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. D. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. E. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use handwritten text. F. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. G. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 VOLTAGE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 11 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1. Brady Corporation 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Seton Identification Products 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth, or vinyl snap-around type markers. C. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers. D. Minimum Size: 1. Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches. 2. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified. 3. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches. 4. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches. E. Legend: 1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present. 2. Markers for System Identification: a. Other Systems: Type of service. F. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated. 2.05 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brimar Industries, Inc. 2. Clarion Safety Systems, LLC. 3. Seton Identification Products 4. Substitutions: Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. C. Warning Signs: 1. Materials: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 12 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self- adhesive vinyl signs. b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs. 2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners. 3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated. D. Warning Labels: 1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. a. Do not use labels designed to be completed using handwritten text. b. Provide polyester overlaminate to protect handwritten text. 2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer. 3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. 3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access. 4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. 6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 7. Conduits: Legible from the floor. 8. Boxes: Outside face of cover. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 0553 - 13 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. 10. Devices: Outside face of cover. C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. 1. Do not use adhesives on exterior surfaces except where substrate cannot be penetrated. E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. F. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws. G. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2200 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 262200 LOW-VOLTAGE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General purpose transformers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads. B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 260534 - Conduit: Flexible conduit connections. D. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. E. Section 262416 - Panelboards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.CFR 431, Subpart K - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment - Distribution Transformers; Current Edition. B.IEEE C57.94 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and Maintenance of Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 2015. C.IEEE C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 2013. D.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. E.NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers; 2015. F.NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications; 2014. G.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). H.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems. I.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. J.UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K.UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2200 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors required for mounting of transformers. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances required by NFPA 70. 3. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 – General Requirements. B. Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class and rated temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Vibration Isolators: Include attachment method and rated load and deflection. 2. K-factor Rated Transformers: Include K-factor ratings. C. Shop Drawings: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of transformers and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. D. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA ST 20 as design and routine tests. E. Field Quality Control Test Reports. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of transformers. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2200 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Temperature: Do not exceed the following maximum temperatures during and after installation of transformers. 1. Greater than 10 kVA: 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) maximum. 2. Less than 10 kVA: 77 degrees F (25 degrees C) maximum. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Division 01 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation. B. General Electric Company. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products. D. Siemens Industry, Inc. E. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. F. Source Limitations: Furnish transformers produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed and manufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2200 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according to IEEE C57.96 under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet (1,000 m). 2. Ambient Temperature: a. Greater than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C). b. Less than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 77 degrees F (25 degrees C). C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation point, even at 10 percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core laminations to prevent plate movement and maintain consistent pressure throughout core length. D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectively seal out moisture and other contaminants. E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV. F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap. G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload capacity based on rated winding temperature rise. 2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings. B. Primary Voltage: 480 volts delta, 3 phase. C. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. D. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise: 1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 180 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C average winding temperature rise. 2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise. E. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded. F. Winding Taps: 1. Less than 3 kVA: None. 2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2200 - 5 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. 4. 500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. G. Energy Efficiency: 1. Comply with CFR 431, Subpart K. 2. Comply with the Department of Energy 2016 Efficiency Standards. H. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20. 1. 0-9 kVA: 40 dB. 2. 10-50 kVA: 45 dB. 3. 51-150 kVA: 50 dB. 4. 151-300 kVA: 55 dB. 5. 301-500 kVA: 60 dB. 6. 501-700 kVA: 62 dB. 7. 701-1000 kVA: 64 dB. I. Mounting Provisions: 1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. 2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting. 3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting. J. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor locations: Type 3R. 2. Construction: Steel. a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated. b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2200 - 6 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS K. Accessories: 1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets. 2. Weathershield Kits: Provide for ventilated transformers installed outdoors to provide a listed NEMA 250, type 3R assembly. 3. Lug Kits: Sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 K-FACTOR TRANSFORMERS RATED FOR NONLINEAR LOADS A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 1561, and designed to supply nonlinear loads to the degree designated by the UL defined K-factor; ratings as indicated on the drawings. B. Primary Voltage: 480 volts delta, 3 phase. C. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. D. K-factor Rating: K-4, or higher. E. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise. F. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded. Individually insulate secondary conductors and arrange to minimize hysteresis and eddy current losses at harmonic frequencies. Size secondary neutral conductor at twice the secondary phase conductor ampacity. G. Winding Taps: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. H. Neutral Bus: Sized to accommodate twice the rated secondary current. I. Energy Efficiency: 1. Comply with CFR 431, Subpart K. 2. Comply with the Department of Energy 2016 Efficiency Standards. J. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20. 1. 0-9 kVA: 40 dB. 2. 10-50 kVA: 45 dB. 3. 51-150 kVA: 50 dB. 4. 151-300 kVA: 55 dB. 5. 301-500 kVA: 60 dB. 6. 501-700 kVA: 62 dB. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2200 - 7 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 7. 701-1000 kVA: 64 dB. K. Mounting Provisions: 1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. 2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting. 3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting. L. Electrostatic Shield: Provide grounded copper electrostatic shield between primary and secondary windings to attenuate electrical noise. M. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor locations: Type 3R. 2. Construction: Steel, ventilated. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. N. Accessories: 1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets. 2. Weathershield Kits: Provide for ventilated transformers installed outdoors to provide a listed NEMA 250, type 3R assembly. 3. Lug Kits: Sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated on the drawings. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test transformers according to NEMA ST 20. B. Sound Level Tests: Perform factory test designated in NEMA ST 20 as "design" test on each production unit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that suitable concrete pads, support frames and anchors are installed where required and that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transformers. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2200 - 8 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS C. Perform pre-installation tests and inspections on transformers per manufacturer's instructions and as specified in NECA 409. Correct deficiencies prior to installation. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94. D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 260534, 2 feet (600 mm) minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure. E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. F. Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished by the manufacturer. G. Mount floor-mounted transformers on properly sized 3 inch (80 mm) high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Division 03. H. Mount floor-mounted transformers using vibration isolators suitable for isolating the transformer noise from the building structure. I. Provide seismic restraints where required by local codes. J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526. K. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noise transmission. L. Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as shown on the drawings. M. Where furnished as a separate accessory, install transformer weathershield per manufacturer's instructions. N. Identify transformers in accordance with Section 260553. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01 – General Requirements B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS Sections 7.2.1.1 and 7.2.1.2. Tests and inspections listed as optional are not required. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2200 - 9 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 1. 167 kVA single phase, 500 kVA three phase and smaller: a. Perform turns ratio tests at all tap positions. 2. Larger than 167 kVA single phase and 500 kVA three phase: a. Verify that control and alarm settings on temperature indicators are as specified. b. Perform excitation-current tests on each phase. c. Measure the resistance of each winding at each tap connection. d. Perform an applied voltage test on all high- and low-voltage windings-to- ground. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments. C. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 3.05 CLEANING A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed transformers from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 1 PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Power distribution panelboards. B. Lighting and appliance panelboards. C. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service. B. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction. D.NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards. E.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). F.NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. G.NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. H.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems I.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. J.UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 2 PANELBOARDS K.UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L.UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M.UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N.UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted panelboards where indicated. 4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. 1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device upon request. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. 2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections. 3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where acceptable, series rated systems. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 3 PANELBOARDS 4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request. D. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA PB 1 as routine tests. E. Field Quality Control Test Reports. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements. H. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Division 01 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of panelboards: 1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 4 PANELBOARDS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ABB/GE. B. Eaton Corporation. C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products. D. Siemens Industry, Inc. E. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. F. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. C. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. 2. Listed series ratings are acceptable, except where not permitted by motor contribution according to NFPA 70. 3. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70. D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices. F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. 1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 5 PANELBOARDS 2. Provide 200 percent rated neutral bus and lugs where indicated, where oversized neutral conductors are provided, or where panelboards are fed from K-rated transformers. 3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 4. Provide separate isolated/insulated ground bus where indicated or where isolated grounding conductors are provided. G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. b. Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs, feed-through lugs, gutter taps, or oversized lugs are provided. c. Provide removable end walls for NEMA Type 1 enclosures. d. Provide painted steel boxes for surface-mounted panelboards where indicated, finish to match fronts. 4. Fronts: a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes. b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening. c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. 5. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. J. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective devices are provided, list and label panelboards as a complete assembly including surge protective device. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 6 PANELBOARDS K. Panelboard Contactors: Where panelboard contactors are indicated, provide electrically operated, mechanically held magnetic contactor complying with NEMA ICS 2. 1. Ampere Rating: Not less than ampere rating of panelboard bus. 2. Short Circuit Current Rating: Not less than the panelboard short circuit current rating. 3. Coil Voltage: As required for connection to control system indicated. L. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053. 1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable. 2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip companion overcurrent protective devices with ground-fault shunt trips. a. Use zero sequence ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings. c. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault sensing systems to control ground fault delay functions for system coordination purposes. M. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination. N. Selective Coordination: 1. Fusible branch circuit panelboards overcurrent protective devices shall be selectively coordinated with all supply side (fed from both the normal and emergency source) overcurrent protective devices. Provide recommended fuses from a single manufacturer to maintain published minimum ampere coordination ratios. O. Multi-Section Panelboards: Provide enclosures of the same height, with feed-through lugs or sub-feed lugs and feeders as indicated or as required to interconnect sections. P. Load centers are not acceptable. Q. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 1. Feed-through lugs. 2. Sub-feed lugs. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 7 PANELBOARDS 2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Tin-plated copper. 2. Ground Bus Material: Copper. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide bolt-on type. . 2. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated. E. Circuit breakers rated 1000 amps or more on solidly grounded 480V systems shall include ground fault protection. F. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide trims to cover access to load terminals, wiring gutters, and other live parts, with exposed access to overcurrent protective device handles. 3. Fronts: Provide lockable, hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 4. Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring gutters, and separate lockable, hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 5. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 8 PANELBOARDS 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Tin-plated copper. 3. Ground Bus Material: Copper. D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide lockable, hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring gutters, and separate lockable, hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 4. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. 2. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: 1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. 2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC. b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. c. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with upstream devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 9 PANELBOARDS 3. Conductor Terminations: a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide compression lugs where indicated. c. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. a. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger. b. Provide interchangeable trip units where indicated. 5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. 6. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated: a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel. b. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for protection of equipment. c. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Combination type listed as complying with UL 1699. d. 100 Percent Rated Circuit Breakers: Listed for application within the panelboard where installed at 100 percent of the continuous current rating. e. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Without using fusible elements, designed to limit the let-through energy to a value less than the energy of a one-half cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current when operating within its current limiting range. 7. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch circuits serving fluorescent lighting. 8. Provide listed high intensity discharge lighting rated circuit breakers with HID marking for all branch circuits serving HID lighting. 9. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. 10. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers. 11. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 10 PANELBOARDS 12. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: a. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator. b. Handle Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF position. c. Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for indicating when circuit breaker has tripped or been turned off. d. Under-voltage Release: For tripping circuit breaker upon predetermined drop in coil voltage with field-adjustable time delay to prevent nuisance tripping. e. Alarm Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for indicating when circuit breaker has tripped. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1. D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. E. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 260529. F. Install panelboards plumb. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 11 PANELBOARDS G. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered. H. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. I. Mount floor-mounted power distribution panelboards on properly sized 3-inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Division 03. J. Provide minimum of six spare 1-inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor. K. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526. 1. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on isolated/insulated ground bus. 2. Terminate branch circuit isolated grounding conductors on isolated/insulated ground bus only. Do not terminate on solidly bonded equipment ground bus. L. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories. M. Install a permanent label indicating the panelboard or transformer where the power supply to the panel originates. N. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation. O. Multi-Wire Branch Circuits: Group grounded and ungrounded conductors together in the panelboard as required by NFPA 70. P. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as indicated. Q. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated. R. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. S. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de- energizing essential loads where indicated. Also provide for the following: 1. Emergency and night lighting circuits. 2. Fire detection and alarm circuits. 3. Communications equipment circuits. 4. Intrusion detection and access control system circuits. 5. Video surveillance system circuits. T. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 260553. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 12 PANELBOARDS 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than 800 amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required. 1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. 2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection. D. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by NFPA 70. 1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation- resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required. E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. F. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation. G. Procure services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to observe installation and assist in inspection, testing, and adjusting. Include manufacturer's reports with field quality control submittals. H. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. C. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts. D. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. 3.05 CLEANING A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2416 - 13 PANELBOARDS 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed panelboards from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 1 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Wall plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 01 – General Requirements B. Division 09 - Finishes C. Section 260519 - Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. D. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. E. Section 260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. F. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Revision H. B.FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Revision G. C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction. D.NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices. E.NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. F.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G.UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H.UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I.UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J.UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 2 WIRING DEVICES K.UL 1310 - Class 2 Power Units; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings. 4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. GFCI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Division 01 - General Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Keys for Locking Switches: Two of each type. 3. Extra Wall Plates: One of each style, size, and finish. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 3 WIRING DEVICES B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated 2. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3. Pass and Seymour/Legrand 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. C. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. D. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of water source. F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. G. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices. 2.02 LINE VOLTAGE SWITCHES A. Line Voltage Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 4 WIRING DEVICES 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. Body and Handle finish: Color selection by Architect. B. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. C. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with red illuminated standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. D. Locking Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed switch actuator and maintained contacts; switches keyed alike; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. 2.03 LINE VOLTAGE OCCUPANCY/VACANCY SENSOR SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: See Paragraph 2.1(A) B. Product Description: Provide wall switch style occupancy/vacancy sensor capable of turning lights OFF when the space becomes unoccupied and ON when the space becomes re-occupied. Provide with 0-10V dimming capabilities and/or integral daylight control, where indicated on the drawings. Refer to drawings for occupancy or vacancy mode setting. 1. Material: Plastic. 2. Color: By Architect. C. Sensor Switch Requirements: 1. Sensor switch shall be line voltage @ 120/277 VAC, rated for 20A. 2. Sensor technology shall be dual technology: PIR and ultrasonic. 3. Sensor shall have field of view of 180 degrees. 4. Sensor switch shall be capable of operating with LED. 5. Sensor switch shall be set to: a. Auto-ON, Auto-OFF mode (Occupancy Sensor) b. Manual-ON, Auto-OFF mode (Vacancy Sensor) c. Dipswitch selectable to toggle between occupancy and vacancy mode. 6. Sensor shall be capable of turning lights OFF after 20 minutes of inactivity. Switch shall also have 10 and 20 minute overrides. 7. Provide device capable of accepting a 2-wire (hot and neutral) input plus ground. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 5 WIRING DEVICES 8. Sensor switch shall be capable of operating in conjunction with a 3-way switch per manufacturers requirements, where indicated on drawings. 9. Provide with 0-10V dimming control. 2.04 LOW VOLTAGE OCCUPANCY/VACANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: See Paragraph 2.1(A) B. Product Description: Factory-assembled commercial grade devices for indoor use capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control of load indicated. Mounting as indicated on floor plans. C. Sensor Requirements: 1. Sensor Technology: a. Sensor shall be Dual Technology, unless otherwise noted on drawings. Available sensor technologies: 1) Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies. 2) Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and audible sound sensing technologies. 2. Sensor shall be set to: a. Auto-ON, Auto-OFF mode (Occupancy Sensor) b. Manual-ON, Auto-OFF mode (Vacancy Sensor) c. Dipswitch selectable to toggle between occupancy and vacancy mode. 3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensor type in dual technology units. 4. Field configurable turn-on and hold-on activation with settings for activation by either or both sensing technologies. 5. Passive Infrared Lens Field of View: Field customizable to block motion detection in selected areas. 6. Sensor shall be capable of turning lights OFF after 20 minutes of inactivity. Switch shall also adjustable overrides. 7. Sensitivity: Field adjustable. 8. Adaptive Technology: Field selectable; capable of self-adjusting sensitivity and time delay according to conditions. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 6 WIRING DEVICES 9. Isolated Relay for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: SPDT dry contacts, ratings as required for interface with system indicated. 10. Coverage: a. Small Space (< 500 Sq Ft): 500 square feet minimum b. Medium Space (500-1000 Sq Ft): 1,000 square feet minimum c. Large Space (>1000 Sq Ft): 2,000 square feet minimum. Multiple sensors where shown on the plans. 11. Furnish with power pack or room controller by same manufacturer. a. Provide for zone control and maximum number of sensors connected to power pack per manufacturer’s requirements. b. Provide room controller with functions and quantity of zones as indicated on drawings and as required per manufacturer. Refer to Paragraph 2.9 for additional information. 12. Operation: Silent. D. Room Sensor Type: As indicated on Drawings. E. Corridor and Hallway Sensors: 1. Capable of detecting major motion with a long, narrow pattern designed for corridor and aisle sensing. Refer to lighting control details for product specification. F. High Bay areas: For areas with ceilings more than 15 feet above finished floor, provide high-bay ceiling mounted occupancy sensor. Refer to lighting control details for product specification. 2.05 ROOM CONTROLLERS / POWER PACKS A. Manufacturers: See Paragraph 2.1(A) B. Refer to lighting control details on drawings for types, configurations, performance requirements, and additional information. C. Description: Integrated lighting, dimming, and equipment switching control system for mounting in a concealed space, enclosure shall be plenum rated. Provide pre-configured lighting controller(s), with capabilities for manual setup, and software setup through programming port, configured as a standalone controller. 1. Room Controllers. 2. Power Packs. D. Dimmable Load Types: 16A per channel at 100 to 277VAC, 50/60 Hz: 1. 0 – 10V LED drivers. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 7 WIRING DEVICES E. Switched Load Types: 1. LED. F. Magnetic low voltage. 1. LED G. General Requirements: 1. Power Packs: a. Main Power: 100 – 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz. b. Input/Output (Refer to Drawings and Details for Input/Output Applicable to Project): 1) Line Power Inputs: 1. 2) Switch Channel Outputs: 1 or 2. 3) 0 – 10V Dimmer Outputs: 1 - Class 1 or Class 2. 4) Auxiliary Relay for Interface with Other Systems. 5) Auxiliary Inputs: Hold On/Hold Off as specified. c. Enclosure: Plenum rated, surface-mounted industrial control enclosure mounts directly to electrical junction box. 2. Room Controllers: a. Main Power: 100 – 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz. b. Input/Output (Refer to Drawings and Details for Input/Output Applicable to Project): 1) Line Power Inputs: 1. 2) Switch Channel Outputs: As Indicated on Drawings. 3) 0 – 10V Dimmer Outputs: As Indicated on Drawings. Class 1 or Class 2. 4) Device Bussing, Provide control bussing for the following: a) Low Voltage Keypads / Switches b) Photocells / Daylight Sensors c) Occupancy / Vacancy Sensors d) Wiring: CAT X, Digital, or per manufacturers requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 8 WIRING DEVICES 5) Auxiliary Relay for Interface with Other Systems. 6) Auxiliary Inputs: Hold On/Hold Off as specified. c. Enclosure: Plenum rated surface-mounted industrial control enclosure. d. Control Processor: 1) Integrates sensors and other low voltage controls, devices, and subsystems through multiple control interfaces with control network. Refer to drawings for functions and operation required by project. 2.06 LOW VOLTAGE KEYPADS / SWITCHES A. Provide low voltage keypads / switches with configuration, functionality and operation as indicated on drawings. B. General Requirements: 1. Custom engravable buttons/switches, refer to drawings for labeling. Refer to Paragraph C below for additional requirements. 2. Quantity and function as indicated on drawings. 3. LED indicators, as shown on drawings. 4. Configured to fit in standard gang boxes. 5. Color: By Architect C. Labeling: 1. Provide factory engraved labels for all low voltage keypads / switches buttons. 2. Refer to lighting control details on drawings for suggested labeling of lighting control equipment. Coordinate naming of scenes/control zones with the Owner. Provide a worksheet listing remote keypad controls, labeling requests and locations to the Owner for their labeling requests. 3. Do not order labels until Owner coordination is complete. D. Lighting keypad shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the lighting control system. 2.07 UL 924 BYPASS RELAYS A. General Requirements: 1. Refer to drawings and details for required functions. 2. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall automatically illuminate connected emergency loads upon utility power interruption, regardless of room switch position. (NEC Article 700) FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 9 WIRING DEVICES 3. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall include an automatic diagnostic, which is initiated when the room switch is turned off. This test procedure will turn the emergency luminaires on for at least 2 seconds, indicating that an emergency power source is available & that the device, ballast, & lamp are all functioning correctly. 4. Automatic diagnostic shall be approved to meet periodic testing requirements (NEC Article 700 NFPA 101 Chapter 7) 5. Local room switch, dimmer or lighting keypad shall turn both regular & emergency luminaires on at the same time (no dedicated emergency room switch required). 6. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall include a dry contact for 0-10V override during utility power interruption, where indicated on drawings and details. 7. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall have a minimum load rating of 20 Amps at 120V or 277V, general use 20 Amps. 8. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall accept 120V & 277V 60 Hz Input & Output (voltage tolerance +/- 15%). 9. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall include emergency power and regular power indicator LED’s and a manual test switch which are visible to room occupants when installed flush. (UL924 Section 29) 10. Load contacts shall be able to withstand 10 direct shorts while connected to 20 Amp breaker without permanent damage. 11. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall not generate any objectionable electrical or mechanical noise. 12. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall mount inside a 4-11/16” junction box with an extension & single gang plaster ring. 13. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall be installed flush to the ceiling or above ceiling adjacent to load controlled, such that test switch & LED’s are in plain view of room occupants as required by some local electrical codes. 14. The UL 924 Bypass Relay shall have UL94-V0 or UL94-5VA flame rating & be approved for installation above the suspended ceiling 2.08 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc. 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 10 WIRING DEVICES 5. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system, provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated. B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. 3. Body color: a. General Purpose Receptacles: color by Architect. C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 2. Automatically Controlled Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; controlled receptacle marking on device face per NFPA 70; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 3. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. D. GFCI Receptacles: 1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A. a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device. 2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style. 3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. E. Locking Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, configuration as indicated on the drawings. 1. Standard Locking Convenience Receptacles: Single, 20A, 125V, NEMA L5-20R. 2. Special Purpose Locking Receptacles: refer to drawings and schedules for NEMA locking configuration. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 11 WIRING DEVICES 2.09 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc. 4. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. 5. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system, provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated. B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. C. Finish as selected by Architect D. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws. E. Premarked Wall Plates: Factory labeled as indicated; hot stamped for nylon wall plates and engraved for metal wall plates. F. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed. G. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 12 WIRING DEVICES F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260533 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor. b. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter. c. Or at designated heights as indicated on drawings. 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. 4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2726 - 13 WIRING DEVICES G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. When stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, use insulated crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under screw terminals. H. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices. I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. J. Install wall switches with OFF position down. K. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left. L. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. M. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. N. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 260553. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI protected receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2813 - 1 FUSES SECTION 26 2813 FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fuses. B. Spare fuse cabinet. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements B. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. C. Section 262819 - Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; 2012. B.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C.UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D.UL 248-4 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 4: Class CC Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E.UL 248-8 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 8: Class J Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F.UL 248-10 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 10: Class L Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G.UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H.UL 248-15 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 15: Class T Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. See Division 01: General Requirements B. Coordination: FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2813 - 2 FUSES 1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for compatibility with indicated fuses. a. Fusible Enclosed Switches: See Section 262819. 2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed. 3. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain written direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves. 1. Spare Fuse Cabinet: Include dimensions. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Division 01 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Fuses: One set(s) of three for each type and size installed. 3. Fuse Pullers: One set(s) compatible with each type and size installed. 4. Spare Fuse Cabinet Keys: Two. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bussmann B. Littelfuse, Inc. C. Ferraz Shawmut D. Substitutions: See Division 01- Product Requirements. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2813 - 3 FUSES 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: 1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, time-delay. 2. Fusible Switches Larger than 600 Amperes: Class L, time-delay. B. General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay. C. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay. D. Primary Protection for Control Transformers: Class CC, time-delay. 2.03 FUSES A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system. C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch. D. Comply with UL 248-1. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as indicated. F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12. H. Class J Fuses: Comply with UL 248-8. I. Class L Fuses: Comply with UL 248-10. J. Class T Fuses: Comply with UL 248-15. K. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination. L. Provide the following accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 1. Fuseholders: Compatible with indicated fuses. 2. Fuse Reducers: For adapting indicated fuses to permit installation in switch designed for fuses with larger ampere ratings. 2.04 SPARE FUSE CABINET A. Description: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet with shelves and hinged door with cylinder lock, suitably sized to store spare fuses and fuse pullers specified. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2813 - 4 FUSES B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey finish unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for equipment. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive spare fuse cabinet. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized. B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. C. Install spare fuse cabinet where directed by Owner. D. Identify spare fuse cabinet in accordance with Section 260553. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2819 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES SECTION 26 2819 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes fusible and non-fusible switches. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 262813 - Fuses. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches and ratings of installed fuses. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. ABB/General Electric. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2819 - 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 2. Square D. 3. Siemens. 4. Eaton/Cutler Hammer. 5. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R or J fuses. D. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. E. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts. 2.02 NON-FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. ABB/General Electric. 2. Square D. 3. Siemens. 4. Eaton/Cutler Hammer. 5. Substitutions: See Division 01 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. D. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts. 2.03 SWITCH RATINGS A. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC or DC as indicated on Drawings. B. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 ampere), 200,000 rms symmetrical FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 2819 - 3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses (30-600 ampere switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING WORK A. Disconnect and remove abandoned enclosed switches. B. Maintain access to existing enclosed switches and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel. C. Clean and repair existing enclosed switches to remain or to be reinstalled. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 260529. B. Height: 5 feet to operating handle. C. Install fuses for fusible disconnect switches. Refer to Section 262813 for product requirements. D. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 260553. E. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 1 LIGHTING SECTION 26 5100 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Exterior luminaires. C. Emergency lighting units. D. Exit signs. E. Ballasts and drivers. F. LED Driver emergency power supply units. G. Lamps. H. Luminaire accessories. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. B. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. C. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches. D. Lighting Fixture Schedule as indicated on drawings. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.47 CFR 15 - Radio Frequency Devices; current edition. B.IESNA LM-63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information; 2002 (Reaffirmed 2008). C.IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products; 2008. D.IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Packages, Arrays, and Modules; 2015. E.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. F.NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; 2006. G.NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 2 LIGHTING H.NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2015. I.NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; 2012. J. UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K.UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L.UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations. 2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Coordinate placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility, installed by other sections or others. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire of the manufacturer. 2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request. C. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 3 LIGHTING D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA LM-79 and IESNA LM-80. a. Manufacturers’ Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer’s laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. b. Testing Agency Certified Data: Photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. c. TM-21 report for L70 rating at color temperature specified. 6. Ballasts/drivers: Include wiring diagrams and list of compatible lamp configurations. 7. Lamps/LED arrays: Include rated life, color temperature, color rendering index (CRI), and initial and mean lumen output. E. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on lamp mercury content and rated lamp life, showing compliance with specified requirements. F. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts/Drivers: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed. G. Field quality control reports. H. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. I. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts. 1.6 EXTRA PRODUCTS A. Provide (6) emergency lighting units complete with all labor and materials required for installation as directed by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 4 LIGHTING B. Provide (6) universal exit signs complete with all labor and materials required for installation as directed by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Division 01 – General Requirements. 2. Extra Lenses and Louvers: Two percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than one of each type. 3. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type. 4. LED Drivers: Furnish two of each driver type 5. Furnish one replacement battery for each battery type and size. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated remote components. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 QUALIFICATION DATA: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires. A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. B. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 5 LIGHTING 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within the manufacturers required service conditions during and after installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Unless otherwise noted in Lighting Fixture Schedule, Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units. D. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for batteries for self-powered exit signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in Lighting Fixture Schedule included on the drawings. B. Substitutions: See Division 01- General Requirements, except where individual luminaire types are designated with substitutions not permitted and the following: 1. Section 260400 – Product Requirements and as follows: a. Approved equals to the basis of design fixture as listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shall be accepted for review with the proposed substitute fixture meeting the following minimum requirements: 1) Be of the same general size, style and shape, including but not limited to lens construction and shading. 2) Be of equal or better quality and construction. 3) Be supplied with all required accessories to match the specified fixture. 4) Be supplied with all remote drivers, power supplies and cabling lengths to meet specified performance and control. 5) Provide the same or better distribution, efficiency, source lumen output, and L70 lumen depreciation metric. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 6 LIGHTING b. Provide point by point photometric calculations at the request of the Engineer for evaluation. c. The basis of design fixture listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule lists part numbers, specifications, options, accessories and source output available at the time of design. Substitutions shall meet these requirements as scheduled. d. The evaluation of an approved equal shall be at the sole discretion of the Architect and Engineer. 2.2 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers represented by Apex Lighting. 2. Manufacturers represented by Lighting Affiliates. 3. Manufacturers represented by Illuminate/Vanguard Lighting. 4. Manufacturers represented by Reflex Lighting. 5. Substitutions: See paragraph 2.1, B. B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. E. Provide products complying with Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) requirements. F. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, drivers, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. G. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. H. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. I. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 7 LIGHTING 3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters. J. LED Luminaires: 1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. 3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. K. Luminaires in Special Environments: 1. Showers: Provide with non-conductive trim. 2. Wet Locations: Provide with sealed and gasketed lens. 2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers represented by Apex Lighting. 2. Manufacturers represented by Lighting Affiliates. 3. Manufacturers represented by Illuminate/Vanguard Lighting. 4. Manufacturers represented by Reflex Lighting. 5. Substitutions: See paragraph 2.1, B. B. Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. C. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps/LED arrays to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. D. Battery: 1. Sealed maintenance free lead calcium unless otherwise indicated. 2. Size battery to supply all connected lamps/LED arrays, including emergency remote heads where indicated. E. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. F. Provide low voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 8 LIGHTING G. Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test and diagnostic status. 2.4 EXIT SIGNS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers represented by Apex Lighting. 2. Manufacturers represented by Lighting Affiliates. 3. Manufacturers represented by Illuminate/Vanguard Lighting. 4. Manufacturers represented by Reflex Lighting. 5. Substitutions: See paragraph 2.1, B. B. Description: Internally illuminated exit signs with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. 1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location. 2. Directional Arrows: Universal type for field adjustment sized so that they are clearly visible at a distance of 40 feet as required by local codes. 3. Mounting: Wall, ceiling or pendant as indicated. Provide universal mount exit signs where indicated. 4. Housing: Varies, refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule. 5. Face: Varies, refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule. C. Self-Powered Exit Signs: 1. Product Description: UL 924 self-contained emergency lighting unit. 2. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. 3. Battery: Sealed maintenance-free nickel cadmium unless otherwise indicated. 4. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. 5. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 9 LIGHTING 6. Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test and diagnostic status. D. Accessories: 1. Provide compatible accessory high impact polycarbonate vandal shields where indicated. 2. Provide compatible accessory wire guards where indicated. 2.5 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers represented by Apex Lighting. 2. Manufacturers represented by Lighting Affiliates. 3. Manufacturers represented by Illuminate/Vanguard Lighting. 4. Manufacturers represented by Reflex Lighting. 5. Substitutions: See paragraph 2.1, B. B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. E. Provide products complying with Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) requirements. F. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, drivers, reflectors, lenses, housings, poles, brackets, bases, vibration dampers, isolation pads and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. G. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. H. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. I. Provide IESNA full cut-off classified products unless otherwise indicated or provide products with backlight, uplight and glare (BUG) ratings as indicated. J. Provide products with IESNA light distribution as indicated. K. Provide products with internal/external house-side shields as indicated. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 10 LIGHTING L. LED Luminaires: 1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. 3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data or as indicated. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. 4. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. 5. Diffusers and Globes: a. Refer to Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule for types. b. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. c. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. d. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. 6. Housings: a. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink unless otherwise indicated. b. Powder-coat finish unless otherwise indicated, color selection by Architect. 7. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. a. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: 1) “USE ONLY” and include specific lamp type. 2) Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 11 LIGHTING 3) CCT and CRI for all luminaires. B. METAL FINISHES 1. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS A. Manufacturers: 1. eldoLED. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Lutron Electronics Company. 4. Osram Sylvania. 5. Philips Lighting Electronics/Advance. 6. Substitutions: See Division 01- Product Requirements. 7. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, for each type of luminaire provide ballasts produced by a single manufacturer. 8. Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the luminaire schedule or on the drawings, substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated. 9. Provide ballasts/drivers compatible with the approved lighting control systems. B. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements: 1. Electronic Ballasts/Drivers: Inrush currents not exceeding peak currents specified in NEMA 410. C. LED Drivers: 1. Product Description: LED dimming driver. a. 4-Wire (0-10V DC Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers b. Digital (DALI Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers c. Digital Multiplex (DMX Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers 2. General: a. LED dimming shall be equal in range and quality to a commercial grade incandescent dimmer. Quality of dimming to be defined by dimming range, freedom from perceived flicker or visible stroboscopic flicker, smooth and continuous change in level (no visible steps in transitions), FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 12 LIGHTING natural square law response to control input, and stable when input voltage conditions fluctuate over what is typically experience in a commercial environment. Demonstration of this compliance to dimming performance will be necessary for substitutions or prior approval. b. Ten-year expected life while operating at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity. c. Driver must limit inrush current. 1) Base specification: Meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard of 430 Amps per 10 Amps load with a maximum of 370 Amps (^2) – seconds. 2) Preferred Specification: Meet or exceed 30mA(^2)s at 277VAC for up to 50 watts of load and 75A at 240us at 277VAC for 100 watts of load. d. Withstand up to a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A. e. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10 percent line voltage input. f. Total Harmonic Distortion less than 20% percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements at full output. THD shall at no point in the dimming curve allow imbalance current to exceed full output THD. g. Driver must support automatic adaptation, allowing for future luminaire upgrades and enhancements and deliver improved performance: 1) Adjustment of forward LED voltage, supporting 3V through 55V. 2) Adjustment of LED current from 200mA to 1.05A at the 100 percent control input point in increments of 1mA 3) Adjustment for operating hours to maintain constant lumens (within 5 percent) over the 50,000 hour design life of the system, and deliver up to 20 percent energy savings early in the life cycle. h. Driver must be able to operate for a (+/- 10%) supply voltage of 120V through 277VAC at 60Hz. i. Driver should be UL Recognized under the component program and shall be modular for simple field replacement. Drivers that are not UL Recognized or not suited for field replacement will not be considered. j. Driver shall include ability to provide no light output when the analog control signal drops below 0.5 V, or the DALI/DMX digital signal calls for light to be extinguished and shall consume 0.5 watts or less in this standby. Control deadband between 0.5V and 0.65V shall be included to FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 13 LIGHTING allow for voltage variation of incoming signal without causing noticeable variation in fixture to fixture output. 3. Light Quality a. Over the entire range of available drive currents, driver shall provide step-free, continuous dimming to black from 100 percent to 1 percent and 10% relative light output where indicated, or 100 – 10% light standard. Driver shall respond similarly when raising from 1% to 100% b. 1) Driver must be capable of configuring a linear or logarithmic dimming curve, allowing fine grained resolution at low light levels c. Drivers to track evenly across multiple fixtures at all light levels, and shall have an input signal to output light level that allows smooth adjustment over the entire dimming range. d. Driver and luminaire electronics shall deliver illumination that is free from objectionable flicker as measured by flicker index (ANSI/IES RP-16-10). At all points within the dimming range from 100-1 percent luminaire shall have: 1) LED dimming driver shall provide continuous step-free, flicker free dimming similar to incandescent source. 2) Base specification: Flicker index shall less that 5% at all frequencies below 3) 1000 Hz. 4) Preferred specification: Flicker index shall be equal to incandescent, less that 1% at all frequencies below 1000 Hz. 4. Control Input a. 4-Wire (0-10V DC Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers 1) Must meet IEC 60929 Annex E for General White Lighting LED drivers 2) Connect to devices compatible with 0 to 10V Analog Control Protocol, Class 2, capable of sinking 0.6 ma per driver at a low end of 0.3V. Limit the number of drivers on each 0-10V control output based on voltage drop and control capacity. 3) Must meet ESTA E1.3 for RGBW LED drivers b. Digital (DALI Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers 1) Must meet IEC 62386 c. Digital Multiplex (DMX Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 14 LIGHTING 1) Must meet DMX / RDM: USITT DMX512A and ANSI E1.20 (Explore & Address) 2) Capable of signal interpolation and smoothing of color and intensity transitions 5. Driver: Approved by dimming system manufacturer as suitable for operation with control unit and suitable for LED source type and quantity specified for luminaire. 2.8 FLUORESCENT AND LED DRIVER EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers represented by Apex Lighting. 2. Manufacturers represented by Lighting Affiliates. 3. Manufacturers represented by Illuminate/Vanguard Lighting. 4. Manufacturers represented by Reflex Lighting. 5. Substitutions: See paragraph 2.1, B. 6. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, for each type of luminaire provide emergency power supply units produced by a single manufacturer. 7. Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the light fixture schedule or on the drawings, substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated. B. Description: Self-contained emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. C. Compatibility: 1. Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC ballasts, including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits. 2. Lamps: Compatible with low-mercury lamps. 3. LED Drivers: Compatible with LED driver and LED arrays. D. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamp(s)/LED arrays to the emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. E. Battery: Sealed maintenance-free high-temperature nickel cadmium unless otherwise indicated. F. Emergency Illumination Output: Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 15 LIGHTING G. Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator light to display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency operation. H. Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test and diagnostic status and field selectable audible alert. I. Operating Temperature: From 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 122 degrees F (50 degrees C) unless otherwise indicated or required for the installed location. J. Accessories: 1. Where not integral to fixture, provide compatible accessory remote combination test switch/indicator light mounted on ceiling adjacent to unit or as indicated. 2.9 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems” for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with heavy duty swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage minimum. D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. F. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING WORK A. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps, and accessories. B. Extend existing luminaire, emergency lighting and exit sign installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified. C. Clean and repair existing luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs to remain or to be reinstalled. D. Relamp existing luminaires and test at substantial completion. E. Test all existing battery units, repair or replace at substantial completion. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 16 LIGHTING B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533 as required for installation of luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs provided under this section. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. F. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires: 1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires. 2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified as suitable to do so. 3. Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or framing members or to building structure. 4. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure. a. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 5. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box, heavy-duty swivel hangers and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 17 LIGHTING 6. In addition to ceiling support wires, provide two galvanized steel safety wire(s), minimum 12 gage, connected from opposing corners of each recessed luminaire to building structure. 7. See Division 09 - Finishes where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements. G. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage. 2. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners. 3. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible materials according to listing. 4. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. 5. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. H. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire. 2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for specified mounting height. 3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet nominal length, with no more than 4 feet (1.2 m) between supports. 4. Install canopies tight to mounting surface. 5. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure. a. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 6. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box, heavy-duty swivel hangers and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 7. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and wire support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 8. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers. I. Exterior Luminaires: 1. Install lamps in each luminaire. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 18 LIGHTING 2. Bond and ground luminaries [metal accessories] in accordance with Section 260526. 3. Aim and adjust luminaires with distribution aimed towards coverage area and parallel to curb line or to provide illumination levels and distribution as indicated. J. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire. K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. L. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. M. Emergency Lighting Units: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to un-switched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. 2. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units. 3. Install plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. N. Exit Signs: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to un-switched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. 2. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units. 3. Install plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. 4. Install suspended exit signs using pendants from swivel hangers. Install pendant lengths required to suspend sign at height indicated or as instructed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. O. Fluorescent and LED Driver Emergency Power Supply Units: 1. For field-installed units, install inside luminaire unless otherwise indicated. Where installation inside luminaire is not possible, install on top of luminaire. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to un-switched power from same circuit feeding normal ballast(s) in luminaire. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. 3. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units. P. Remote Ballasts/drivers: Install in accessible location as indicated or as required to complete installation, using conductors per manufacturer's recommendations not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length to luminaire. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 19 LIGHTING Q. Identify luminaires connected to emergency power system in accordance with Section 260553. R. Install specified lamps in each luminaire. S. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in. T. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. U. Connect luminaires to branch circuit using flexible conduit, except for emergency lighting, which shall be in conduit completely. V. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. W. Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section 260526. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Division 01 – General Requirements. B. Inspect each product for damage and defects. C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. D. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. B. Clean photometric surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/2022 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 26 5100 - 20 LIGHTING 3.8 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. See Division 01- General Requirements B. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. C. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 32 1723.13 - 1 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS SECTION 32 1723.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Parking lot markings, including interior and exterior parking bays, crosswalks, arrows, handicapped symbols, and curb markings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; Current Edition. B.FHWA MUTCD - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; Current Edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1.Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2.Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3.Installation methods. C.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2.Extra Paint: 2 containers, 1 gallon size, of each type and color. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver paint in containers of at least 5 gallons accompanied by batch certificate. B.Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C.Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI (APL) No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated. 1.Parking Lots: Yellow. 2.Handicapped Symbols: Blue. B.Temporary Marking Tape: Preformed, reflective, pressure sensitive adhesive tape in color(s) required; Contractor is responsible for selection of material of sufficient durability as to perform satisfactorily during period for which its use is required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B.If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application of marking materials. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 32 1723.13 - 2 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS B.Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C.Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 1.Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods. D.Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each application; after cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. E.Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; provide templates to control paint application by type and color at necessary intervals. F.Temporary Pavement Markings: When required or directed by Architect, apply temporary markings of the color(s), width(s) and length(s) as indicated or directed. 1.After temporary marking has served its purpose, remove temporary marking by carefully controlled sandblasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method so that surface to which the marking was applied will not be damaged. 2.At Contractor's option, temporary marking tape may used in lieu of temporary painted marking; remove unsatisfactory tape and replace with painted markings at no additional cost to Owner. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Begin pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried. B.Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F. C.Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts. D.Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov) for details not shown. E.Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve control points until after markings have been accepted. F.Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on drawings true, sharp edges and ends. 1.Apply paint in one coat only. 2.Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum. 3.Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. G.Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other markings indicated on drawings. 1.Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces. 2.Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable. H.Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges and ends, of the design and size indicated. 3.04 DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENT A.Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked. B.Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly painted markings. C.Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not less than that recommended by the manufacturer. D.Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate from true alignment; exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or other deficiencies or irregularities. FedEx Annex - Cape Cod, MA Permit Set 04/25/22 - A & E Specifications 225 White's Path, Units 2 & 3 South Yarmouth, MA Catalyst Architecture/Interiors 32 1723.13 - 3 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS E.Replace removed markings at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION